Total Design Manuall

PROCESS ENGINEERING DESIGN MANUAL
1111
TOTAL
U m l
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPtSUR
Revisiot~ : 0
FOREWORD TO REVISION 0
Date:
Page Nu. :
2/85
I
The purpose of this manual is t o present in a practical way the process design methods to be used by TEP personnel lor quick calculations as well as detailed ones. They have been careluliy
selected by the most experienced engineers o f the Process and Operations Department
ITEPlDDPtDiPlEXPlSUR).
The physical presentation i s different from that of the other TEP/DDP/DIP manuals i n order to
get an easily transportable docurncnt as well as one whlch 1s convenient for photocopies.
Most methods are illustrated by seleeted examples.
Chapter 15 gives a selection of basic data which
is
sufficient for most calculations.
Chapters 16 and 17 consist of blank calculation sheets and Process data sheets that can easily
I I
be photocopied.
Blank pa& :are scattered along the chapters f o r personal notes.
In addition, blank pages are placed a t the end of the manual.
They arc to be used !or comments
regarding the content as well as the typing and prcsentation and should be sent back to TEP/DDP/DIP/EXP/SUR in Paris to be incorporeted in the next rcvislon. Use them plea= : they
will be part of our feedback.

The following persons have cooperated to the revlsion 0 of t h t manual : MM. J.L. BAGGIO,
P . BERLIN,
Ph.BOURGEOIS,
J . C .
FORESTIER,
B.K.
MARSHALL,
A.
MINKKINEN,
J.P. LUCIANI, M. LE METAIS, R. ODELLO, B. PERISSE, U. WEBER, Mmc K. COTTIN,
fl. LEGRAND
TOTAL
..
TEPIDPEXPISUR
urnvision '
I N D E X
Date :
Page No. :
I. DESIGN CONDITIONS
2. VESSELS (vapwr-liquid separators)
. . HorizontaI Vertical . . Tray Packed
3. COLUMNS
4. HEAT EXCHANGERS
. Shell + tube . Air cmlers
. Plate exchangers
. Furnaces
5 PUMPS
. . Centrifugal Reciprocating
6. DRIVERS
.
10.
. Gas turbines
Electric drivers
, Steam turblnes
7. COMPRESSORS
8. EXPANDERS
9. FLARE SYSTEMS
PIPES VALVES + FITTINGS
. Line sizing
.
,
Piplng classes
. A P through valves and fittings . Control valves - sizing and sdection
11. PIPELINES
Pressure and temperature drops
12. PACKAGE UNITS
. Dehydration , Refrigeration
13. UTILITIES
. Gas sweetening
Air , Drainage
. .
Watw Nitrogen
10.COMPUTER PROGRAMS
15. DATA
16. PROCESS CALCULATION SHEETS
L7. PROCESS DATA SHEETS

2
u
r u BML
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
r - r t u c t h h r l u b I I u t l r l t l N l r UtSltiN
MANUAL
R~Y~S; ~OII
Pave No :
Date
: 2/85
1. D E S I G N
CONDITIONS
TOTAL
TEPIDPlXPISUR
Revls~on :0
Page No
DEIGN CONDITIONS
Date : 2fg5
1.1
I . APPLICABILITY
The f~llowingdesign criteria are applicable far both feasibility studies and pre-project studie:.
2. PRESSURES
The design pressure of a vessel shall be taken as of the following ;
Operating pressure bar13 0 - 10 10 50 50

)
Desinn pressure bark MOP + 1 bar

MOP t 10 %
MOP z Maximum Process Operating
Pressure
I00
MOP + 5 barg
MOP+5%
LO0
Vesscls subject to
vacuum during operation shall be designed for
the maxlmurn external
operating pressure plus a margin of 0.15 bar.

1 1 the internal pressure Is 0.35 bara or less the vessel will be designed lor full vacuum.
Deslgn pressure for pump discharges shall be calculated by taking 120 % ofithe nvrmal
pump AP)when operating at design conditions.
3-0 DESIGN TEMPERATURES
Design vessel temperatures shall be as lollows : Maximum design temperature = Minimum design temperature =
max. operating Ternp
t
I5 *C
min. operating Temp - 5 "C
or minimum ambient temperature.
Consideratian for t l ~ rninlrnurn dcsign temperature must take
lnro a a u n t W
do~n.&~alhS.
d s @ f s s a u r m 4f Lhe v t s s ~ lthat m a y (Set sectlon on flaring).

4.0 MATERIAL OF
GCWE
durLng e m - e r w 9r&t
CONSTRUCTION
.
.
Details of the required material of c o n s t r ~ t i o n for various tcrnperatures are given in

Table I .
Details on corrosion allowances and wall thirkness a r t given i n the vessel design section.
TOTAL
TEPlDPlE>
t R e E a ENGINEERIND DPIGN MANUAL
Revision :
Data
Pws No ;
:UR
: 2f85
2,
VESSELS
TOTAL.
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
VAPOUR
- LIQUID SEPARATORS
neuisioh :0
Date: 2f85
Page NO. :
2.1
1. APPLICABILITY
Virtually sll procers zchernes use phase scpararlan. The deslgn and sizing of a separator with
acceptable accuracy b required for both the feasibility and pre-projet phases.
Consideration is given in this section l o the spccifkatian of vertical and harlzontal separators for vapow-liquid and vapour-llquid-liquid separation. Details are also given
concerning vessel internals,
Separation of solida from gas or Bquids is not cavcred in this design guide. Gencraliy a vendor will be cmsultcd for details a f a proprlctory designed vessel.
2. SEPARATOR APPLICATIONS AND COPWOERATEONS
2.1.
2 PHASE SEPARATORS (uwaly
unless stated)
. . .
Compres~lr a d Fwl G u KO drums
Efficient sepretbn of liquid from vapour rtqulred. Always consider a mlae elimina-. Provide sufficbmtirurge t1me)ll to 2 minutes) between ttte HLL and
t r l p p i q the compressor.
RdldS y r m KO drum See =tian

Udt ~ma#oaumP
9 4 F1are Sys%erns
R q h d upt~am o f acid gas ahsorbtrs, glycol conmetors and dcrslcant bed
dehydratws. Can ba incarporated into base of towcr for weight and spa= saviw.
Always
USE
dcrnuter pads.
Produetian W r a t o r s (Vertical or horizontal)

Liquid separation from eas not as critical as compr-lor
stpr_t*
KO drum unless a
C O ~ ~ W
ewnpreswr is located immediately downstream of separator. Always
--dm
and prvcas slu&swhen d e s -
2.2.
3 P W E -TORS
production separators are g ~ ~ l hlo r y i ~ @ l .If good liquid-vapour dc
entraimntnt is rqulrad dmisters arc usualjy stated. Oil scparatfon kom the water.must be sufficient s a as not to overload water treatment units Chemkd additives (demulsiflers, anti-Enam, pour point dcprasants) may be added
to aid m a t i o n .
PDTAL,
TEPIOPIEXPISUR
YAPOUR LIQUID SEPARATORS

Date:
Revis~on : 0
Page NO.
2/85
2.2
3. HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL DESIGN
.
H
Vapwr velacity! in a horizontal drum can exceed the llquld scttIlng velocity provided
LID ) 1. Far vertical drums the velocity cannot.
. .
Horizontal drums arc more effective and geometrically more practical for a heavy liquid phase removal than vertical drums.
A rising liquid level
in a
vertical drum dces not alter the vapaur f k w area.
Cmsqucntly vertical drums are preferred for compresmr and fuel gas KO drums.
y
, Vtrtlcal drums utilise a smalkr plot and

occurs.
arc easier to instrument with alarms and
shutdown controls. For (floating installatiom) they are preferred as less "sloshing"
Each design case must be evaluated separately but in general the Iollowlng can be u9ed
as
a guideline :
Qwtlcaldrums
Cm~~pre~sar KO drum
Degassing boots
Fuel gas KO drums
Absorber fctd K O drums
FCwtlfq instellatlmm '?
Horizontal drums
P r d u c t h n sqwatars HP 3-pharc separation
Reihrr drums
Flare KO drums
require special
.
I
Try to avold v e s ~ l s with wall thickness grea#r than 100 m m as th-
fabrication and can prwe expensive.

6- CALCULATION THEORY AND EQUATIONS (for use in calcuIation sheets)
(Valid only for pure gravity settlers with no intcrnals to enhance q a r a t i o n )
4.1.
LIQUID-YAPOUR SETTLING VELOCITY

s
=K
[ y p
0.003616(g) k
o.oo3616(ff[
pv- liquid or yap- density kglrn3 V$ - settling velocity m/s

K
r
(2) K ' =
la vs
P - PJ J
rv
- drag cocfficicnt P - vapour viscosity - centipoise

C
- particle diameter -microns
correlating parameter mls
10
A
TOTAL
TEPIOPIEXPISUR
VAPOUR
- LIQUID SEPARATORS
Revisiori :O
Page No. :
Date :
2/g5
2 . 3
For medium and low pressure with gases af viscosity less than 0.01 cp Figure 1 can be used t o estimate Vs.
(8)
For higher pressures (> 50 bar) or viscosities i n excess of 0.01 cp it i s necessary t o

calculate Vs. The drag coefficient C 1s calculated using Figure 2 (curve 2) where
t
CRe 2
f . ~ O ~ ~ , ~ o ~ " - ~ ~ ~ ~ ' ~ ( ~ - ~ v )
Equation 3 1s then used to calculate Vs.
PL
- 2
LIQUID-LIQUID SETTLING VELOCITY

(based on Stokes law of terminal settling) The fallowing equation can be used for calculating the settling velocity of water in o i l or the upwards "settling" of o i l i n water. The important fact is to use the viscosity
of the continuous phase 1.e : for oll s e t t l i q upwards through water use the water
v~scoslty,for water settling i n oil use the oil viscosity.
Ut =
L
Ut =
8.D 1 8
*PC
(p--fL)
terminal velocity gravitation accet densIty heavy fluid density light fluid viscosity (continuous) particle diameter
4 s
rnls2
p
c
70
f h
= l =
kglrn3
kglm3
kg1m.s
m
= D=
Setting the particle size
125 microns and using more useful units gives : U t in mm/min
(3)
Ut = O . ~ ~ O S
( P;I?-)
)& in centipoise
The above equatlon 1 s valid lor REYNOLDS number of 0.1
- (1.3
If calculated settling velocity is > 250 rnmlmin use 250 rnax
VESSEL VOLUMES
Partial volumes of a l~orlzontalcylinder can be calculated using the partial valurnt charts i n Figure 3 or estimated using the following equations :
(for vessels with a diameter
< 1.2
rn ignore head volumes)
TOTAL
TEPtDPlEXPlSlJR
Revision : 0
VAPOUR
Page No. :
- LIQUID SEPARATORS
Oste :
2/85
rn2
2 . 4
(see p a ~ c 2.13 for sketch)

HORIZONTAL CYLINDER
A~=D'A~CCDS
9-(;-h)PK"Z
m3
Arccos
Vc = A1.L
i n radians
2 DISHED HEADS
2 ELLIPTICAL HEADS
Vdh = 0.21543 h2 (1.5 D h) m3

Veh = 0.52194 hZ (1.5. D
2 HEMISPHERICAL HEADS
Vhh
1.047 h2 (1.5 D h)
- h)
my (most common)
rn3 (gives extra vol)
VOLUME UP TO BAFFLE (see page 2.23) 0.52194 hf for depth h

Ielltptical heads)
(1.50-h)
2
+ AL.B
.
.
These formula are accurate enough for general design and are easily programmed
on to 4 calculator for time saving. More accurate formula are available, ace ref list, but are often too complicated t o be useful for multip1e calculations.
For greater accuracy the l e n g t l ~L should bc the tan-tan length and not the
.
4.4.
flowpath length between nozzles. This is especially true w i t h large vessels and a tight design.
CALCULATION PROCEDURE VERTICAL VESSEL (vapour-liquid separation)
A guide for filling In the attached calculation sheet.
Decide i f Figure 1 can be applied i.c P
< 10 bata,
Y < 0.01
cp
lpplicable use the 500 micron curve to evaluate settling velocity (this assume?
a inist eliminator will be installed) or 150 micron w i t h no mist cllrrilnator. I t is
recommended to install a mist clirninator for most applications. If not calculate

Vs using equ 3.
.
. .
Derate the calculated settling velocity by 85 % design margin to give a

maximum allowable vapour velocity.
Calculate drum internal diameter and round t o nearest 50 mmb (further adjustment of I D : OD can be made to l u i t standard head dirncnsions). Check if wall thickness i s less than I00 mm (See para b.8).
t2
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Rev~sron :0
Page Mo. :
VAPOUR
- LIQUID SEPARATORS
D ~ t c : 2/85
2J
calculate v e s x l height based on following criteria :
h l :max (15 % of C or 400 rnrn)
n
hl
h2 r 100 rnm i f mesh selected

150 mrn for compressor KO
-7-
h2
I///
// ;
a
F&
h3 : max (SO % o f 0 or 600 mm)

I f no mesh use h l + h2 + h3
h3
.L
= 60 % d
or 800 mm
hl
m a
h S
h6
h~ : 900 mrn + dl2
= inlet nozzle
m u -
- - -nLL
u
WL
h5 : calculate based on 1-2 minutes residence time at
h7
maximum liquid inflow (rnin 200 rnm)

h6 ! base on follow~ng hold up times r (min 350)
.
i
TL
he
rcflux drums
4 min
product drums
heater feed
5 min 3 rnin
8 rnin
with pump
no pump
HP sep.
to LP sep.
Y min
h7 : 1-2 rnin residence tlme (rnin~rnurn150 mm)
h8 : 150 mrn tor bottom connected LC
300 mm for side connecred LC

Note :
Far compressor suction drums that are normally dry set HLL at b 5 O mm
above tan line and u x bottom connected LC. This will reduce vessel
height if required. No specific
HLL-ILL hold up
t~rne required.
TOTAL
TEP~DP~EXP~SUR
Revision: 0
Page No. :
YAPOUR
- LlQUlD SEPARATORS
mate:
2/85
2.6
4.5.
CALCULATlON PROCEOURE HORIZONTAL VESSEL (2 phase)

A guide on how to fill in the attached calculatEon sheet.
1. Calculate settllng velocity Vs far partic4Ksize 5 0 0 ~ (use Fie 1 or equ. 3.)

2. Ckrate this by F
= 0.85
and calculate required vapour
vclwit~ Vmm/s
Vm =
P x Y s x (LID) mls
use LID of 3 t o 4 max (3 first est)
3- Evaluate required vapout cross sectional area, Av

4. Assume drum is 70 % full i.c h/D = .I and evaluate drum 0 to give required Av
(to nearest 50
mm). For "dry" vwwls use h/D = .3>
5. For required(Jiqold surge volume) calculate vol at HLL, 1X insufficient adjust D or L (note 1 1 L/D changes signliicantly recheck Av using new Vm). 6 . Set position of LLL in drum and confirm required surge vol between HLL-LLL, If volume & Insufficient increase 9, L or h. Include volumes in heads.
7 , When setting LLL height take into account any LSLL, LSL alarms and vortex breakers which may set mlnimum value usable. Usually 300-350 mm.
8,
~tionalise all heights and dimensions to nearest 10 mm.
NOTLA :
For high volumetric flows of gas with small liquld volurnes consider using split
flow arrangement. Design ia as above but with half vapour volurnc
Haw.
Normal design is with top entry, exit nozzles, However if spacc is limiting
(primarily offslrorc) head mounted nozzles can be used to increase flowpath.
. -
i3
daignated as the flow path length i.e distance between inlet and outlet
nozzle. L ' is the tangent-tangent length. For 1st estitnates L ' = I + 1.5 9i + 1.5 82 02 c outlet nozzle diameter Q i = inlet nozzle diameter
"Normal" liquid levels are taken
as midway between the high-and low levels.
r4
TOTAL
TEPIDPlEXPISUR
VAPOUR
- LlQUlD SEPARATORS
f l o w areas
~evision :O
Page No. :
Datm: 2fb5
2.7
4.6.
CALCULATION PROCEDURE HORIZONTAL
VESSEL 3 PHASE (See Figure 4)
Sufficient residence time to allow separation of the ail-water mixt!trc as well as the o i l surge and vapour
must be provided.
1. Proceed with steps 1 t o 0 as for a two phase separation. Use L / D = 3 (1st

estimate) and evaluate L.
2. Provision now has to be made ta accommodate both oil and water surge volumes.
Use Tan-Tan Jength 1 'and not rrozz-nozz distance L .

3. Calculate L'LL required to give approx 4 rnins oil surge capacity (minimum).
Inspection will reveal whether sufficient height exists below LLL to include the interface levels. I f not, adjust the vessel Qor L to give sufficient room.
Note:
If the water cut i s very small, consideration may be given t o using a

water boot instead of a baffle arrangement ace step 10.
Having dstkrnined HLL and LLL now set both position and height 01 b f f l c . Calculate terminal settling velocity of watcr droplet (equ 5 sect b.2) and settling t i m t at both HLL and LLL; Volumetric flqw o f llquld h i n both cases the oll plus
the water. Calculate fall distance of a droplet across length o f the drum. Baffle height and positlon can now be set noting :
the baffle should be a t least 75 rnm below the
the baffle should be a t
LLL least 213 down the length of thc drum Irotn the inlet
In some cases the water droplets w i l l settle t o the f l m r in a short distance.
The baffle should s t i l l be s e t at a minimum a1 213 along the vessel.
.
6.
k l the HIL a t baffte height 7 5 mm. The LIL according vortex breaker + LSLL use a minimum of 300-390 mm.
before reaching water outlet. Use area at
t o height determined by
Check If an oil droplet will r i s e through the water layer (from drurn floor) to LIC
LlL
with normal oil + water flowratcs.
(Thls criteria is very rarely governing but must he checked).
7. Calculate water surge time b e t w t t n HI1 and LIL, snd residence time between NIL
and outlet. Remember t o use only one head volume, and length 01 drum upto baffle. Minimum acceptable times are '4-5 rnins. I f calculated times are very long consider using a watcr boot arrangement.
8 . Rationalise all dimensions and "tidytt levels to standard values if possible i.e :
150 mm, 200,250, 300 etc. This allows use o f standard displacers.
9. Rtcalcutate a l l residence times based on "tidicd" levels (if required).

Note : i n calculating the final residence times make sure that the vcsscl tantan length is used and n
the nozzle to nozzle distance L.
/5
TOTAL
TEPIOPIEXPfSUR
L .
Revision : 0
Page No. :
VAPOUR - LIQUID SEPARATORS

Oate : 2/85
2.8
10. Boot calcuIatian (See Fig. 5)
If the water volumetric flow is

70 design p r w e c d as follows :
50
$mail as to not warrant a separate belflcd
settling campartement as detailed above a water boot should be used instead.
1. Prmeed as previaua upto step 3.

2. Calculate settling distance of water droplet when vesstl Is operating at LLL.
Water droplet should reach floor
gf
drum before 011 w t l e t . Remember that
the all e r l t nozzle w i l l be raised above the floor as a standpipe. Adjust drum
fl or
C to achieve &ttling.
3. Check that ~ t t i i n g is aim possible when operating at HLL, droplet to fall

below d r a w d f nozzle level.
4 Size water drawoff boot fl
(try to use standard pipe diameters). Celculate
rising vcloclty o f the oil in water, set downward velocity of water in boot at
90 % of this and evaluate bwt q. Boot length b y inspection (use standard

displacers).
Note -
Boot fl must be less than 35 % of vessel 0

When heavy walled vessels are used a remote boot may be more
economical t o prevent large cuts in the main vessel.
4 . 7 .
NOZZLE SIZING (see section 10.0 also)

Inlet nozzle
Size bawd on normal volumetric Ilow + 10 % (liquid + vapour flow)
.
.
4.8-
L i m i t inlet vclocity t o 7 13 rnls Round nozzle diameter up or down to nearest standard sire Liquid outlet
Can outlet
Size an normal flow
Normal flaw
10 %
Velocity limit 15-30 m/s

Manholes : 450 mm or 600
.
,
Velocity limit
1-3 m/s HC
2-4 m/s water
Min. diameter = 2" (avoid plugging)
VESSEL WALL THICKNESS
Calculate vessel wall thickness usin8 the ASME VIl1 div. I formula. The wall
thlckness should be calculated immediatly after
t
D is knowtr t o confirm if
<
100 mm.
(TOTAL[
VAPOUR
- LIQUID SEPARATORS
Di = diameter
t
:
Revision :O
Date : a185
Page NO. :
2.9
mm
rnm
barg
wall thickness
P = design pressure E = jolnt etficlency
ure 1 for seamless shells -85 otherwise S 3 rnax. allowable stress bar
corrosion allowance mm use 3 m m unless stated
use 1220 bar for CS plate 1000 bar for 55 plate

for
100 <
oth,erwise by EXP/TRT
t C I00 mrn t < 150 mm

t
no fabrication problems
vendor advkc may be needed
>
130 mm
: Major labrication problems
In order to meet standard vessel head sizes and wall thicknesses the followlns ranges shwld be
observed :
Vessel diameter : 250
n m in increments of SO m m i.e. 250, 300. 350... 1300 4000 m m i n increments of 100 mm i.c. 1300, 1400, 1500
- I250
-
...
Srandhrd wall thlckn=tser
- 30 mm in increments of 1 mrn
30 60 m m in increments of 2 rnm 60 140 rnrh in increments of 5 mm
i.e.
1,2, 3;4... i.e. 30, 32, 3(r, 36..,
i.e. 65, 70, 75, S O . . .
Vessel weights either MdsontaI or vertical can bc estimated udng Flg. 6. 'This tigurt is for the steel shell Including manholes, nozzles, Iittings etc but nut the removable internal5 or support skid. The heads can be estimated by using weight of 2 heads z e2
I I
(m2) x wall thickness (mm) x 20 ks.
5. VESSEL INTERllALS
1,
1.1.
MIST ELIMINATORS
mesh pads are located under the vapwr outlet nozzles at all compressor sucrion drums and fuel gas KO drums. For production separators it is slways good practlce to install an exit mesh pad.
Mist tlirninatars or
- ..--
TOTAL
tEPIDPIEXPlSUR
Rru~ritrr~ : 0
Page NQ.:
YAPOUR
- LIQUIDSEPARATORS
Date:
A
2/85
2.10
Mesh is usually made from 304 SS. YORK DATA as follows : Types of pad : York ng Thickness Residual*
mm
entrain~nentPPM
1.L- 1.2
.I5
General purpose High efficiency Dirty service
43 1
021
144
100
192
115 80
100
- -61
326 931
604
1DO
110
.I7 1.6
-8
150
- -87
- 0.19
1.8
. .
5.2.
The engineer should speciiy type, diameter and thickness of pad required on
the vefisel data sheet.

For particle sizes o f 5 microns or less use two pads spaced 300 mm apart eg :
glycol contactor.
I N L E l 'TERNALS
Inlet internals can be specified l o aid feed distrlbulion and promotc uspour-liquid
separation. Generally for prt-project stage dctalla are not required. LIQUID PHASE INTERNAL5
5.3.
Vortex breakers should be dctalled for each oiIlcondensate nnd produced water outlet where the oulet flowdirection is vertical.
.
-
Vendors wlLI sometimes specify internal packs o f tilted plates or baffles or other arrangements to promote phase separation. Sand jetting facilities should be provided for on services where there i s a rBk
of
silting or sediment build up in the vessel. Generally jetting facilities are not requlred On gas-condcnsatc systems.
6.0.
SHORTCUT METHOD FOR
HORIZONTAL DRUM SlZlNG (2 w 3 phases)
EQUtPMENT N*
2.1 1
I] Calculate settling velocity V s

2) Calculate vessel diameter required lor drapltts separation :
s
3) Calculate vessel dlamcter reqdlred for sufficient liquid residence time :
"2
'
c
16 QIfres
m3/s
4) Select D = max (Dl, 02). Round ro upper value

Qg =
Ql
z
I
gas flowrate a t P,T
Vs
total liquid [lowrate settling velocity
m?s
m/s
D
F
LID =
ires :
vessel diameter m vessel design ratio (L/D= 3-41 security factor (0.85) liquid residence tilne
5:
'7
mIL3 TOTAL IC17

T~P~OWWP~IXP~IUR
PROCESS CnCCULATlON SHEET
..
SHORT CUT METHOD

HORIZONTAL DRUM
OAT
ITEM
Na
IOUNO
nv
1 I
CHU
1108 I I ~ L E
REV
TOTA'
TEPtDPIEXPISUR
Rovitio~l : 0
Page HI
YAPOUR
- LIQUID SEPARATORS
Oat% : 2/85
2.12
7.0 REFERENCES AND USEFUL LITERATURE
7.1. 7.2.
7.3.
LUDWIG VOL I CHAPTER 4

PERRY CHAPTER 6
Program calculates partial volumes Pierre Koch
OC3 Dec. 3 1983
2u
CALCULATION SHEET FOR VERnCfiL TWO PHASE SEPARATOR
EQUIPMENT
NO
1e3~
bare
'C
B E W S S ; N ~&oor
Operatinp data :
Pressure (operating)
= ~.WI
Temperature (operating) Gas MW

Gas flow rate
= 31,
= 51.4
Liquid description : C l l ~ b LD;L
Liquid flow rate
Gas density
(T,P)
= ?PI0 k g h 3 = 3.1
kdh
m3ts
Actual volume flow Qg
kgh
r
c
10290
6-97
Liquid density (T,PI kg/m3 Actual volume flow m3/min
2 10 = 0.t 3
= !So
Plrticle size
microns
Mesh pad
No
Esdmate Vs usin8 Figure 1 and 500 micron curve : , If P < 50 bar and p < 0.01 u x Fig. l and 150 microns
:
1. Yapour-liquid ~ t t l i n pvclocltv . :from Fig 1
'
VS =
&
m/~
. c :
vs =
rnls
* Delete as applicable
2. berating % = 85
3. Actual volumetric.
maximum velocity
~m
1.7
=
m/s
Drum flow area
0 . 57
m2
mm
as flow
~ . q qm3/s
Calculated drum 6 =
2 s :
5. Required liquid hold-up tiines
h>:
h6:
HLA-HLL
HLL-LLL
h7:
LLL-LLA
@no
= = =
min
mi"
0 . L 6 d
=
r
.
= =
700
mrn
mm mm
(.1cm3
min
~ . . / , 6 m3
30
lgoc 700
5. Mesh pad:
thickness =
mm
21
Sheet 1 of 2
. TOTAL ma3
PROCE~S CALCULATlOM S H E E T
IrrM:
TLFIOOP'O~P~IKP SVLl
a
CHK
c.".--
VERTICAL YAPOUR-LIQUID SEPARATOR w,

QSrt
lbl1111 I
SAM*?~L
D I ,: i;.
RtY
I Y
1 0 1NO
hl :
h2 :
I5 % of fl or lr00 mm (Use mar)

mesh pad
hJ
h3 : 50 % o f d or 600 mrn With mesh :h l + h l + h3 N o mesh : hJ + hZ + h3 1 60 % @ or 800 h4 a 400 mrn + d / 2 t d = inlet nozz fl
h5 a From step 4 or 200 mrn
rnm
5SO
700
mm
h6 : h7 : ha :
From step I or 350 m m

From step 4 or 150 rnrn 150 mm for bottorn LC
= =
mm
mm
300 mrn for side LC
I S
mrn
For ''dry" vessel
h6 + h7
+ h8
= $650 rnm
TOTAL VESSEL HT TANITAN

L L
7 . Wall thickness
.
*
DESIGN PRESSURE
CORt
;ION ALLOWANCE
P c 2.5 . C= 3
barg
mm
Diameter
D =
?OO
mm
Max st1 :s : 5 =,I220 bar CS

1000 bar CS
t
I
S = 1?r:3
2xsxE-1.2P
PxD
+c
Z A . 1
Joint eiflciency f.85)
E=
C l.j
Vessel weight (Fig. 6)

t =
mrn
m
She11 weight
IPCO kg
L=
(s+I)
Head weight =
(t
80 kg
D = s.-I m
x d x 20)
TOTAL WEIGHT r
1340
kg
22
-71
I r
TOTAL
cnn
PROCESS CALCULATION SHEET
VERTICAL VAWUR-LIQUID SEPARATOR 1TEM.

NO
!\I :.dv
I
'*J.-
Sheet 2 of ..<?-
atv
TIP'DWOR.IXP.SUR
m a IE
l ~ O Q ~ I ~ tL I
. 1 :
IOU uo
-.
2+1J
CALCULATION SHEET FOR HORIZONTAL 2 PHASE SEPARATOR
. Head type elliptic all^ Indicate on sketch if demister mesh requlred Delete as applicable
Omrating data :
EQUIPMENT N u ! v$oio
DESCRIPTION : I""'AS~
S f Prtplf! l o *
= %a Operating temperature .C = I g
Operating pressure bara
Gas molecular
weight
Gas mass f l o w rate

Gas density T, P
= h.,4 k d h = 14qSo kglm3 = 1f.u

m'f5
Liquid nature :
Liquid flowrate
0 ; ~ .
~g actual vol flow
Gas viscosiry
L.
CP
.
=
0 . !y?
~ l ~ u dendry id T,P ~1 actual vol flow
!?b6iu kgfln3 = 7CS

m3/rnin = microns
z
kgfh
'
e.O\o?r
Particle size
Vapour-lquid settling
velocity : frorn Fig. 1 1 -
*
C =
v5=
G.
-c
1
~nls
2. Max. vapwrr velocity
Vm=YsxFxL
vm=
1.8
mls
LID = 3
3. Actual vapour ~olurnetric flow
B
Av
Q g = 6-2-77m3/5
a = 3.'sh
V rn
m2
2'5
1 #I
PROCESS CALCULATIONSHEET
ITJT7
CM*
TOTAL
TE~~O~P,~IWEIPIZUR
CALCULATfOH FOR HORIZONTAL PHASE SEPARATOR
' I f L ~
.r
.dl,
Sheet 1 01 3 : , r * " ' "' '
No
to
o d rt
,on
rlrLr
r oS3
106 no
RIY
4.
Nozzle sizing I velocity limits (rnls)
Inlet : 7-13, Gas outlet : 15-30, liquid outlet 1 - 3
B i : Inlet flow = 0.31' m3/s (+ 1 %) c.3b 82 : Gas c. 'let = 9.2 $ m3/s Liquid outlet = a.Ci. m3/s
5. Drum sizing
For trial I t,,,
Nozzle ID =
I'
Actual vcl =
lo-5 tn/s
NozzIe ID = " Actual vcl = I T mls Nozzle I Dt & " Actual vel = .'. 1 m/s
= 4 mln
vol required = 4 x Q1 =
ID,^ m3
I
Selected h/D
Vapour area % fotal area {Fig. 31 Total area Liquid area
TRIAL
I
17-12
Av
At A1
m2
mZ
m rn
mrn
mm
Calculated drum
Selected drum
fi
LID O 41
Flowpath length
I I If 1 31 I c.GrC I a.ft62 I I I 1 t I I I :ro I t c n ~ 3 I 1

1 a*4
i0.c
I
1
"
I I I
I I I I
1 I I 2 I I I
I 1
L
L '
TanlTan length
HLL height Volume at HLL LLL height Volume at LLL Surge volume (HLL
mm
rnm
1 3 1 . C ~ j LO--3 I 1 !1'34 1 cs30

180r I 2.68 t I I I
I
m3
m rn
- LLL)
m3
m3
d n
Calculated NOTES :
tres
1
I I
SELECTED DRUM : DIAMETER 0 ?o.v
a1
I 3.3E I
1 I I I 1lt00 I 1 l?.q% I I 350 I 1 1.36 1 I I I..SC I

1 I
I
I
1
I I I I
I 1 1 I
I I I I
I I I
I I
I I 1 I
1 I I
I I I
I I 1 I
I I I
.I 1
of.
I I
m m x ; Z : , mrn tadtan
f anltan length L' iL + l + x bi + I t 62 (ignore this correctidn if D C 1.2 m and use L for volume calcs. For trial I uae t and ignore heads). .
b)
If VOL HLL is less than required surge increase D, L or h/D or reduce ires (by
Inspection).
'
2 4
rEPIDDPrDIP.EXP~SuR
1717
I I
ctix
TOTAL
EZ3
l
onrr
PROCESS CnlcuintloN SHEET
Sheet 2 of 3
-_
CALCULATION FOR HORIZONTAL 2 PHASE SEPARATOR
'rtM
Uo 100
'
IY
I 100 TI ~ L C
..n
,.
wo
RLv
6 . Wall thickness
, DESIGN PRESSURE , CORROSION ALLOWANCE
P=
22
barg
mrn
Max stress
CS = 1220 bar
C= 3
55 = 1000 bar 5 . l2:o
Joint efficiency
E=
0 .f l
t.
ig
rC.53
mm
Shell weight
(t x D=X 20)
= Il 0 0 0 kg
JdaO k~
Head weight =
rn
TOTAL WEIGHT
1 3 OOc
kg
. .
5heet 3 o f 3
1 f.:!
t
'
PROCESS cnLCU1ATtON SHEET
ltP'DDP,DIPtt XC'SUU
, ~ ~ p . q , b!'
L,qp.pi
to
!.
,...
n o L ' ! :
ntv 1
I-
I-
TXEllfAN'tENCTH L ' ;$00 FLOW PATH LENGTH L = +*am
.Amend ske~ehif h o t requitad inrtwd of baffle . Indicate on sketch
. Heads :2 :1 elliptical
EQUIPEMENT No : D 5 0 1 0 DESCRIPTION :
0F-yT L S 7 SLIAMT*&
if mesh rqulrtd
Operating d a t a .
Operating pressure
' Operating temperature
barn
Ad
CONDENSATE Flowrate
kg/h
kdm3
' C
= so
PC
Ql
Density T,P
= 3 1~ 3 3
719.h
Val flow T,P rn3/min x 0.3 I

Viscosity cp
kg/h
CAS MW
Mass flowrate
kglh
bi04
PC
WATER CUT
=6.7S 44fs
Density
T,P
kglm3 = 31. o
Flowrate
Density T,P
Qg Vol flow
Particle size
m3/h = = 0.0I03
PW Qw
kg/m3 = S t % Vat flow TIP m31min = o. 16P

Viscosity
cp
microns= I a :
t
rw
from Fig, llc0.85
= 17.54
1n/5
1. Vapour-liquid s e t t l i n ~ velocity
C
Vs = 0.17
Vm
2. Maximum vapour velocity LID = 3
3. Liquid-lit: I settling
Oil in water
= Vs x
rL
I3
Ut = 0.110l[&lf?]
rnrn/min
Utall =
&water
Pw
Wa~erIn o i l
rnmlmin
\IT
mrnlmin
26
L P I W P : ~ r t Y P5ua
a
CMK
TOTAL
mZY
DATE
CALCULATION FOR HONZONTAL 3 PHASE SEPARATOR
ITEM
orc~~:,~
no
> So10
.--
Sheer 101 4
~r
,,I
1
j rosrlr~t E n n r r r t i
108 wo
RIV
9-
2.19
I.
*Olz~a
:qelocity
....
I. Inlet [low :
(+ I0 %)
2. Gas outlet :
3. HC outlet :
4 .
Water
outkt
0.6
5. Vessel siring
.
tres oil
.-
trial 1
(HLL-LLL)= 4 mln
1. f 4
"
OIL SECTION
TRIAL
Selected h/D
I
I
I
I
calculated (QglVm) Av as % AT (Fig. 3)

Total area
Av
At
rn2
m2 mZ
Liquid area
A1
I 0.7 1 0.38 I I 1 rr I Sr 1 r4.r I \.u+ \ 3 I n-3L I o . Z k I o-6bh I 1.383

1 I 6So 1 1ObO
1
1
I
I
I
LlD 13
Calculated Q Selected P
41 Flowpath length TanlTan Length
mm , ,
1
1
1 1 \IIQ I I
I I 1
I I I 1 I
if00
I I
1
I
1
I I
I I
L
L '
h1
hZ
mm mm
mm rn3
HLL height Vblume' a t HLL

LLL height ' Volume at LLL Surge volu~nc (HLL
I I goo
I jLS0 I
1 (
CO-Q
1 3 . 2 I lFPo 1 io-0
I
1 1 .I I I I I
mm
m3
,
I
1 1
1100
- LLL)
m3
rnin
I 1 I I
b.63
LOO
I 7.1 300 I I t I
1 1 I
\.q
tlk
I I I I
I 1
I I
Calculated tres
Notes or comments :
) ,
, , .
I.,@
c=L+ H
h)mm
- Ignore if
27
<
'-2
CA~.CULATIONFOR HORIZONTAL
If PIOOPIMI~~XP'TUR
~ROCESSCALCULATIOH SHEET ITEM:orftwvt
TI!'
Sheet 2 of 9 ' I.fifi**': 8 ' : a
3 PHASE SEPARATOR
)tostnu
i*fiit;.r-
wo.. D iolo
100 NO
Rtu
UY
CHI:
OAT
WATEK SECTION
Trial I
B = 213 x L = 3 f 3
mm (rounded)
Total liquld vol flowrate

Qw
T
i
TRIAL n
* QI
1
OPS
Baffle distance Liquid area at HLL
Horizontal vel at HLL

Ut water (step 3) Verticdl fall from HLL = B X Ut/VI
B A1 Vl
mm
I I3.Ago
II
I
I
I
I I
IJClao
1.Jtt
I I
m2
mmlmin
rnrnlmin mrn
I b.S$L, I loff I 191.r 1

fSPd
CSI
I
I I I
I
I I I
I I7q.r
I95r
HLL vertical fall

Liquid area at LLL Horizontal vel a t LLL UJ water (step 3) Vertical tall'from LLL = 0 x UtiV2
mm
A1
VZ
'
I 1 mmfrnin 1 I
rnZ rnmtrnin
Q4l-t
dl10
I??.$
mrn
1240
Selected baffle height h3 Selected HIL level hq [adjust h3 and B if necessary)
rnm
I I 1 I I
[
,400
I n I I Clf
I tra I I a.82f 1 loC? I 1 I
I I I I I I I I I 1 I I
I f 1 I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I
I
mm
3fo
Chw.k oil r i w :
Horizontal vel at L L L Y2 Ut oil (step 3) Vertical rise within dist B m B x UtlV2 = max. outlet htlght
rnmlrnin 1 0 1 1 ~ rnmlmin I fk+
mm
rnm m rn
m3
m3
h5 selected LIL level

h6 selected outlet height
q l water vol at HIL (upto baffle)
92 water vol at LIL (upto bmfflt)
1 I I I I 1
boo
SO
I I 1
1 2L7 I I qcT
I I
I ST0 I I
I I
1 0 0
I I 1 I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I
I
I I
1 I I I I
I I I
I Za3
I I l.a\
I I -0 1 1 ?.I&
I
?r0
I
I
I0.6L
I 0.69 I 1-3c I 1 o I
I
q3 water vol a t NIL (upto balfle)
m3
m3
m3
l0.01
qU water vol at outlet (
q Eurge
= vol (ql - q2)
surt 'irne q surgelQw min r c s i ~ ce time q3-qQIQw rnin

calculated oil residence time (upto baffle) Yo1 (NLL NIL)/QI min
I 1 0 . I 1 0.&5 t I I I . I
9
I I I 1 I I I I I I I
I I I f
I I I I
I I
I I
I I I I I
I
I I I
I I
I I i I I
I i.17
?r
..
I
-*a
1.s
Y~XC
IA
I 1 I
I 1
I t
0Y
I I I
2 2?'
m T
LP'OOPlOIPltaPlIUR
I
TOTAL
CHK
Sheet
3 o f 4.
11
CALCULATION FOR H O R ~ ~ O N T A L , 3 PHASE SEPARATOR

oArc
:1
r: :
51
,:+t
.',
U O . r01o ~ ~
,nm W-
I I
I~
~ T I ~ KAI L F
<
r n ~
aru
6 . Wall thidntss
, DESLGN PRESSURE
P = bf.9 barg
C
Ma* stress
CS = 1220 bar
CORROSION ALLOWANCE
= 3
mm
55 a lD00 bar
5.
I'll0
Joint cf llcicncy
E = o.rJ
Shell wclght
lo Po0
kg
k&
L=
D=
1.r m
Head weight = (t x D X ' 20)
kcP
TOTAL WEIGHT = 1 2m e )
kg
24
rc~~nnm~nmm c11n ~r~o
PROCESS CALCULATION SHEET :C~(ir.cr;.r
5heet 4 of 4
Tf4T
-.
~ C ~ P ~ ' , ~ . ~ < I L
rva. 3
~ 0 1 3
TOTAL

V A W U R AND
fhviliol! : U
Pmgc NO :
LlQUrD SEPhRATOAS
TOTAL
TEPIOPJEXPISUR
PROCESS ENGINEERING UESlLiN MAIUU-L

VAPOUR
I,L~B..W~.
.
: 2/85
2.23
AND LIQUID SEPARATORS

Date
FIGURE 2 DRAG COEFFICIENT iCI
vs
RI or
c(
~ 4 2
3,
COLUMNS
TOTAL
TEPIDPRXPISUR
Revision : 0
Page NO.
TRAY COLUMNS
Oate :
2/83
3.1
1. p.pP~1chBfLlTY
It
is not expected that a hand calculatjon of a tray distillation or absorbtion column
be
performed by the engineer. For the purpose at a feasibility or pre-project rtudy any required r i g o r w s column sizing would be performed using SSI PROCESS simulator, or similar. Should, however, a quick tstlrnati~n of tower diameter and height b e required one of the
most common methods of hand calculation for valve trays is the "GLITSCH
METHOD". An
example of the procedure for this method is given in Section 3.

A detailed mechanical design of a tray column i s beyond the scope of this ~uide. For details
o) see packageunits. on ~ ~ l y ctowers,

2. DESCRIPTION AND NOTE5
2.1.
TRAYS
There arc basically three types of tray used L n dl3tlllation columns ;sieve, bubble cap
and valve trays. Each type has specific applications and flcxibilities dependant an the process criteria. Some of the major aspects a r t detailed as follows :
Bubble caps
Operation
: V s p w r passes through "risers" i n t o the bubble cap then bubbles into
the surrounding liquid on the tray. Bubbling action effects liquidvapwr contact. The liquid exits the tray via outlet weir and
downcomer arrangement to the tray below. Capacity

i
Moderately high t l l i c i e w y (minimum 50 861 i s maintained a t varying
rates due t o weir maintaining liquid head.

Etficiency
: For many years was the most common type of tray-consequently

many publlahed tray eifielencies are available from vendor
aources.
Note : most expensive type of tray.
Application
A l l major services excepts coking. pmlymer formation or other high fouling conditions. Ideal lor use i n low f l o w conditions where tray
must remain flooded to maintain a v a p u r seal.
Tray spacing :
18" Is normal. Consider 24" to 36" for vacuum conditions.
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
~ a u i s i a:l ~ 0
f RAY
Pago No. :
3 . 2
COLUMNS
oate:
2/85
Sieve trays Wlth downcorners Operation

:
W l t h w t downcorners Vapour rises through holes in

and
Vapwr rises through 118" to 1"
holes
and
bubbles
through
bubbles
through
forces
liquid. liquid Jarnc
liquid. Liquld flows across tray over weir via downcomer to tray below.
Liquid
head
countercurrent
through
holes t o tray below. Flow is
generally random and does not

form continuous streams from
each hole.
Capacity
As high as or higher than bubble cap trays for design rates or down
t o 60 % o i design. A t lower rates cfiiciency falls and performance
h poor. Generally unacceptable t o operate below 60 % capaclty.

Efficiency
: As high as bubble caps at design capacity. Efficiency becomes
unacceptable below 60 % design capacity. Not5ultablc lor variable
load columns.
Application
:
Syste~ns where
high capaclty near design rates are to be
maintained in continuous service. Handler wspendtd solld particles we11 flushing them down t o tray below. Can be problem to run with salting-wt sysxerns where trays run hot and dry, holes may plug.
Not recommended for oil

Tray spacing :
gas rervice due t o paor flexibility.
15" average, 9" to 12" accep-
table.
vacuum.
Vaive trays/ballast cap
Use 20"
to
30"
for
12" average, 9" to 18" acctptable. Use I S " t o 30" for

vacuum.
Generally the same aspects as [or sieve trays. Most valve trays are specialist proprietry design for specific operation problems and capacities. Specialist vendors
include GIitsch, Koch (flexitray), Nutter, Union Carbide. Best choice of tray for distillation application.
Tray layouts N o t only may the type of bubble caplvalvefsieve hole be specified for a particular
design but also the tray hydrauljcs by liquid path. Common arrangements are shown
i n Figure I.
---~~
TOTAL
TEPIOPIEXP/~UR
Revision : 0
Page NO. :
TRAY COLUMNS
Dale:
2/85
3.3
Tray eliiciencies General tray cfflclencles t o use : Absorbers
Stripping
Hydrocarbon oils + vapour 50-80 %
(Arnine towers ucually have 20 actual
Hydrocarbon oils + vapour 33-50 %

Amine units Dlstlllatlon columns
15-20 %
, 60-80 %
trays)
2.2.
CONDENSERS
.
.
Condensers are usually installed on the overhead of fractionation towers t o recover llquid product and provldc internal tower reftux. Design of condensers is covered i n shell
+ tube exchanger section.
Basically two types o f overhead condcnscr txlat, partial and total. When uslng a
total condenser the heat load is equal to the latent heat of the saturated overhead
vapour. The resultant bubble point liquid is split with some returning as
reflux and
the remaining portion as distillate product.

For a partial condenser the vapour withdrawn from the accumulator is in equillbrhm with the returning reflux arfd consequently the condenser i s acting as
an "external" additional tray. The vapwr is normally withdrawn under pressure

control with a l l or part 01 the llquld returning aa rttlux to the column.
2 . 3 .
REBOILERS
Generally three types o f reboiler exist for light hydrocarbon iractionarars. Internal rehoiler external "kt?tltn type external "heat exchanger" type rnmt cases the "heat exchanger".type furnace, electrical therrnosyphons
is preferred for elficiency.
.
-
The heat cxchanger should be located 2-3 rn below the exit nozzle from the
column so that sufficient head is available lor thermal circulation.

Reboilera may be heated by direct lire. electrical coil, steam, closed !>eating medium or process fluid exchange.
.
-
Values of U overall (lncl. fouling factor) for various types 01 reboller and deslgn
tnethods are given i n the heat exchanger design guides*
4/
TRAY CALCULArtOlJ SHEET

~olumm item :
a b \ G
Name :
ray number :
to =
Number 01 passes :
\AaC
Po = I f b a r a
I. VAPOUR AND LIQUID TO TRAY
I
I
I
1
FLUID
I I
kglh
I I
MW I
kmolfh
I 1
I *K
T,:
I I PC I bera
I / I
b/mS
d I5
I 1 I
I I 1
I 1 LIQUID
I
VAWUR
ii6rtoQi 31 L
I I TOTAL I
I
I
i s
I I I
i 304 i
I
1 1
i
I
I I
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
Comprcssibillty factor Z
Reduced temperature Tr
Redur~d Prt!shure Pr
From charts Flgure 1 , 2 or 3
Z = 0.6 7
page 15- 1 5
Yapour density
DV =
12.03 x MW
Z x (to
xP
12.03 r 3 1 . L
* Ld
273)
0.6't r
Vapour
actual rate
rc ~ ' D D l ~ b l P XP.$,JR ,i
BI
CHU
a 3
7
DATE
Sheet 1 o f 4
TRAY COLUMNS
ITEM
3 21d \ i
uo
I~orr~r~ I *t firf?tC
ran NO
3.6
2. LlQUlO FROM TRAY

to = i a
.c
use flgure 10 page 15-20

DL at to
=kt\
= 384 kglm3
kg/m3
Liquid flowrate = 4 F b s ~ kgth

C, = & k
= qgooo = 239 m3fh

All
--
DL
3. WWNCOMER DESIGN VELOCITY YO bE
TS =\? =hfo mrn "TRAY SPACING" DL D, = 3% kg/m3
YD drgo = 3 b rn3fh/rnZ From ilgure 2 P a ~ e 3.10 System factor KI 1.0 from table 1 Page 3.9 VD dsg = VD dsgo Y K1 = 3 t o rn3/hlrn2
4.
Y APOUR CAPACITY FACTOR CAF

T!j .,4.hmm
38 f r ~ m (Fig.3) on page 3.10 from (Table 1) page 3-9 System factor K2 =
CAF 0
CAF
50
= CAF x K 2 , l
,u.~t.
o.IB
5. VAPOUR EFFECTIVE LOAD V L w d
v Load = c . J ~ = m .
DL - Dv
3 r6
.
from (Fig.4) page 3 . 1 1
__II_______I----------
=I164m3/h
6. APPROXIlAATE COLUMN DIAMETER DT =!.S-m
_-__---
4Y
PROCESS CALCULATION SHEE1
st!cel 2 01 4
~EPIWPIOIPIIIIP'SUR
m
CUY
TOTAL
ITEM
4 !,
TRAY COLUMNS
OhfE
wo
100 N O
6I
1 IOB tart
<~411i-L
-.-.
3 . 7
3.2.
COL ,:1N HEIGHT ESTIMATION
7
1
1
"a
'1
i 1
62
1 \
I
a. H1 :
[ L I
1
I
' I
5 -
lnnlilion
I
I
See design details on vertical vapour-liquld separalots. Minimum distance for H I will be one tray spacing. Minimum distance between inlet nozzk and top tray 300 mm.
selected H I= 6 0 0
mm
b . HZ:
H2 : Tray spacing x (number of actual trays - 11
No.actua1 trays = theoretical traysltray efficiency

far tray
efficiency see section 2.1 page 3.3. Assume
= 50%
Actual trays
16
- if the column ht = q ( # l Note :
diameter changes over the length, the transition piece will be
long and H2 will increase by this amounl
Selected HZ = Cqro
mrn
$5
.-.....----.-.-

btrM
3:crG
Sheet 3 ut _ ___. --,. 4
___
T R A Y COLUMNS
-.
3.8
c. H3:
H3 = h l + h2
hl
tray
spacing x 2 = 900
rnrn
separatar sizing]
h2 = h6
+ h7 + h8 (see vertical
h6 = hold up time
For production flowing to :
. . . . .
hb
another column
storage
= 15 min 2
10
a
a furnace
anorher unii
reboiler/heat exchanger
I
h8 = 300 m m
:to00 mm
h7 = ip0 mm
4 h2 = 2500rnrn
H3 c h i
h2 = 3 7 e 0 rnrn
Selected H3 = 37 0 a
rnm
TOTAL COLUMN HEIGHT = H I
HZ + H3 = I I 0 f 0 m m
46
Ex3 m2Y
TOTAL
ItPOOPrblP E I I P I S U ~
oAtr

..I _ _ _ _
- -
_ _ _ I _
11IM
TNQ
> lCl<
_ ....- Slieet -4 of 4
I
ntv
T R A Y COLUMNS
Cmv
I I CuK
1 ronrlttt
irnt-*ri
1100 Ha
TOTAL
TEPlDPlEXPlSUR
Hev~siurr:
T R A Y COLUMNS
~sqc NU. :
3.9
Wale:
2/85
TABLE 1
SYSTEM FACTORS
Service System
Factor
Non foaming, regular systems

Fluorine systems, e.g.,
.............................................................. BFj. Freon...................................................... 0.9

. f
1.00
................................... 9 Severe foaming, e.g., MEK units........................................................... .60 Foam-stable systems, e.g-, caustic regenerators.....................................-30
Heavy foamlng, e.g., nmine end glycol absorbers
Moderate foaming, e.g., oil absorbers, amine and glycol regenerators.,....
.85
TABLE 2
Column diameter mln
Minimum recommended Tray spacing :7 5 m m
< 1 zoo
1 200 C 2 100 <
< a roo
<
4 200
g s
4 200
43.
TOTAL
TEPID PI EX PIS^^^
P R ~ L S ENGINEEH~NC YESIGN MANUAL

TRAY COLUmS
lleVlsJYll
. y e
mru
Date
: 2/85
3.11
Fig. ~ O A L L A S IT R A V O l A U C T E l
(FOR
Y LO80 -=Ch APPROYlMlTlON
PURPOSCL O U L I )
.a,.
LrnUlO
-*Dm
P I -
IW
low-
mass : T t
2 1 M
--. ma4 . Ism

IOaa
d
---
r ?. I %
:
ISL
110
ror r w n oars r n ~ v s
11 Dlrldr Y L m . 4 kl II LnPY LmmL h l 1 ,D . l . l . dl.n*lW l l r k*.L*.l h.7 Ik*
41 MWIUI,~,
*$O
li.-r.r
ODD
- ssa - ma -m v - >w
4 s
a00
ZlO
-am
5-
ISP
?W
-*
l
44
TOTAL
TEP/DPAXPISIJR
Revision
Pege Na. :
PACKED TOWERS
2/%5
3.12
1. APPLICARILITY
FEASIBILITY;STUDY : PRE-PROIECT
Under normal elrcumstances the deslgn of a packed tower would be detailed by a vendor based on process data supplied by the engineer. The detailed design transfer data for the fluids contacted. For the purpose o f this design guide detalls are given on the general arrangement of packed towers, various types of packing and loading and pressure drop correlations. The determination of the height of a packed tower should be evaluated b y a vendor or determined by the engineer I ! required using methods outlined i n design literature (set references).
of packed towers is
complex and requires spcclljc information regarding both packing type and size and mass
A detalled description is beyond the scope of this guide end is normally
unnecessary tor Ieasibility and pre-project level.

2. PACKED TOWER DESCRIPTION + NOTES
A general arrangement of a packed tower is shown in Figure I.

Packing
The correct selection o f a tDWe1 packing w i l l normally be made by the vendor M
d on the
required process, klowrates and fpressurt drops srated~ Details on pecking are given in :
Table 1 Packing service applications.
NOTES AND GUIDELINES
.
.
Carbon steel towers rnay be lined for corrosive service with rubber, plastic or brick deptnding
an the nature at the iluids being processed and the temperatures encountered.
Towers are generally loaded by dumping' the packing rather then stacking. Stacking is !nore
expensive and gives inferlo; liquid distribution but smaller pressure drap. Certain packing types will be stacked at vendor request.
7 0
-----
---..
..
TOTAL
TEP/DP!EXPISUR
.
II~vi~inll : 9
P a q Nn. ~ .
PACKED TOWERS
Date t
21~5
3.13
Packing heights per suppwt platelgrid should not cncted 12' (3,6
15-20' (4.5
- 6 rn) lor other packing types.
rn) for Raschig rings a!
Individual bed heights are normally limited t o 8
column diameters or 6 m msxlmum.
.
.
GoOd llquld distrlbution over the packing is necesssry to promote adequate p h w cmtact
within the bed. The streams of llquld should enter the bed on!3" 6" square .centres for small towers with D < 36". For larger towers the number of streams s h l d not be l e g s than (01612. Llquld re1 tributors should be installed after approx. 3 tower diameters for Raxhlg rings
and 5-10 d: ~netersfor other packing types. Redistributors are not generally required for stacked packing as the downward liquid flow Is vertical.
In order t o reduce ceramic errd carbon packing breakage accuring durlng flow surges holddown or floating 'bed limiters are installed on top of the packing. The limiter must be heavy
enough t o hold down the bed and be able t o resettle as the bed mavts.
For plastic or metal packing the bed limiter i s boIted i n place and doca not rest on the packing. Packed towers are not recommended
for
dirty service fluids nor for glycol dehydration.
Packed tower should be considcrcd i n preference to tray towers tor :
il srnall columns with fl'< 2 f t

ii) acids or corrosive liquids iii) highly foaming liquids
iu) low hold up times
v) law pressure drop requirement
51
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Revisloti
PageNo
PACKED TOWERS
Date :
2/85
3.14
6. REFERENCES AND
USEFUL LITERATURE
4.1 Applied Process Design for chemical +
Petrochemical plants VOL I 1 pp 129-239

4.2 Design I
ormation for Packed Towers
LUDWIG
NORTON Co.
Blrllctln DC-I I
4.3 Tower Packlngs
Bulletin
TF-78
I.
"
Packed Tower Internqls

Hy-Pack
TA-8OR MY-bO
CI-78
to
Interlox saddles
4.4 Dcslgn Techniques
for sizing
John 5. ECKERT
Packtd Towers
Chcrn. Eng. Progress Scpt. I961 VOL 57

John S. ECKEKT
Oil and Gas Journal Auk. 24 1970
4.5 No mystery in packed bed Design
4.6 Calculator Program for Deaignlng
V,I. PANCUSKA
Chcm. Eng. May 5 19110
Packed f owera
4.7 Packed column Design an a Pocket

Calculator
T . J . HtXSON Chem. Eng- Fcb. 6 198U

Ptrry Chemical Eng. Handbook
pp 18.19 4 18.47
kd Packed Columns
f2
TOTAL
TEPIDPIE WISVR
PROCESS ENGINCt+ia~u r-f)KlrBD
% x m 3
D8te
:2/85
( 0, 0.1111
mt.l.re hrplr *M Pmribdw .mu
I r twllhlhw 0
F r r l * M cnlv
W l u ' a hnl TUN

?h.lH b . . vtw C Irar ilk * I - I.(t*.
--
-wh "
psk;q
eartsct t&iiney; ewient; hrr-t,
mudly, the tmdlrr
p m u r c dm? in.
TOTA
TEPIDP/EXP/SUR
P~OCESS ENGINE~R~ND DESIGN YAWL

PACKED m
~ w ~ t:i o a
Dl10
;2 / 8 5
P-a No :
3,16
3,o
Techniques for Sizing Packed Towers

Reproducer 'rom NORTW 'Design 111, -matLon for Packed muera '
B u l l e t i n DC-11
hsMIrKw
-.-
.-.00
01Y M
0 1
02
0 . 4 06
tO
ZQ
40 W
Packing Factors
(DUMPED PACKING)
2. bnw c m k u m ~ q th. v r l w d K comull th. ElrrrmLTmd pmnw~ drop m h m n .ban. It -I! br noled that h+rm m r r.rin oc m 4 . d pavam*tm PBWLnl tRnn 0.mm 1.5 Imhlln 01 mior pusurn dmp #r lwl at pmcW d.Mh (4 rn 123 mm oi *mrar pmrwe dm@ Wr n w t ud pchM
E%,w. p c m o m m *mu k Owlnod to, at nudmum uonorrJU1 pruswa dm& Th. d n s n mu-
n m m w a a t d n m Un b W b . l m m m W w n n h i m a p r b l hrrlrnmni n bnt m m m t rsllt i n IO*. p ~ . bun drap ban. and law c l O l u l Lmwh~M r*. h4h.r m m ~ can u iw imwn r p n w u wan- p . l r u n a&, O;binmriI,, ~ c h m U mn.W -1.a a m 1.0 huh d n h r o r m m dme F M I d rcW d*Wh (W mm e l wrbr pr+uun amp mmtm q mchd 0mL.pth). H M h t pnsnun #OM In pn* rMn rmbMnlaimn is wcn an t o mJnWm a mm~lnl mrvsrum amp. 1 rb e n and rclmmrrlan bm W m d la h m w t r b r am bns g.00 opiabm, ir. IMU d w a r prrun d.l. p QI wehd kpM (17 a d SO nwn e l - M u lmrm d m m d u 01 ~ J m d wptnl. mmmpk.nc w m m v n d ~ r i l h n a m d..isrwd h r F..lum dr4m a i 0.50 IO 1 . 0 W k r rllU gr4llun d wp . r W d p l e k d Moth (a2 mn rn U mm 01 *tar pfwlun d m mr rrulm d p.ehmV d m * ) . Y . o l u h dhaib ! A m nm U ! a c m p l r l r mnm . Ipnwn dmp mnd l a w n d u d an r h . 1 t w Um .5cmpllshad .nd w M h u tk lwumbadml)k~glo*.dupnn.nor*haukk a mduer I m p n a m d s*mntan b h n m produd qua*. fhm a n y w r u u m p in m W mrt m . prumurm 8-0 parrm.hn S # J * m tho r e n u 8 l l r . d prruun drop wrmb- in in t m M rbtmr (mm d r b h r l . fh.rdorr. M n a n i g n l q ~dnrmr rlh OUn M ~ a s * .P d m 1 eom~arntlon s h a m bo m-n. n&ak w l r n lk. saell[c imvltv d tM b i d h suwunn.Yr i n s ih.m tkrt
0 1 the tmr *nich. whm l h . ).Chin[ srtuned nnd oprrrtrd r t aaaI#m lkuid earn rmf- d d*rmIb# tnr re1cet.d mnaaurr amp.
nrw ~h
tna nublishma the aibmrt.r
4 mr arplh d h m bw r w u l r d mltl b m d m n d m t upan thr, a#prwch Ia mml m a n trOn*fnr nsurnd r l l h lW% mlr. tnnllY tfmrrlk.lly rmuMI* r b d d innnil* depth.! Rm(ara 1 R . m .8 1 IMPS dnr8n.d 10 owmtm m t ma: nun 1 m m lr*nsIaf. In (re abwrutbn pmblam~.thm, b.d h uwmlw ~lleueyllledlmm the mala mmln c*,
*I&
Or d dnpprn# aperatan m lnrOhM h m a rc v ~ r m becanal: l
bream4 thr d n w H from th.r u I 0 M m Hauld ph8n. n i h m ma$tm-8.
fw
h m MH~ mmfn c m m d m t m. rnowlfl.) nr ) I s b. tmnsRrdlHr. H n h c droth ~ of towr wchbmL ft. 4 = tcwruwar -1 wmr, Ity C r h m r r u u r h 4tmorWarn v, ;-&tr;pniu%h ItdG. cmupanmnf i i tn eh.se m e h m h n of m m w m iL n
b c c m ~t h ~ m . d r il ~ Ivq~d la rnq S # I phma. T h m M n i l k t u ol tho t e r n tor the v b v a q u m l k n l lor w nna I . . r n r n f0IfC-w k m t M.U tnmia co-.mtient lb. rnom/n.a nr. ~ t m .
*.
I,.
~sui#lrrivn d t h liguid bulk H a w mom lr8dm d &rnpm-d lXB X, t liqul4 ohms# WI rraetipn. eunpovnl i X.* = * I d mas* mob Irmctbn m i tornpnnmnt i I* qrriHtiurn rlth E n bulk phrra motr mmmar CpmW"."t I .I 0
3. anr* h d n # d d m i n e d tha mlu4 oi
X 1s D . mbrchu *r U.p 1 . m du M l dm n o # r r t i y wrrm amp in f e p 2. a r mku a t Iha erdlrrrm. I . m q b. datnrmiw by lhr urr gT IM # a ~ n U r m d m w r e or- -Ua. Locrtm thw
-rum d me m b ~ l an s lhil ~ C r n * . ( t ~ ~ n umtu y the p p m r prbsnum a pramrtur a Centme*d: IkW m -tmlV h e m rn, paint b ( h . WI iund +qr d ttm ehrt m d nM ma v u w 01 w mdir~tm. 1411 n k n q - I m this smuv d *.firbin:
mrrr mu rwbstriptr 1 4nd 2 n l r r to thm mp rM bonffn mi tlw wkrnn r c r p d i w * E l T h m qwllon 01 &XI. i r .n.)qOu
bad h r d m * a r m Wmilmbh fofmalt abarDlbn and -ping omnfkm. b K l ~ 8 m I h .I a U On a h a m t b n M COI wilh ~ l u 8 t kr o d . Mlutlmn m m r w mmvMt* tw m m v-riaua p e w , N k ire( # all I unusual tm me ttm -10 m a I mllo in-m wunm tor orlrgn wilh whar p c Y n p 04 MMr nln w n tha. W rmeh OI& inlOmtiOiOn nfltl. Pdlilnlbn unth m ganwrlb d n i p M m tM b.bh u l MTP tnaifh~ .~U~Y.IWI10 I ~ ~ C O I ~ @ T. I * ) .~ I numind. d -11. barn n w l r n m l r l studlrs h r w u u r d U I lo cMLa ihbt tnr d n # 8 apturn mu ml. a rtlh tlw H I T ? *I&. (rmacd ihmt jcd d l l t n b u t i in nmntlimd and iha WebM w m ammtao wth p m w n wow d r l hmrt 0.20 mrm @ u r a r p f n w e amp mi IW . I p r k d m (17 rnm o t r ~ ornrun n amv uw m& at W e U d mpch). Mars m n s l u tmkl~## elm m p c M Oms. whmR m ) r lubrmmial a m d msuvm dmp aalwF.. -11 aecw i n d m r M l * f # I r mull d brbuhnl t0-i . I p a am %tid miner man 4 r 1 d f i s m n l 00.rvlmn gwmrwd b y Rlm mlutmnCn 1 1 lhm
rn~
ro itm q u r ~ b r lor r av~. ilwn r m .
dlul al r l u 8 h h n l i m n ere*# I ulha nswrty Of r M Y q W , 1 l u mckhq l a c l a r m d inn nr nle a. tho viraq c 4I h r hldd a n C. dat.rmimd FtanNm. uwrlmtm or m m r r m w a Th. W U r I n n o n d bI1 YI.L 61 naelim am i m n m tna an* on p e a 4. Orordb I W a W W U n * mmlkr Uun 1 imh . I nm 4 m t l d . d lor tw.n om trrr or s m l k r d m * , p r h t n p 1 ,men w L'H inch in un b r ton- mr o w M lo t n m h i 10.3 a 0.9 m a w ) m Mrrnwr urd z ot 3 rwh W P I . I ~ ~ a r m u n d la l a r m n Ulrn o r mole I n (( 0 9 m u n l in awmH N Thc d.rrlrm rnouY urn tha m m i raa of erkmn.
Th.
a n d thanlora .----.-..
..C.,,..lr
n l. M l--. eu . .
om. ma told ~ . dgmn d
h m w bt.n amtarm~md.t h damn or
lk p . ~ p rp u h u n ~f m o r
10
lkrs Rst
~-&rhurO w r must be rstab1,shd. O1Mral(l. hdlndua4 Dtd damn D h c u 10 csIumn d ~ m e t a r r r fO *nhoucn
n..
3. Har that mH vmrublll hew rmsqnod vrlues. O mar k clkUktW m n d me u~arnelurd ikm te-w aet.rmlnM by
C l O O l lOrw bnimmlls br* rmur4d to r*llltD 1111 lull p l e n tirlol lhm p ~ ~ u m na any .por!crlion. (3.. an@m.arlnm rnanu.1
TA.W.1
4 ,
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Rcv~s~o :n u
rry:++r
TEPIOPtEXPISUI
Date:
2/85
4.1
1. APPLICABILITY
It
i s not expected that a hand calculatian of shell and tube exchangers be performed by the
engineer. For the purpose of a feasibility or pre-project study any required rigorous calculation would be performed using computer pr%rams HTRI or HTFS.
A qulck estimation of heat exchange area, shell diameter and tube length should be h e by
hand calculation. An example of the procedure is given in Section 3.
A detailed mechanical design i s beyond the scope of this guide.

2. DeSCRlPTlON A N D NOTES 2.1.
DESCRIPTION
The flow of fluids inside the txchanger varies according to requirements and heat exchanger manufactured to TEMA standards ;
can be
single or multi-pass on elther tube or shell side. Figure 1 shows the types of tubular
The following types are irequently found t
2.2.
Exchengers (Heaters)
Evaporators (Kettle)
Candenserr Chillers luring refrigerants)
Reboilers [Therrno~yphon or forced circulation)
SELECTION OF SHELL OR TUBE 510L FOR THE FLUIDS a . Tube side :
Most of time highest pressure fluid
Cooling water, steam
F w l l n g or corrosive fluid
Sea water (it ir always recommanded t o install the sea water on tube aide)
b. She11 side :
Fluid with the highest viscosity Evaporation (refrigerants in chiller)
- Condensatian - Lcagt fouling Iluid
Most o f time lawest pressure Iluid
SELECTION OF TUBES
.
.
Standard length : 12'. Ib', 201 but longer tube lengths are possible {upto 00') Diameter commonly used :3/0", 1" Pitch commonly u x d : triangular or square. E~tcrnaltube cleaning is possible with square pitch only.
.
2.9.
&
TUBE SIDE VELOCITIES
.
.
IIK tube side velocity for most materials and services should be held bcrwecn abour 1.3 to 2.5 mls.
Below 1 to 1.2
mi5
fouling w1I1 be cxcessivt, much above 2.5 m/d erosion can

5 q
become a problem,
TOTAL
TWIOPIEXPIW~
Rc~lsion. 0
SHELL AND TUBE EXCHANGERS
pap* M~ :
4.2
'
>
2/89
CHARACTERISTICS OF
TUBM
BWG = BrRMlNtHAM WIRE CAGE
I1
I lnmM1 SECTION 1 THICKNESSl R E/ dlamcter lmml I (in el mm) I IBWGj (cm) I (cm21 1 1 External 1 I I I I I I 1 l Z i n I 14 I 2.10 I 0 . U 1 0.563 1 0.0399 I 1 (12.7 mm) I 16 I 6 1 0.950 1 0.694 I I I 1 18 I I I l a 2 1 1 0.819 I I I I I I 1 I I I 3jU in I 10 1 3.40 1 I.2Zu I 1.177 1 0.0598 1 1 (19.05 mm) I 12 1 2.77 I 1.351 1 1.435 1 I I I 10 1 2.10 I 1 1 1.727 1 1 I 1 16 1 1.65 1 1.575 1 1.998 1 I f I & 1.2P I 1.6% 1 2.159 1 I I I I I I 1 I Iin 1 10 1 3.40 1 Id39 I Z.7lb 1 0.0798 1. 1 (25.4mml 1 I2 1 2.77 1 1.986 1 3.098 1 1 I I 14 I 2.10 I 2.118 1 3.523 1 1 1 I 16 I 1.6 I 2.210 I 3.136 1 I I I 18 I i . 2 0 I 2.291 1 9.122 1 I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 I 4 i n 1 10 1 ? . P O I 2.994 1 4 0.0997 1 1 (31.75 mm) I I2 1 2.77 I 2.616 1 3 7 I I 1 4 1 2.10 I 2.743 f 5.909 I I I I I6 I 1.65 1 2.845 I 6.357 I 1 I I 18 I 1.2@ I 2.921 I 6.701 I I 1 I I I I i I I 1l/Z in 1 10 1 3.40 I 3.120 1 7.661 1 0,1197 I 1 (38.1 mml I 12 1 2.77 1 3.251 1 8.300 1 I I I I k4 I 2.10 1 3.378 L 8.962 1 I I I6 I 1-65 1 3.4110 1 9.5t2 I I 1 18 f 1 1.20 1 3.556 1 9.931 1 I I 1 I I I
External
1
[nlond
0.0266
I (kg/rnl l I
I
0.0295
0.0321
I 0.W
I I I
0.b90 0.384
I I
1 I I
0.0384 0.0424 0.0166 0.0495 0.OSZO

0.0584 0.0621 0.0665 0.0694
1 1.416 I 1.216 I I 0.963 1 I 0.772 I
I t
1 1
I
o.orm I I 0.0783 1
0.0822
0.862
I I 2.021 1 1.696 I 1.321 1 lart I 0.~11 I

0397
2.609 2.158
1 1 I 1.682 0.0894 I 1.340 0.0918 I I d 2 4 I

0.0981 0.102t 0.1061 U.1093 0.1171
I 1
1 2.635 I 2.039 1 1.622 1 1.237
I 1
i
1
,
3.185
li
2-6-
TEMPERATURE APPROACH AND PINCH
mlnimum temperature approach 5 ' C . minimum pinch for condenser o r chiller 3 'C,
2.7.
DESIGN MARGlN
.
23-
10 % on area in recommended.
PRESSURE
DROP
.
.
n!Jawablc
A P varier with the total system pressure and the phase of fluid.
t o 1.0 bar per exchanger arc common. The
id
pressure drops of 0 . 7
cquilralent gas drop i s about 0.2 to 0.5 bar.

hrne cxchangerr have low pressure losses and as rcboiler and condenser tless than 0.1 bar) trpccially those in vacuum system.
&J
TOTAL
~w/DP/cxPISUR
SHELL AND TUBE ~XCHANGERS

Oat* :2/85
1.3
2.9.
CHOICE OF HEAT EXCHANGER TYPE (Figure 11

a . Front endstationary head types
Type A : Used for frequent tube sldt cleaning due to the easc o f dismantling the cover.
.
.
. .
Type B :
Cheaper than Type A but the dismantling of the bonnet is more difficult. To be used for clean products.
Type C : Cheaper than Type A for low pressure. The price increases quickly
with the pressure. This type I s pracrically never used.
Type D ; Special for hlgh pressure P > 200 bar.

b. She11 types
Type E r . In general the most commonly used.
Type F : Advantage
.Disadvantage : -
; Fluids flow
at perfect counter current (F = 1).
Leakage between the longitudial befile and

shell decreases in
value.
preferred.
Mechanical problems from expansion.

Low prcsmre drop t g : < 1 bar (risk o f dama~e
01 the longitudinal baffle).

This typt should be avoided. A greater number
oI Type E shells in Series is
Type G 4 H :Used tor low AP J. 50 mbar as lor thermosyphon reboiler.

Vertical balfics are not installed lor t h c x types and due to that the length of the shell must be limited.
Type 3 : Uaed for high flow or high
AP for
Type E and also sometimes on
c.
. Type K : Used for vapor separation i s required ie chiller, some reboiltrs... Rear end, head types - Types L, M and N : Fixed tube sheet, used for clean fluid on shell ride and lor
Iow
AT
condtnsates to avoid the use of vapor belt.
< 30 ' C . i f AT > 30 * C
use other head types or install an expansion
joint on the sheil. Typc L and N will be used for dirty fluid on tube side. For the other cases the t y p e M wlll be urcd it is the cheapest. Typc P : Generally not uscd.
Type 5 : Used very frequcnlly, no restriction&

Type
T : For frequent dismantling, enpensive, she11 diameter larger than t y p t
.
7
S far same number of tubes generally not used. Typc U z For ckan fluids on tubrsidc no other restrictions, low cost.
Type W : Generally not uscd. d. Conclusion
Tot most frequently uscd types are I BES, BEW, AES, BEM, divided [low,
6 1'
--"- ..-
m u . "
TOTAL
TEPIDPIE"~~SUR
PROCESS ENGINEERING DESIGN HANWL

SllELL h t J D RlBE EXCHAWSRS
k.i*' : 0
P.g. No
: 2/85
4.4.
3 DETERMINATION OF ESTIMATED HEAT TRANSFER &REA

ITEM :
I I
Q
TI
I
kcallh
'C
I I I I I
VALUE
I I
6
NOTES :
I
I
I
I I I
DUTY
HOT FLUlD
I I
I Inlet temperrturc
I I I
O.fr10
I Indicate temperature I I
Outlci temperature T2
I I
I COLD FLUID I Inlet temperature t l I Outlet temperature t2
I I 1
'c
'C
I
I
I I 1
t r
I8
16
a&
*C
*C
-C
I I I I I I I I
I
i?
I I
T2-tl
formula
I 1 1
(1)
13J-?S=g
(fr-1Br+
I I . LMTD from I I t2-tl I
I T1-tl I I TI-T2
I I P-U-tl I TI-tl I I R~TI-TZ I tZ-tl

~ - F T ~ - carrection !D I factor (3) t
~ T N K B F R O F S ~ E L L S -----
-,---[ L
I
I
q/l
I I 1 I 1 I 1 I I I I I I I
*c
' C
*C
'C
I 1 3-r I I ?&-ti=? I I st.19=16
I I I
1
I 1
1
f
I I I
1 3b-t5-4
I I
2/11
o,f
l.llf
I I
I I I
I
I
1 I 1
1 I I I I
I
- c-[
I I
r-i
I I I I
I
I I r CORRECTED - LMTD - CORR. - Ir HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. I TABLE 3 Page 4.10
---
r-----
I HEAT TRANSFER AREA

A=+ U.LM D CORR
ui
----
- rI 7----i
t I I 1
I
I m2 *C I I factor I I r ----------I I 1 I I
mZ
kcal/h
I -
including foulin8
i
I I I I
I 1 I
sea a.0 ( LOO r S.cC
-2ifI
I
I
F = D.111
ruh* L
; C 17
ESTIMATED TUBE LENGTH CT(m) ~T~MATE SHELL D DlAM Iinr(rnm)
I
1
1 ESTIMATED WEIGHT Bundle I tonnes

I I t
I I
20
(c.1 1
1 3 h l I
3 1 [tqo)
' I& t d Y6
tA*s I1
Shell
------~WQO? MR~KP'SUI
J tannes I Total I tonne~ I I I
3 .C)
L.o
--
q .o
-
--_
1 l __---.
- - -
--
---L*t*',.*
I
63
.a%.
PROCESS U L C U U ~ O H SHEET
ITEM ; i l - ; < . . L . , -
SHELL AND f UBE HEAT EXCHANGER no

n ~ t ri
1 I
C I .
I lnm rartr
,II!,
i
rrv I
a .tz ,?t
~ n un n
TOTAL
TPR)PfXPlSUR
Revhion ;
Page No. :

Date:
2/89
4.6
(1) Use following formula
LMTD. (T2 tl) 1T1 tZ) LnT2 t l
- -- LnTt
t2
if T2
- t l > TI - t 2
T1-t2
LMTD
(TI
- t2) - (T2- t l )
'12-tl
if T i
t2 > T2
- t1
Remark : If tht htat exchange curves are not linear the LMTD should be determined step
by step w l t h the lintarisation of the curves and with the ponderation of the
partial LMTD by the partial duty on tach Iincar step.
(2) For total condensing

T E w m n P J .c
3y
26
I
5
hmpratur.
*WW+h
I
I*m l
D.np.h*ariw
- 2
Dm
>
/r
1
%.tm
Eond.amlnp
I d l l Y
In this case -alculatc the heat transfer area for each zone, the sum of these areas is the
surface for the exchanger.

(3) See LMTD correction factor (Figures 2 )
the number of shells should be chosen in order to have 0.8
IfF
(
<F < 1
0.8 add shells (2 exchangers in service)
1 . ESTIMATION OF SHELL DIAMETER

With the heat transfer area, selected tube sits, pitch, tubes I e n g t h ' i t is
possible to
determine the number of tubes and. w i t h table 1 or 2 hereafter the approximate shell
diameter.
Take maximum shell diameter abwt 60 inches.
6q
( TOTAL I
IROCESS,ENGINErnlNG DESIGN MANUAL
Revl$inm :
Papa No
SHELL AND TU8E E X C W W M
Dltl
: 2/05
TEP1IOPIEXPISUR
4.B
1
,-
TOTAL
P R O C E S ENGINEEAINII DESIGN MANUAL

SHELL
7WBE E ~ ~ ~ ~ G E R S
L
R4n.m :
.a
i ayr
IVU
TE~~DP~EXP~SU~~
OLtm
: 2/05
4.9
TLWLI k MI'
PITCU
1 I
I) I D L
C I T ~ A 1NVMOLIOF C
I
1 I,
I
I
I
r
H
17
76
rruusr~ orv~rrrs ruar

I
rum S SIDE
I
I
*
10
10
$8
I
10
!I
>1
n
31
Y 64
W
I?
%
1 1
IS
I? 95 IJI 111
T b
82
104
~fi
+n
1 2 . 1U
az
LIb 131
161
146
1%
I17
111 2 1 .
111
lm
13
IS I I ~
11 I/* ZJ l i b 13
I ?
1%
Z7*
120
a m
186
n m
JID
TABLE I
??a
111
MS
Wl
l n
3s
*I9
JIJ
a0 I
3 0 1
H 1
111
W
LbU
$70 +Jl
*A
1% W I
1 1 1
3%
bm
*If
1%
477
77:
n
$1
19 I 113
1 0 . I?> 1 1 1 lolb
I I II
JIC ILL712
111
119
m
UY
170
7SJ
199
a10
917 1017
I67
1071
301
iOJI
110
U Y 1011 1129 1110 111J
3lJ
LrM
ll t l
rni
Inr 1111 I0 2JY 1172
t2lZ
1/15 1111
ZDI?
tW.1
1Yl
m9
8117
a
I7 $7
61 14 Ia 3 110
Ib
>a
. I
37
IC
Ill
11Q
In
I 6b
I77 115
151
nr
).I
M a
m
171 J>l I10 6lh
tbb
9 m
IO>I
, n
a31 117
*I
131 *?I
YI
lola
IIH
llOI
In,
I%*
llJS IIS?
If*?
(includinp foul L W factors)

nrn#ndtmUq
kdh. m? Y
rnrrl* vsr.rl*rtr " h . I< l rs

C~~,SS
W-1100 2-0 Y P
. .
w-i n r r *
1C p
It0
rm. 190
-w
C&3
chlllrr d
1 1 110
a30 - 6 1 n
I.~M HL. I wircsrlr ~I 0 3 c P v . l e , .. r . , e H.C 0.9 c p c vw-ill

r.tsh...,n.C
.-1wsltr ' I C P
H m
100
kc.l/hrm2'~
x 0.2047 ' ~ ~ i p f t ~ * ~
r 1 .I62
W/m
*x
m-x4
>O-)W 9 0
-- bm -
putkmll.*
r n h m b - v *il
Itrsmlral*l
*.dlu
, U , , , , / U ' b i
nx. Y'Y""~
sl.~.rrr.le
slE.&nr,
n.c.0.9 CP n.c. wbc-ibr
* "C"
(
I IW 13 1 M m-1-
*imW 1 CP
am-w
w.m
1 lC P
TpTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISVR

SHELL AWD TUBE EXCIIANCERS
Revhion : o
Dale
:2/BS
pwe N . :
9.12
FIOURE 4
TYPE BEU
WEIOHT ESTIMATE
TOTAL
TEPtDFIEXPISUR
Revision : 0
P8gs ?Jn '
AIR COOLERS
htc:
1.13
1. APPLICABILITY For both the feasibility and preprojcct study i t would gentrally be required to state the requlrrd duty of the air -let, the overall dimensionn yld weight and an estimate of
required fan power.
A calculation prmedurc sufficient for a preliminary estimatt is given I n section 3.0.
2. DESCRIPTION AND GUIDELINE NOTES

Water or Alr Gaoling ?
.
.
Air cooling offshore is sometimes prohibited due to the modular layout 01 the platform.
This may require installation of the air cmler 1na rcrnoke from the associated
equipment. Use clorcd loop watcr cooling.
A i r caaling ia cheaper, simple and fkxible when compared to rumter cooling. The cost and
nulsancc of water treating Ii eliminated If air coolers are used.
.
.
. .
will not be as tffcctlve as watcr which will produce a cooler product stream. Air cooling is apprax 50-70 % as effective as water.
gg&ng
h warm climates
Fwced on induced draft ?
'Forced draft, pushes the air a t lowest available temperaturc~~highcst f

pow-. requirement.
hence lower
Acces billty to motor and driver are better on lorced. Structural and maintenance cmts
arc lower.
PassIbllity with forced draft ai hat alr recirculating into suction of fan thereby reduclng
efficiency.
. .
Induced draft gives better air distribution due to lower inlet velocity with less chance of rtcirculatlng o f hat air.
Indudd draft coolers can be easily installed
4 h v c piperacks or orher equipment.
Protection is given by induced draft coolers from effccts(oll rain, wind mawlpn&md tubes. Important i f fluid in tubes is sensitive to suddsn tamp change also freezing 0f
tubes can occur i n cold ckirnates or heavy snowfal!.
TOTAL
TLP~DWEXPI~UR
Rcvirion :
0
2 ~ 5
Page No. :
S.lI
Finned tube elements (see Table I)
.
.
I"OD tubing t most common w i t h 0.5" to 0.625" fins* Fin spacing 7 to 11 per inch. Exten. ' surface area is 7 to 20 times bare area.
Standard tube lengths from 6 f t to SO It I2 m t o 15 m). Lonser tube designs are less
costly than short ones.
Bundle depth may vary from smaller units. U l c
rowr so 30 rows of tubes, 4 or 6 r o w r is common l o r
U as first
estimate.
.
.
Fin material most commonly AL. Adequate vpto 400 ' C operating. Use steel for higher
temps. Fans and motors
Fans arc axial-flow large volume low OP devices U s e l o b 1 fan efficiency 65

efficiency 95 % .
%. Driver
Fan 0 equal to w slightly less than bundle width. Normally 2 Ians preferred. Fans have 4
to 6 blades. Max fan diameter 14'-16'.
.
.
Distanct between fan +.bundle 0.4-0.5 01 inn diameter. Ratio of tan ring area to bundle area must nat be less than 0.4. Fans may be electric, steam, hydraulic or gssoline driven. lndlvlduaf driver site usually lirnlted t o 30 hp, (80 Kw), 3110 V.
.
. .
Face velocity of air across a bundle is 300-700 LVmin (1.5-3.6 ms-11.

A 10 % change in alr flow rate results in
* 35 % change in power used.
Temperature control (Fig. I ) For c l o control ~ of process outlet temperature auto-variable pitch fans, top louvers Or variable spe@ rno.tws.are required.
Vmrlablc pltch fans are more efficient than louvers.
.
-
Louvers can be manually adjusted for winter
o r
night time operation.
For p r a c l s fluids that i r e c r e or gel at temperatures above the winter amblent a recirculation system is necessary t o maintain air temp enreriw the tube bundle.
General approach temp to ambient air is 20-28 'C. Absolute min is 10-12 'C.
I
- Air
Note
coolers are noisy. Keep fan speed as low as posslble and consider relative 1ayOUt
carefully.
72
TOTAL
.
f EPIOPIEXPI~UI
~ P U I ~ I I I :~ I{J
I*.rcJrc d r j
AIR COOLERS
: 2/65
4.15
4.0 REFERENCES AND USEFUL LITERATURE

5.1.
Air c w l c d heat exchangers
PERRY
LUDWIG
GPSA
pp 11.23
- 11.25
13. 3 .
1.4. 4 .
Air cooled heat exchangers

A i r cwled heat exchangers
pp 1 7 7
chapter 9
- 193
Aerial coolers
CAMPBELL pp 207-209
Design of air coolers
-A
R. BROWN
Prcrcedure for estimation
Chem. Eng, Mar 27 1978, p 109

N. SHAIKH
1.6.
b t i m a t c air cooler size
HP QICV program
Chern. Eng, Dee 12 19S3, p 61-70
73
>
4-16
OPERATING CONDITIONS AND NATURE OF PLLriD :

Duty
Fluid inlet temperature
I Q = 11 w to6
ITl=l
100
kcaIih
Fluid outlet temperature Fluid iniet pressure Air ambiant temperature Overall k a t transfer cgeff. Table f andlor aruchcd
w w k sheer) (Based on bare tube area)
I T2= I
r0
,C I *C I FLUID A r t = TI
- TZ =
SO
-C
l P = 1 10 barabr I I t ] = t 3a *C IINLETPI = T I - t l s 7-0 l U = I zoo kcalfh m2 *C I I

NOTES
STEP t * ~ptirnrrm number oi tube rows fat U selected 2 R = dt airldt m 3. TI TZ/Tl tl

4. Y = A t a i r / T i.-, t l IN=
(curve N* 4) P:?.
IR- I 1 'qjn 1
0.8
Q.2IA
*C
5 btair r % ( T I- t i ) 6. Exlt air temp t 2 =Atair + t1 7. Average dillerentlal temp. dtm
.*
I Y = I 8.35 Idtair.1 1 . I t2 = I S
I 1 I I
{curve N. 4)
(curve N' I )
.C 'Ct
1
Idtrn.1
I
30.d
I
1 I
1- Bare tube surface A
&-
I
IA:
1
9. Bare tube areafraw Fa=AlN
I I 326 I
i ,r
mz
I
m2 1 m 1 3, 4, 1, 6 , 7.5 or 9 m are I (1" 00 tubing)
m
kw
common
1 Fa = 1
1 0 . 11
12.
IL= I 7s fubcslrow TR = Fa/LnO.OS 1 TR = I L 8 Cooler width V=TRx0.0635 ) w I jl,l

Tube length
3. 4
1 16.
Totel lan power ~ F W . 7 9 5 ( Fp = 1 3t I, Number of fans INF*I t Fan diameter I F 0 . l 3.r

Powerllan F Q ~ N F
i
man. fan diam = 4 . 6 rn
I m 1
kW
17.
Estimated wclsht 4.88 (36.bX9.35 NIxwxL
1 PF r l L I M r I ilrfio I I
I
(including motors)
kg(
Notes : Curves numbers refer t o Process Design Manual Chap. 4.
70
PROCCSS CILCUCATION SHEET
AIR COOLER
H*hl&@,cr*
UO
. ,L
' 2
Li'-.
f I t f W C Q M X L IUI.
CWN
av
DATE
1 INttrit
LI(A~?PC~-
100NO .
REV
1
4.17
1.
rlQUUCOQLlNG
LIQUlD VISCOSITY AT 1 1 + T2
--T-
i ;
GLOBAL HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT r U
(Read curve n* I)
2. GAS COOLING MOLECULAR MASS :MU' =
GLOBAL HEAT' TRANSFER COEFFICIENT r U = (Read curve no 2)

3. TOTAL CONDENSATION
71-T2 =
'C
GLOBAL HEAT fRANSFER COEFFICIENT :U = (Read curve ng 3)

4. PARTIAL CONDENSATlON
I . w1Tnou-r L~QLJID AT
inlet gas flowratc
INLET
WGl
outlet gas flowrate WC2

outlet liq flowrate
T I T2
GAS MOLECULAR WEIGHT AT T i
+
WLZ
2
12 =
HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. Uc (Read curve n' 3) HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. Ua (Read curve n' 2) GLOBAL HEAT
I
TRANSFER COEFF.
U . WL~XUC+WG~ ug X prtl
SELECTED GLO8AL HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. r U
?z
PROCESS CALCWPTION SHEET
AIR COOLERS
ITEM
HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT

108TITLE
no. 100 no
rtv
kla
4.2.
WlTH LIQUID AT INLET
Inlet liquid flaw rate

outlet 11quld flow rate
WLI
WLZ
kglh
kglh
LIQUID MOLECULAR WEIGHT AT LIQUID SPECIFIC HEAT AT QL = )-I

x
=
CPl =
kcaVkg *C
kcallh
CPl x IT1 T2)
inlet gas flow rate WG1

outlet gar flow rate WC2
GAS MOLECULAR WEIGHT AT
GAS SPECIFIC HEAT AT
kgh
kgrh
v.
CPg
TL + TZ = 2
*
kcallkg *C
QC c (WGI
wG2) x CPg x (TI
- T2)
UI
=
kcallh
CONDENSATlON HEAT
Qc=Q-QL-QC
LIQUID
VISCOSITY AT T
kcallh
CPB
kcal/h rn2 ' C
kcallh rn2 *C
LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. (Read curve c* 2)

GAS HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. (Read curve n* 2)
Ug =
CONDENSATION HEAT TRANSFER

COEFF. (Read curve n* 3)
UC =
kcallh m 2 'C
GLOBAL HEAT TRANSFER COEFF.

"=
&
UI
U =
kcalfh rn2 ' C
Ug
Uc
SELECTED GLOBAL HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. :
U =
kcal/h m2 * C
76
& lI?IDD?'M?lIW3VR
#I CHk
.
AIR CQOLERS HEAT TRANSFER COEFFtClENf

OAIE 10I llllt
nru
106 No
arv
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
C L r I~
P I Q E P ENGINEERING DESIGN MANUAL

fix4 COOLUIS
LIWIDS
Ilmvi~h : 0
Date
I2/8S
P -
NO:
4,ZO
- ceoune IIYD~WIRUOH
--
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
PRDSLS
ENGIWEFRINO DTSIW MAMUL
inision :
PW* NO
I.? I
AIR COOLERS
Dotr
: 2/85
snr/hrft2*r
- 2 Fintub. 1 . h h r t-in. OD
.kh*~llrh lll(lk~ APF. rq k/k k b . 1 h*.h)I
3.60
14.5
3 S8
11.1
AR, q k ~ h
80.1 1 1 1 1 107.1 I . 114.0 101.0 id15 1340 lbrrd 134.1 1 178 2 140.0 k ~ A p r t l u r t ~ u r r J w n d f i * r . k i n . ~ nA# r ni ..~. w u ~ I * u r b r ~ ~ 4 h ~ ~in o 4D ri . k r r r~ d. ~ d I *hid b u *.MI q R I f L APSCb l k n v r u l a m in q hrb 01 b.nd& I- w.8,
tub. PI* A P Y 13 ,I4 nrrl
1 in.3
11.4
1% h
2% m ,
60 4
A 2 % in, 3 IQ I I0 1
11.2
.-
*-
2r....,.
U*.m I . . " , .
1m.1n-
. ". .....
-.
98.-1.2
I*#* -,> 4-.1

r - a
I
",
-a*
I , ,
u,
%I,#
FII
_. ___.I-
TOTAL
l~p~~~~EXPfSUn
C
dric d a o k m
p ~ l r f E H.
GK
Revis~on : 0
Page No. .
Date: 2/gs
4.29
1 . ~~PPLICA~ILITY
FEASIBIL~TY STUDY r PRE-PROJECT
Under normal c i r c u m s t a ~ t s ,the design wl plate type exchangers wwld be detailed by a

vendor b a d on process data supplied by the eqinaer.
Two types oi plate exchangers could be used z
.
or
sivtn.
Plete i l n exchangers ;
Plate exchangers.
the purpose of this design guide, only a quick description and
some charseteristlcs are
For plate fin exchsngtrs, the size could be done only by a vendor.
For plate eschanger3, the size could be estimated if some vendor {ALFA-LAVAL, APV, VICARB) inlormation are available.
An estimation of the heat transfer area could be done i f the hcat tranrier coefficient is
known using the same formula as lor 8hil m n d tube hcat exchanger w i t h factor
4
LMTD correction
= I.
The heat transfer coelficient is difficult to clrtimate; it depcnds on many factors
as flow rate 01 different iluids, pressure drop, plate spacing, etc,..
2. DESCRIPTION AND NOTES

2.1 PLATE FIN EXCHANGERS
Thee exchangers consist of stacked cwruyttd shrcls (lins) separated by flat plates and an outer irarne with openings for ihe inlet and outlet oi fluids. This core I s immersed In a liquid salt bath t o b r a z ~ all the separate parts together.
Flow in adjacent iluid passages can be coeurrent. counter current, or crossflow and
Sever?
uids can be erchangin~ heat at the $ a m time.

two
I n case of the inlet fluid & a
phases flow a drum is requlrtd to separate the two
phsses in order to hsve a good distribution.
These plate iin exchangers arc used only with clean fluids.
81
TOTAL
TEPTZIP#XP~UR
Rwision : 0
Paga No.:
AIR COOLERS
Qstt :
~fif
1.25
Figure I ahowr * t principle of coratruction of a platelin exchanger. A large amount of
surface can be accomodatcd in a small volumt (1,000 m2/m3).

Maximum design pressure r
Temperature range
59 bar&
1,220
r
I
- 195 'C
*C
t o t 6 1 'C
Size rnsx.
Ttmpersture approach
m m x 6 096 m m x 1 340 mm
2
:
Applicability
LNG, LPG recovery,
...
Prc~sur top as for shell and t u b heat exchangers. 2.2 PLATE EXCHANGERS
Plete exchangers a r t an assembly of metal plates stparated by gaskets to give a small

clearance between each plate. The two fluids pass in opporha directions each thrwgh every alternate plate. Refer to flgure 2.
Tht exctmnger Is easily dismantled for cleaning ii required. A good overall heat tramfer cotfiicicnt is obtained and small tempcraturc differences can be u e d .
The plates can be made from exotic malerials such as riianiurn which are redstant to
corrosion and u e used for sea water coolers. They are v t r y compact eschangerr find aeupy small i l w r area.
Maximum pressure
Maximum temperature
10-20bars
: 250 'C
(Need spcelal gaskets) Overall heat transfer cotfficint

Vatcrlwatcr
: 2 000
5 000 k c a l h m2 ' C
Maximum surface
: about 1 MO m2
Maximum ilow
Applicability : Sea water
: 2 500 m31h
- service water, water-TEG, TEG-TEG,..,

A P increase the overall heat
Prtswrt b o p s
allowable pressure drops vary according to the total system
pressure and the ~ r v i c o tf the flulds.
water #ervict water r 0.5 to 2 &r (high transfer caeflicitnt),

lor sea
lor water-TEG or TEG-TEG the dP cwId be very low such as 10 to 20 mbar.
3. REFERENCES AND USEFUL LITERATURE

Vendors iniormatlon.
>
2 ? 2
~0Tf\
'

p=m U C n m C Z R S
Rwision :
0'
Pwp tdo :
4.25
~~P~DPIExPISUR
PMTE F I N EXC-ILS
cww
: ?IB5
IIWCIPU OF mnstnucTKm
1. A . u * ZV d Y 14. * . d m I. . 1
I. * m
t
slaw h r m
ih.t
I. LR)
1 .P W W ovtW
10. El-
i l . P * M
I Z M U W ~ W *
I2.wmMbr
1b.-II
Llr**r
Y'3
D r n I t S OF PU'PE
TYPE EXCR*NECR
. TOTAL
1, UPLlCABTr'TY
--Rcvirlon : 0
P m p . Nc. :
FURNACES
D a a : 2/83
4.27
~ ~ ~ ~ o P I ~ x ~ ~ S U ~
i s not exy. -tcd that hand calculation of furnaces be performed by t h t engineer. It is normally done by 4 manufacturer based on p r m u s data suppllcd by the cn&inecr.
Furnaces are
used
to transfer heat directly to the process fluid md generally have a large
duty and produce high process tcrnpratures.
OESCRIFTION
2 . L .
A iurnact consists of the Iollowlng :
.
.
A cornbustibn chamber lined with refractory shd burners
. Tuber which is also .

which
Tubes which .re located within the combustion chamber and where heat i s transferred to tht process fluid by radiation
arc I ~ a t c d external t o rhc cornbusion chamkr in a convcctian zone

Iintd with refractory.
Stack for dirpasal of flare gas.
.
+
Alr supply system by tan ar induced drajt.

instruments and controls.
2.2.
TYPES O F FURNACE
23.1.
Cabin furnace
.
.
This
ifi a
rectangular furnace and contain$ t u b a which can be horlzmtal or
vtriic~l. The burners are rituated in the walls o r floor, and the cmvectlon
zone is laated above the furnace.

Flue gaser discharge to a stadt tither directly ar arc driven by an induced
drait fan.
.
.
Burners are normally arranged in raws on two wails and a r t spaced SO

provide a rad~atlon zone of constant tcmpcratun a d avoid
aj
to
flame
impingcment'on the Tubes. An alternative arrangement i s burners located In the floor ai the furnace as shown in Figure I . The connection bsnk conbins raws of tubes acrms which the flue gas
.
,
leaving the lurnace 1s d i g e d to pass A small negative preswrt is maintained to prevent hat gas leskagc.
There
i s a pressure lw in the flue 8as syste~nand this h l s to be made up

&
fan discharging to a s b r t stack or by natural bwyancy creating drait in a tall stack.

+
either by we ot
$5
TOTAL
tEPIDPlEXPISUR
nrv~rion:
~ a g ~ ~ o . :
FURHACW
Date :
2/85
b.28
1.2.2- Cylindrical furnace (see Figure 1)
These furnaces arc vertlcal and contain rndistion and convection zones or
KI~CIJ
tadistlon zone.
. .
2 . 3 .
The burners are h a t e d in the bottom and the radiation zone tubes can be vertlcal or hcli&~dal. The convection bank is located above the radiation zone and contains rows of horizontal tubes.
Cenermlly the stack l s vertically above the convection bank wlth no f u k
BURNERS
.
2
Two types nf burner are used in furnaces, induced air or natural draft burners
and lorccd drait burners.
. Induced air burners

These can burn gas or fuel oil simultane~uslyor independently. Excess air
required 1 s 15 % to 20 % for gar and 30 % t o h 0 % lor liquidsl If fuel oI1 is burned 0.3 k @ g
oil of steam is required for atomisi*
Pressure burners
The air far prrs8ure burners is supplied by fan. I t is therelore capable of control and the burner can operated wlth less excess air 5 to iS '16.
3. EXCESS AIR
.
.
Determine the excess air recommended by the burner manufacturer and the type of burner air system proposed. k t 1 2.3. From thk determine the kg of flue 68s per kg of fuel fired remembering that air
contains 21 96 Vol 01 oxygen.

I .f TACK GAS TEMPERATURE
This i s controlled by 2 iactors :
.
.
The process fluid inlet temperature w i l l dewrminc the temperature o f the gas Jeavhg I h t convection bank.
Condensation is to be avoided. If sulphur 1s prcaent in the fuel the stack temperature i s raised to avoid the possibility of production 01 corrosive sulphuraus wid. This would result in a minimum e x i t temperature o f about 120 ' C .
5 ? 6
TOTAL
ITEPIDPIEXPISUR
t
\ I
Rev~sion : 0 FURNACES Date:
Pagc~o.. :
0.29
2/85
EFFICIENCY
3
I f Hc =
-Tbb.
IOD IOSWS,
Hf
H f
- HC
flue gas enthalpy at exit
Hf = enthalpy of combustion (net calorific value + sensible heat in futl and air) + heat bclng furnished by atornisalion steam if required.
L a s x s include radiation and unaccounted, e.g. unburned fuel (2 % is a good figure). For a furnace which is all radiant duty the efficiency is of the order of 50 to 55 %.
A furnace with a convection bank will be from 75 to 8 1 % efficient.
P R W U R E LOSSES
Pressure is lost in :
Burner air regulation Convection bank
: 3
: 5
- I 5 mm water
- I$ mm water
Ducting
Stack
variable : variable
Pressure is gained by natural buoyancfof hot stack gas. For r system using natural draft burners a low pressure loss is required across the burner and the furnace operates under negative pressure. FLUE GASES VELOCITY The flue gases should leave the stack a t LO CHOICE OF TYPE OF FURNACE
- 70 m/s velocity to ensure safe dispersal.
Above
a capacity of
60 r 106 kcallh the cylindral furnace gives construction problems as
t h e maximum diameter is about 10
. .
-
- 11 m.
A cabin furnace requires much more floor area fian a cylindrical furnace the length can
b t as much as 27 m. If the tubes are horizontal then a withdrawal space for tube
replacement will also be required. However for offshore applications the gpace requirement tends not to favour the cabin furnace. With a cabin furnace it is possible to obtain a uniform heat reicasc across the radiatlon Zone. The helght can be a b w t I 5 m.
With e cylindrical furnace it is not possible to obtain a uniform heat above release across
the radiation zone. The height can be about 25 m. For remote locations in oil field sppljcations water bath fire tube cyl~ndrical heaters a r t often used (consult vendors NATCO, 85 & B etc...)
g?
! is lor a very preliminary sizing The I o l l o ~ ~
D in m
Qa =
absorbed heat in 106 kcalfh
9 H
r
5
Dtlinm 2.5 D in rn util radiation bank
/ TOTAL
I
PROCESS ENClnlERlNO DESIGN MANUAL
Aarklsn :
D m r a
:u85
Pwe No :
1 ~EPIDPIEWBUR
5,
PUMPS
rOTAL
TEPIDPIEXIISUR
Revision:
Page Ho. :
PUMPS
Date:
2/83
XI
1.0 APPLICABILITY
For both the feasibility study and a pre-project study the engineer will be required to
cvJuate a pump selection and fill ln a data sheet with the basic Information. In order t o provide the basis of a good cost and layout estimate it is important to understand the type and number of pumps-for the service in consideration, and the associated power rquirements.
2.0 DESCRIPTION AND GUIDELINE NOTES

TYPES OF PUMPS
Generally there are three classes of pumps : Centrifugal

I . Centrifugal 2. Propelkr
Rotary
I . Cam 2. Screw 3. Gear
4. Vane
Reciprocating
3. Mixed flow 4. Peripheral 5. Turbine
I. Piston 2. Plunger 3. Diaphragm
S Lobe
A pump select~on chart is shown in Figure 1.
GENERAL USAGE
Centrifuga!
~ U
(Process J Pumps)
. . . .
Medlurn t o high capacity far low t o medium head requirements. Higher head requirements can be met by using multistage impclltrs.
General service for all liquids, hydrocarbons, products, water, boiler feed.
Simple, low cost, even flow, small floor space, quiet, easy maintenance.
s/
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXP/SUR
Revision : 0
Pag4 No. :
PUMPS
Data : 2/85
5.2
Rotary pumps
. .
.
Many proprietary designs available for specific services.

Essentialty can handle clean fluids only with small suspended solids ifany. Can pump liquids with dissolved gases or vapwr phase.
Can handle wide range of viscosities
- upto 500 000 SSU at high pressures.
Typical fluids pumped : mineral, vegetable, animal oils, grease, ~lucose,viscose* paints* molasses, alcohol, mayonaise, soap, vlnegar and tomato ketchup 1 Generally specialist pumps for specific requirtrnents.
.
.
Reciprocating pumps
Pumps p r d u c e virtually any discharge head upto limit of driver power and strength of
pbtonr:
.
. .
.
.d casings.
Overall ~.Iicicncy is higher than centrifugal pumps. Flexibility is limited. Piston pumps : can be single or double acting. Used for l o w pressure light duty or intermittent services. L a s expensive than plunger design but cannot handle gritty fluids. Plunger pumps : high pressure, heavy duty or continuous service usage. Suitable tor gritty or foreign material. Expensive.
Diaphragm pump : driven parts arc scaled from fluid by plastic or rubber diaphragm. Ng
seals no leakage. Ideal for toxic or hazardous rnaterlal. Can be pneumatically driven at
.
4.1.
slow speeds for dellcate flulds. Triplex pumps :commonly used for TEG circulation.
4. REFERENCES
AND U S f f UL LITERATURE
CHAPTER 3
LUDWIG VOL I
b.2.
1.3.
PERRY CHEM. ENG. HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 6
CAMPBELL VOL 1 1
CHAPTER 14
4.4.
"Centrifugal pumps and system Hydraulicsn Ugor
I .
Karassik Chem. Engrng Oct O 1982
4.5.
"New Program Speeds up Selection of r Pumping unit" M. Seaman
O i l and Gas J. Nov. 12 1979
4.6.
"Rapid eslculation of Centrifugal-pump hydraulics"

W. Blackwell
Chem. Eng. Janv. 28 1980
f2
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Revision : 0
PUMPS
Date :
Page No. :
21g5
5.3
1. FLU10 CHARACTERISTICS
.
,
Always quote at pumping temperature ie : normal suction
T .
2. SUCTION PRESSURE
Evaluate at pump suction flange
Ps = Pop + Static head line 1 0 s

Pop = minimum vessel operating pressure bara. Static head :evaluate a t LLL always,take statjc head above pump centreline. s ulf~c ravlt Static hcad (bar) : h2 (m) x w Line loss I evaluate APline for bends, fittings, e t c I for estimate use 0.1 barl100 rn.
3. NET POSITIVE SUCTION HEAD
NPSH available (NPSHA) is evaluated by the engineer. NPSHR required is stated by the
vendor. Always try to providdp.6
- 1)rn NPSH more than vendor states.
Vapour correction is calculated by substracting the Vapour pressure of the fluid being pumped from the calculated suction pressure. Convert this to rn head. For a fluid a t bubble point the vapour pressure r Pop head (m)= bar x 10.197/SC. NPSHA : static hcad line loss + vapour correction
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
.
.
Delivr pressure :use maximum Pop of destination vessel Static head h3 : height of delivery point above pump or if a submerged discharge into a vessel the height of the HLL. A P discharge line : calculation based on line length, fittings etc or use minimum of 0.5 bar. D P exchangers, heaters, etc I use allowable AP from equipment data sheets. Estimate 0.7 L.0 bar ii not available.
TOTAL
TE?IOP/E)[PISUR
Rev~sioti :0
Page No. :
PUMPS
Dale :
2/65
5.0
A P orifices I for flow meters use 0.2
. . .
.
- 0.4 bar.
A P control valves :use maximum value of 0.7 bar, or 20 96 of dynamic Irlction l o s x s or

10 % of pump
AP.
TOTAL DISCHARGE PRESSURE :sum of ail above A P values.
5. DIFFERENTLAL HEAD
Differential pressure -. discharge preswre suction pressure Differential head = Dif ftrential pressure x 10.197
Spec, gr.
6. FLOWRATE
. .
Normal flowrate is maximum long term operating flow (rnllh)

Design Ilowrate is normal flowrate + design margin.
Design margin
Use
10 % for feed pumps or transfer pumps 20 % ' r reflux pumps and boiler feed water pumps
7. POWER REQUIREMENTS Note :although the term "horsepowtr" i s still used,power requirements a r e given in kW for metric calculatlonr
.
.
Hydraulic horsepower
theoretical fluid HP = design flow x Diff. press136 (kW)
Brake-horsepower (BHP) = hydraulic HPi q p pump efficiency IkW) Optrating load = electric& input to electric driver a t normal pump qxrating load = BHP/ motor efficiency k W
.
+
vrn
Connected load :electrical power to motor a t cated motor qize (kW1 Note pump s p e d are either 1 450 rpm or 2 900 rpm
UO HZ electrics1 frequtficy)
8. MAXIMUM DISCHARGE PRESSURE (shut off pressure)
Estimated shut off pressure t max suction preswre (design pressure of upstream item head calcuiatdat HLL and SG maxi) + 120% x(norma1 pump AP)
9+ PUMP MINIMUM FLOW
For an estimate
use 30 % of normal flow.
10. PUMP WEIGHTS For an estimation purpose only Flgure 9 can be used to determine t h e welght of centrifugal pumv package.
$?f
i ? -~ ~
LUlD PUMPED :Liquld :
CtuDE 3 i C
6-5 '5 0 4 , 1
-..
HLL
CCL-
.
4,3.4 :er c
--7 .
i . i~ Pump -A. CC-.Xw

: :-a
~ Kq!-i: ~
I4 m
rnr2
:
Indicate pressure, elevations and system sketch PUMP TYPE : Z L I I - b Speed : 1232 Z.iV
~;r.
: : ; =
CP {WC. cnnd 1 m3lh
%
Pumping temperature T I .par pressure at T r entity at P, f dpedfic gravity a t P, T :
40 i,04
.C bara
305 kdm3 0,395
Viscosity at P, T ?, 2 Spccif ic gravity a1 8:: ._,_ 0 a?? Normal flow Q at P, T : 151
Design margin DcsignflowatP,T
(I):
25
<8?
m3/h
SUCTION PRESSURE kin. Origin Pressure. ,Static head at LLL = (rn x sg x 0.09S11 L A P suction line PUMP SUCTION PRESSURE
baral rn 1 bar1 bar I
I I I
I
l ,D! 4,20
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
I 1 Delivery pressure 1 Static head 0 3 I A P control valve(s) C , !O A P exchan efts)

42
I I 1 bsra 1 bar I
bar bar bar bar bar
bar
1,O.I 1 ,
I I I I
I
I
I 1 I I
I
I NET POSITIVE SUCTION HEAD I

Static head a t LLL' L l m loss + vapour pressure correction
1 APorific s) I dp AP I 1 Other ; :oht:r,;r-.%l)

1
cP
0,75
I I
2,Y I
4 3.50
m
m
4,20
!,I7
z
I I
TOT DISCHARGE PRESS bara DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Suction pressure Pump AP

bara
bara
bar
I
I I
m
rn
1
1 I 1 1 I
I 4.42 1 1 I
<.Zb
4.d?
1 I I 1
TOTAL AVAILABLE NPSH
1
I I I
MAXIMUM SUCTION PRESSURE Vessel PSV setting Static head at HLL
bard1
I 1.43 1 1 I I I 4,5Q 1
Q,5?
5,03
3.16
40,o
((2)
I I 1 1 I
bar1
j ~ + I , I
30
1141
I I Brake Horse- wer = (t)x(Z) k W 1 MAXIMUM DISCHARGE PRESSURE I I kW I Max. suction pressure baral 5,03 1 Estimated motor slzc I Normalpump A P x 1 2 0 % bar( 3 , 3 ~1 1 Design operating laad (4)lrlmkWI 1 L (Fis3for 9 , ) I net bara I I I 6,53 1 kg I I Estimated weight I
net bara 1
1
1
1 POWER REQUIREMENTS
I I 1
1 I 2 3 1 1\31
34
H51
75
lttM.
~EPLWliOlPltVlSUm
'
4230
1 I I 1

T X b ~ , S T E i . PLlWF
PUMP
D~II
NO.
2270
A l t
CHX
1 tor
~ITLE
~ - X A L : ~E :
JOB ~o
MU
(0
TOTAL
TEPlOPlEXPlSUR
C"I"LC.L WICYIO*
n * ~ i : ~ 0 ~ n
5.c
wm5
Datr
: 2/85
m m
*IC* Y I l O CI*IaHUCIL .LAN-.
loo.
7
,a
nncwnw.lla= r m a n r # rwf
~ l l l
b-*
-_-
-*
-.._ _ --._
..OTEY
CYYl
2 #1bGESn 3-a
a*m
. R X I Y NIYI I I I B C I Ill.Y
z
Y -
I.
I
FIG. 1 - * & I
I0
llD
m
EeCnl PuuP 1 Y P U
0 1 -
l L l M IY'IHL
( 9 6
A~~NCE 0S s I P P C I C ~ ~ IF O O~ R Olff
FIG. 2
ESTIMATlON OF CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS EFFICIENCY
a I m m m n l I m I m m I DOTTED LINE FOR PUMPS WITH H , I
H III
TOTAL
TEPlDPlEXPlSUR
r
P A O C E U ENGINEERING DESIGN MANUAL
Revision :
Pwpa NO:
Data
: 2/85
701
Revision : 0
-----
OTAL
WDPIEXPISUR
Page Ho. :
GAS TURBINES
Date:
2/85
6.1
1. APPLICABILITY
Fearlbllity and Prc-Project study :
. . .
The purpose o f this design guide is to give some information

be able t o select a suitable gas turblne.
to the engineer in order t o
The' gas turbines do not cover the f u l l range of power and sometimes the process is adapted t o the choice o f the engines. The ioca
b n is an important factor.
INDUSTRIAL APPLICAT!ONS OF GAS TURBINES
The two major industrial applicatior!s of gas turbkne drivers are power generation and gas compression. The gas turbines are also used for liquid pumping [crude oil, water injection, .I but these applications depend on thc ratio between power generation and pumping station
capacities.
In Industry, three types of gas turbines are available :
. .
heavy-duty (one shaft, suitable for power generation not recommend for comprtswrs or two shaft3)
jet engines or aeraderivativc (two shafts) turbines

light industrial
Heavyduty turbines are generally used for large onshore plants where weight and space are not a problem. Aeroderivative turbine or light industrial are predominant lor smaller installation$ offshore where compact, light-weight drivcra are required.
BRIEF DE!5CRIPTION OF THE TURBINE

There arc two parts for the gas turbine : a. main system b. auxilliary system.
3.1.
MAIN SYSTEM
- Figure I(two shaft machine gas generator)

. . .
1 8 3
HP turbine LP turbine Exhaust
It is composed o f:
. .
the air filter air compressor combustion equipment
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPlSUR
Revision : 0
GAS TURBINES Date: 2/85
Page No. :
61
3-2- AUXlLLlARY SYSTEMS

These are :
. . .
fuel gas or liquid fuel system lubrication 3yatem air cooling system
. .
hydraulic system start-up system
3.2-1.
Fuel aas system
A gas turbine i s designed for a certain heat release. It is recommended to
- 10 % magimum) of the design value. avoid large flaw fluctuatians (+
. .
It i s also recommended t o provide a safety margin above the gas dew
point (generally
I5 * C ) and t o have a minimum temperature of + 5 'C.
The fuel gas pressure depends on the gas turbine, a range of 15 t o 20 bar g a t turbine inlet flange is common. For the new generation of jet engines which have high air compressor pressure ratio the pressure could be as
high as 30 bar g.
Certain trace components must not be present i n the fuel gas in order to avoid corrosion in the hot parts of the turbine :
Vanadium : less than 1 ppm
Sodium and Potassium r less than 2 ppm

Calcium (not corrosivt but causes deposits) : less than 2 ppm
Lead: less than 1 ppm
Remarks : a. The fuel gas quality and net heating value range to be specified to the vendor.
b . It is recommanded to install a K.O. pot and filtration

(10 F) at the fuel gas turbine inIet (most of time a rafety filtration is included i n the vendor package)$the basic filtration is normally included in the fuel gas supply Skid.
3 . 2 . 2 ,
Llquld fuel system Filtration is required depending engines. The liquid fuel pressure at the turbine flange is about 3 to 5 bw &
on the gas
rurblne type and manufacturer.
Generally the required level of filtration has a severity higher than for diesel
10 4
Page No. :
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Revision :
GAS TURBINES
Date :
2/85
6.3
3 . 2 . 3 .
Start-up system
A gas turbine cannot simply start-up by firing fuel i n the combustion section :
for its gas expansion power after combustion t o be effective, the turbine must attain a certain starting speed first using a starting motor. There arc several kinds of drlvers whlch are used t o start the turbines:
. . . . .
4
electric motor, pneumatic expansion turbine [air or gas) diesel engine or gasoline matar hydraulic expansion turbine hydraulic motor.
OPERATING ASPECTS
The powcr i s generally defined in cataIogues by 13.0. that means power at
t
. .
Temperature air in take I 5 ' C Atmospheric pressure 101.3 kPa (sea level)
No loss condition on intake and exhaust ducting

No auxillarics driven by the turbine (except lube oil pump required by the turbine itself) The main external criteria for the performance of a gas turbine are : the site conditions (location, air temperature) losses on intake and exhaust ducting, operation of the machine at conditions other than design, mechanical powcr to drive auxillarics.
4.1.
AIR CONDITIONS
The compression powcr requirement l o r the air increases as the air temperature increases. The consequence is that the available power recovered from the LP turbine decreases as the air temperature incrcaxs (+ 1 ' C 01 air value). See Flgurc 2 for an example*
0.8 % of power :average
4.2.
LOCATION
If the turbine is located above sea level, the site pressure and the available power
decrease by about 1 % per 100 metres e l c v a t i m See Figure 3.
/Q6
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Aevlrio~i : 0
CA5 TURBINES
Date : 2/85
Pbgs NO. :
6.4
4 3
LOSSES ON INTAKE AND EXHAUST DUCTING

Under certain conditions plugging of the airintake t o the turbine may occur. This w i l l result i n a drop in available turbine power. A similar drop will be seen if the exhaust duct pressure also changes average figures are :
Inlet duct :pressure Increases by(l0o mm i-120)~ower falls by 1.4 % Exit duct : pressure increases by 100 mm
H20 power falls by 0.6 %
For estimation take 100 mln HZ0 d p for inlet and exhaust ducts (2% losses)
4.4.
DESIGN CONDITIONS I f the power turbine Is running at 80 % of the design capacity, the reduction in efficiency is about 6 %. If the turbine 1s running at 60 % design the reduction in efficiency i s about 17 96. Since fuel gas consumption is very much affected.
Fir.
tpproximate for t alnbiant
>
I5
O C
P site =
P lso x
II
I
x m ~15*1
l+O.OlH
ambiant t e m p t r a t ~ ~ in te-C elevation above sea level i n metre divided by 100
H =
5. IELECTiON OF C M TURBINE
For preliminary selection use table 1 which give 150 turbine shaft power. Table 1 gives the commonly used gas turbines but for more information consult the "GAS TURBINE WORLD
PERFORMANCE SPEC" published each year.

6. THERMAL EFFlClENCY AT 1 -
RATUK.
Thermal efficiency depends on tlrc gas turbine but for a preliminary fuel gas estimation the followjng v'alues could be taken
t

7.1. 7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
CA5 TURBINE WORLD PCRFORMANCE SPEC VENDOR documentation

CAMPBELL VOL 11
each year
"Consider Gas Turbines for ilcavy loadp
- K. MOL~CHChem. Eng. August 23. L980
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
P I O C E ~ ENGIHEE~ING DESIGNMANUAL
GAS 'NRB1m.S
R ~ * * i o n: 0
P q e NO :
6.6
Dmte
: 2/05
FIGURE 4
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
**
.
Revision
--*
TOTAL
1. APPLICABILITY
Page NO :
STEAM TURBINES
Date : 2/85
6.8
For either the feasibility study or the pre-project study the engineer may need to estimate
the required steam consumption of a steam turbine. Details of turbines for guidance and consumptons art detailed in section 2 and 3.
2. DESIGN NOTES
. .
Single stage turbines eenerally used for small applications, multistage for larger. Conslder using steam turbines far pump drivers if residual HPlMP steam from larger drivers (compressors, gcntcators)
is avallable.
Standard size turbines :
a
Small Medium Large
w'
1
1 or 2 2
Power kW
Steam k ~ l h l k W
0.5-190
9-2980
350-30 30-9
370-7Q50
15-3
.
.
Speed range : usual 2 000 rpm to 15 000 rpm Efficiencies :
Power r a t i n ~ kW
Efficiency %
20
kW
750-1500 1500-2250
%
60
L -40
40-250
250-375
375-750
30
65
40
2250-UP
70
50
3. CALCULATION OF REQUlRED STEAM LOAD

1. Theoretical
wt=
(hsr 860
kg,hikw
steam load
2. Actual steam load Was Wt
100
= steam inlet en4halpy kcallk = steam outlet kcallkg ( ! a tboritical urntropic ph brtwun inht a d o u t k t WW)
EFfirienq (%I
3. Required steam Ws = Wa x kW I
4. USEFUL REFERENCES AND
w h
LITERATURE
4.1.
4 . 2 .
LUDWIG VOL I11 CHAPTER 14 pp 422-435 "Use steam turbines as Process Drivers" Richard F. Neerken Chem. Eng. Aug. 25 19110
110
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
PR~CEP'ENGINEERING DESIGN MANUAL
R v i i:
'
P*.
NO :
6.9
ELECTRIC MOTORS
Oat*
, Z/ZS
I
I
I
I
1 . APPLICABILITY
For both feasibility and prc-poject studies the engineer will be required to estimate
electric loadings for utility consumptions. Fig. I details motor efficiencies for varioufl pomp
horsepowerr.
2. POWER ESTlMATlON
For pumps the driver horsepower is estimated en the pump data sheet.
For rcsptciiying of drivers or checking purposes use Fig. 1 to rate power.
Power rating at 380 Y 3 phase 50 hz.
ffiUPf
.
.
I I
~CTRIT MOTOR* RECOMMLHOED azt a rmc~urcr (11
Pump RequCemcnr
A~. t b -a ..h n
~
Prab.blr
&YAW
Cdh?io;\r
OHP
nl;is
BHP
Mara
% - al ~Cull .- LMd
EIflcienq
Pawcr ractsr(2) S oi full Lord

cap4c1r) 100 -
Norart ( I I
(11
Applies 14 tvtully cndor<d marorr o n l y (i..., ~xplorionpr-1) To be u c d m delrrmirulion ot KVA's i f deslrrd.
--
TOTAL
TEP/DPfE)(P/sUR
Rwvirion r
Paw No
08tr
: 2/83
7. COMPRESSORS
113
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Reviyion : 0
Page No. :
COMPRESSORS
Date :
2/85
7.1
7
1 . APPLICABILITY
For both ftasibility and prt-project studies the engineer w i l l be required t o evaluate a compressor selection, discharge temperature, power and complete a data sheet. To evaluate thc discharge temperature and power i t i s more accurate to use 551 instead of the manual method presented here. I n order to estimate the basis of cost and layout i t i s important t o understand the type of compressors for the service i n consideration, and the associated power requirements.
2 . DESCRIPTION AND GUIDELINE NOTES

2.1,
TYPES OF COMPRESSORS
The principal types used l n the 0 1 1 and gas processing industries are :
.
.
reciprocating (volumetric) rotary ~volumctric)
. .
ctntrifugal
axial
A compressor selection chart is shown in Figure 1.
2.2.
GENERAL
USE
2.2.1.
Reciprocating compressors Reciprocating compressors arc widely used i n the oil and gas industry f o r s ~ d l i o medium gas flows and high carnpresrlon ratios. For example :
. .
Instrument and service air compressors

Low capacity/high pressure gas compression for maintain the gas l i f t capability.
re-injection of field gas t o
2.2.2.
Rotary compressors The types o i rotary compressors most frequently employed i n the petrolcum indudtry arc as follows :
. . . .
2 . 2 . 3 .
Lobe compressors ("ROOTS' type) Screw compressors The reliability factor is generally higher than reciprocating machines. "Roots" type compressors are used where a high flow rate wlth a relatively low-pressure is required. Screw compressors arc sometimes used in low flow gas service or for instrument and service air for instatlatlons of small t o medium size.
C e n t r i i u ~ acornpressars l
Thcse Centrifugal compressors have become very popular offering more pQw?r pcr gnit weight and esrcntlallv vwation-lrcc, lnitial costs normally are %than rcciprocatlng comprtswrs but efficiency Is Its? and utility c W may be higher. Frequently used in the o i l and gas process industry.
TOTAL
TLPIDPIEXPISUR
Revision : 0
Page NO.:
COMPRESSORS
Oste.
2/85
7.2
2.2.0.
Axlal compressors Thew machines are particularly useful where a very high gas ilow at moderate pressure increase is required. Such applications remain relatively rare in the industry, the exception being LNG plants.
2.3.
DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE LIMITATION

,
Discharge temperature is limited either for reasons of gas stability, gas

condensation or compressor (or upstream equipment) mechanical resistance
limit.
. . .
2 4
For reciprocating compresxrr the maximum gas outlet temperaturc t o be d h d
is usually between 160 to 180 * C .

For centrifugal compreswr used in gas and oil extraction industries the discharge temperature is limited t o 1701190 *C. Normally intercoolers are used t o maintain temperatures within t h t above limit$.
DESIGN MARGINS
I f the ilow i s constant, no margin, but i f the flow is coming from a production eparator a margin o f 10 % is recommended in order t o take i n t o account the possible slugs at the inlet of these production separators.
5. WEIGHT AND SIZE

For weight and slzc wc rccomrnend to ask the manufacturer as vendor catalogues detail
only the size and weight of the compressor itself. As the compressor package also includes also the seal and lube o i l console^ control cabinet and sometimes the driver and gear box,
the use of vendors catalogues could be misleading in estimating the installed weight.
Figure 4 could be used for a very preliminary estimation. It is established for the dry weight of a centrifugal compression package including :
.
6.I.
compressor skid (aeroderivatlve gas turbine technical room
+ compressor)
, overhead tank (seal oil)

6 REFERFNCW AND USEFUL LITERATURE
LUDWIG
GPSA
Volume3 Chapter 5
Chapter12
Chapter 14
1979
6.2.
6 . 3 .
CAMPBELL Volume 2
6.4.
SSI Program
f/6
c(mPwss0Qs
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
_ _ _ l _ _ _ _ _ l _ _ _ l _ _ _ _ _ _ _ I _ C _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Data
:2/BS
m
4%
en
A
d
___________________---_-----___
i r, 33
3
C .-
$2 E
v n
3
v
54
- _ - __ *
Y
zg
- - -
! m
r?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~____
----------------I1
'-
--_---.-------------N
--rO
1.; E
3
c
.x
---------------11
I-"
2s r u
~8
?I rn
..
E
v\
-----
F -u =a
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - + - - - - - - - 4 - - - - - - - -
5; s
______---_-___---------------------+
NA 5 0 I
----------------d-------------------
t11
-2
-E
u
C
i;
:5 u u
- - - - - - - _ ----------------------
c .
? ! Y
s )6
0
CI r
-------._-----d----------------d----
113
OPERATING
IlDlTlONS
7.0
I I
I
SUCTION PRESSURE
PI = 7.a bar a DISCHARGE PRESSURE P2 = 3 , O bar a

SUCTION TEMPSUCTION FLOW ACTUAL VOL F L O W
TI
= 32:
5'3 *C #It
GAS DENSITY fir SUCTION = ', 36
kg/m3
W = 5b000kbh V = 9400 m Ih
. ,
I . GAS PROPERTIES
2. POLYTROPIC EFFICIENCY
pe ~c
= = = =
45.9 230
bara
' K
SEE
IdlG
3~
8
0,79
3. AVERAGE 8 = MCp/MCp-1.99
4.
*21
8 4
15014
E S T L TZ~ ~ ?5oU~'i r ~ dBL

K 'C
DLSCHARGE TEMP 12 =TI(%)
3
5UCT DlSCn
AVC
T2 =
=
REIII,hT STEP 3-Q If TZ IS D1rfI ~ R E N T FROM ONE " ' I ' I I IN STEP 3
5. DETERMINE Z AVC
2 1
22
0.91
0
a37 0,975
6. CALCULATE GAS HORSEPOWER
C H ~ = Z X R X W X ~ X ( T ~ - TC ! ) H ~ =32h0
MWx3600x(g-1)
kW
' 11,314 k3/ kgMOLE

4
*C
CALC SHAFT HORSEPOWER p5 = CHP x (1
F
=
'lm
0.96 0.97 0.90
+ F11001 x 11 7,
taker : Fr 3 5
PS im * 5.97
3d80
kW
C ' l l l kW ~ ~ 5.0 ~ s(ht I <( ~MW 3.1 )LO MW 1.0
8 . ESTIMATE DRIVER POWER

ELECTRIC MOTOR
PS x K PO -GAS TURBINE PS x (1.14 + K) PO =
kW
4040
kW
' 1.15
1
41.02 TO 0.04 WlTH
GEARBOX
3:
2 32
9. E S T ~ ~ A T E PACKAGE D WEIGHT
COMPRESSOR-DRIVER-LUBE
= 9 Oo6
kg
($1:(1~16 4)
NOTES :
CENTRIFUGAL OR AXIAL
Tt?~O?mVffXMUU
;&z
XMF~~,S:~C
ItV
CoMPRWS?R
O~TI
no..
1 o m WO
-nr
JJ;~FJ
cnr
\ rornrir
It. :,>I6
'
i~ibt
//g
7.5
OPERATING L f4DlTIONS
SUCTiON PRESSURE PI = 0.0 bar a DfSCHARCE PRESSURE P2 = 27.0 bar a

SUCTION TEMP. SUCTION FLOW ACTUAL VOL FLOW
PRESSURE RATIO PZ/P1 =

MW
3 . 33
T1
40 *C = 3 3 +K
= 549 rn / h
?5,0
kglm3
W = 41DP k h
V
GAS DENSITY AT SUCTION s 7 5%

NOTES
Tc PC
STEP
L G A S PROPERTIES
= 247
45,s
mK
bar a
2. AVERAGE 8 = MCp/MCp
- 1.99
8 = l12D
AESUW..~? T 2
It7 'C
orl
3. CALCULAT f DISCHARGE TEMP

T;L
s
TI x
(PI
m)+J
SUCT DISCH AVG
T2 = 383,4 ' K
= 21 22
s :
s
44
Repeat 2 3 ti T2 differs from that used in STEP 2
5. DETERMINE Z AVC
0.97 0.45
0.5%
6. DETERMlNE OVERALL EFFICIENCY
'IS
CHP = Z ' R 5' 5 x (T2 - T I ) m W x 3 6 0 O x ( $ - 1)
3g =
O,@?
See Fig 3
* *
CHP
= 454
kW
R = 8.314 kJ/kgmole.*C
8 . CALCULATE SHAFT HORSEPOWER

PS = GHPlf x r)g
PS=14?
kW
i = 0.96 to 0.97
9. CALCULATE DRIVER POWER Electrical Motor

Po = [.I5 K PS
Po + ?-Z"~W
#!'+#(
I~CIWCOPPRXCI%UR
I I
PROCESS CALCULAIION SHEET nLH: FUEL GAS COMPRELC3K
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR
DArc
no
K 7323
cnu
Ilorn r ~ t i .r
E xs, M P LE
IODMO
I arv
19
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
PROCESS ENGlNEEAlNG DESIGN MANUAL
Rodlion :
Pwm No :
ddcs
Dare
7a 6
120
-~ ...
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
P D C E S S ENGINEERING DESlGN MANUAL

~ R E S S O ~
Revision : 0
Dale
:lies
PW No :
7.'
8,
EXPANDERS
-..,..
TOTAL
TEPIQPIEXPISUR
Revision : 0
Pngm No. :
EXPANDERS
Oatc :
2/85
g.1
1 . APPLICABILITY
For both the feasibility study and a pre-project study the engineer will be required to fill i n a process data sheet with the basic information and to estimate the expander horsepwer.
Outlet conditions and horsepower estimation r a n be calculated accurately by computer. Hand calculations for pure component systems using a MOLLIER diagram are OK.
2. DESCRIPTION AND GUIDELINE NOTES
The turbc-expander i s a mechanical device which is designed according t o the laws of thermodynamics end aerodynamics. I t remover energy from a process ga; which results i n a drop in pressure and temperature of the gas. The energy removed i s converted into mechanical energy which is most often used t o drive a single stage cornprcsm.
T urbaexpanders could be used for :

+
cryogenic pressure let down dew point control
. .
CZ recovery
ethylene processing, etc...
C3ICl recovery
Thermodynamical principal. See Figure I .
, Expanders efficiency
The expander efficiency is the ratio of the actual energy removed to the maximum theoretical energy on Figure 1 :
'I=H B A A
HBI-HA
Expander efficiency depends on :
mass flow rate

inlet pressure inlet temperature
discharge pressure gas composition speed
.
.
Generally a value of 80-85 %can be used for estimation purposes. See Figure 2. Liquid content a t the outlet of the expander varies from 10 t o 30 % (weight)
Inlet gas must be free of solid particles and water (sometimes COZ), ice formation is prohibited.
Maximum horsepower of the manufactured turbo expanders is about f 2 000 HP. This figure should not however be considered as a limit. Turbo expanders can be used in series.
f the design flow rate See Figure 3 for an Efficiency Is a f l u t e d by the variation o ntlmarion.
/>'
--
"
TOTAL
TEPIQPIEXPISUR
Revision : 0
P a g l NO. :
EXPANDERS
Date : 2/85
8.2
3. REFERENCES AND USEFIR. LITERATURE

CAMPBELL VOLUME I1
Engineer's guide to turbo expanders
HYDROCARBON PROCESSING APRlL 1970

Pagc 97...
Turbo expander applications in
JOURNAL OF PETROLEUM TECHNOLOGY

May 1976 Page 6 1 1 etc...
natural gas processing

What you need to know about gas
HYDROCARBON PROCESSING
February 1970 page 105...
expanders
Turbo cxpanders offer processors
a way to conserve energy
THE 0 1 1 AND GAS JOURNAL

Jan. 23, 1978 page 63...
Use expander cycles lor LPG

recovery
HYDROCARBON PROCESSING ~ o c 1 . 97~ Page 89...
VENDOR DOCUMENTATION
i.c. : ROTOFLOW, MAFI-TRENCH..;
la 6
TUTAL
TCPIDPIEXP18UR
PROCESS EMGINEEHINU utslun MfilUUl&L

EXPAtfUEW
t$evrrroft :
rb
d y I~ UU
Datr
: z/n<
8.3
PRESSUAE
FIGURE 1
H ~ l H~
HA
ENTHALPY H A , tnlot enthalpy HB Outlet enthalpy
PA Inlet prssaure
PB Outlet prusure
f Bl Outlet theoretical tsmpcrrruw
TA Inlet temperature Tg Outlet temperature
ktBI Outlet theoreticel tnthstpy
FIGURE 3 ESTIMATED PERFORMANCE AS A FUNCTION OF DESIGN FLOW RATE
FIGURE 2
PERCENT OF DESIGN FLOW RATE
APROXIMATE PLANT FLOW RATE M M X F D
IIUIMb
TEPIDPIEWISUR
~ ~ U L C W CN~IN~LI(INV UL S I ~ N MANUHL
HIYIIIQO
:
: 2/85
r80lN O
Date
9.
FLARE SYSTEMS
' 24
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUII
Revision: 0
Page No. :
FLARE SYSTEM
A
Date:
2/85
9.1
1. APPLICABILITY
For the feasibility and preproject studlcs, a detsllcd design of the flare system is not needed. Required information for either study will include ;
. . .
.
Evaluation of number and levels of flare system Determination o f maximum relieving (and hence flare design capacity) Flare KO drum
Design
.
2 .
Estimation of height o f flare stack or boom length and type of t i p required
PSV sizing (not always required, depends on project).

For further more detailed specification and design requirements consult thc CFP DESIGN GUIDE ON FLARES-YENTS-RELIEF AND BLOWDOWN SYSTEMS.
DEFINITIONS (see section 3 i n DESIGN GUIDE)
Relief system
includes any prtssurc rsjirrf valvelrupture disc downstream piping and liquid separator
Blowdown system
includes any depressurlng valve, downstream piping and separator (normally the pressure relief and depressuring systems utilize common piping and separator)
Flare system Vent system
: a system which ensures the combustion of hydrocarbons :
the
rdcasc
of
hydrocarbons
to
the
atmosphere
without
combustion Design pressure

:
the pressure used to design the vessel and calculate the wall thickness (see section 1.0.)
Set pressure
the pressure at which a safety device is adjusted to open under service conditions. Usually equal t o the Design Pressure
Accumulation
maximum allowable increase in vessel pressure during discharge

through the safety device. Normal accumulation is 10 % but 20 %
is allowed for external fire due t o hydrwarbon liquids. For HC gas fires an accumulation of 5 % is recommended.
3. FLARE 5)'ITEM ANALYflS AND GUIDELINES

This section details how t o determine the number and levels of the required flare system for a feasibility or preproject study and other guidelines.
A system of items o f equipment and piping can be protected against overpressure most economically by considering it as a single unit when calculating the relieving capacity
/21
TOTAL .
1EPIDPIEYPISLIR
Revision : O
Page No. :
9.2
FLARE SYSTEM
Ostc: 2183
.
. .
Block valves should not be present in the system so as to isolate a unit irom its relicvine point. Special casts may warrant a car-sealed open or locked valve. However such a r r , .ements should be avoided if possible Interconnecting piping should be of adequate sire and not subject t o plugging. The system should not be of such a size that t w o separate systems would be more economical tn specifying the design pressure of the individual items and safety valve setting there a r e two approaches
Set t h e design pressure of each item independently. Then specify safety valve
scttings to protect the weakest link in t h e group of Items Study the items as a single system initially. Thls is preferable as it avoids having an unexpected "weak link" limit the operating conditions. Consideration should be given to possible abnormal conditions viz :
Light hydrocarbon systems can reach low temperatures during depressurization

Heat exchange trains may be bypassed resulting in higher than normal downstream
temperatures Fallure of cooling medium can cause excessive downstream temperatures Production separators may have a varying feed temperature, especially offshore.
I t i s often required or beneficial to provide two or more separate piping systems from
t k items of equipment t o the flarc $yatem eg I high and low temperature headers.
Consideration should be given to the following
Relief gases below OC must be kept apart Irom warm moist gases t o prevent formation of ice within the flarelines. Thia could cause a system plug up Segregated systems may be economically desirable to minimize the extent of low tcm+rarure piping
By segregating t h e flows irom high and low pressure sources into two separate flare systems greater use of the high p r e s u r t drops can be achieved without lmposing severe backpressures on the low pressure systems
The molecular composition of some streams may warrant their segregation irom other streams. eg moist C02 or H2S is corrosive. I t may be cheaper t o fabricate a second smaller vent system to handle there rather than fabricate the entire system in corrosion resistant material.
0 2
A
---
TOTAL
TEPKlPlEXPlSUR
Rerrs~on: 0
FLARE SYSTEM
Dstc:
Page NO..
2/85
9 . 3
Determination of t h e flare system and levrl can be summarized in the following step by Step analysis.
I. Does the facility contain process areas with distimt pressure levels eg :HP compression,
LP c o ~ -ession, atmospheric separation ? If so, c sider two or more flare levels if sufficient limitation is imposed by the LP section
2. Does gas exist at high pressure that on depressuring will fall t o below 0 vC.Lf so, it must be segregated from warm relief gas. If the temperature falls below 29.C may have to consider low temperature steel headers
3. ldentify any corrorlve relief sources and consider if n t e d to pipe up separately

4. Is a vent system required for tank breathers, regeneration vents etc... 5. Identify on the PFMs) the set pressures of each PSV anticipated and consequently its maximum allowable backpressure [MABP usually 10 % 01 set ~ r e s s u r e ) .Locale the "weak links" in the process i.e. :the low design pressure vessels. If only 1 or 2 exist within the
system conslder installing balanced relief valves IMABP = bD % set) so a s to incorporate them into a higher pressure flare system, or even alter the design pressure of the weak links to acheive t h e same. This may be more economical than specifying two flare levels. Having determined t h e configuration of the flare system, it is necessary to size the headers only and t h e flareline itself. For thls, an idea oI the maximum relief load gcnerattd will be required. For the studies a full "risk analysis" af upset conditions is not necessary neither 1s a listing of every relief load and condit~ons. The sizing case o f t h e flare system can usually be judged by inspection. Invariably, the largest vent flow will be s full flow reliel off the first separator or compres~lon drum or a total electrical failure. This may be supplemented by a simultaneous depressurization of a compressor or equipment loops resulting in a flare design flow higher than the normal plant throughput. Generally fire generated loads do not dictate the sizing of the flare system, but may influence the sizing of laterals and subheaders. A certain degree of experience will help
in identifying the possible one or two cases ihat will size the flare system without havlng to perform a fuH plant rlsk analysis.
In some cases, the resulting flaring loads may be minirnised by using ESD isolation valves or autamatlc controls t o start back-up equipment.
133
TOTAL
TEP~DPIEXPISUR
Revision : 0
Page No. : 9.4
FLARE SYSTEM
Date : 2/85
I . HEAOeR SIZING 8 STACK AND TIP CHOlCE

I n order to estimate the main flareline and header slzcs based on backpressures, 3 pieces ot inlotmation a r t required :
9.1.
Design llowratc,temptraturc,MW Length of flareboom or height of stack

Type o f t i p and stack t o be used.
DESIGN FLOWRATE
TEMPERATURE AND M W
This has already been determined from the previous sectlon.

2
TYPE OF TIP + STACK T O BE USED (see section 10 in Flare Design Manuay

The rhoice of stack and tip type wilI obviously be dictated by the location of the prar, nder design. For onshore plants in remote areas i t is usually suflicient to use a remote vertical
stack with a conventional pipeflare tip. The height of the stack will be determined by the radlation limitation on the designated sterile area round the stack. For non
occupied areas, this figure could be high as 5000 BTUI~.!~~(15 700 ~ / m 2 ) resulting
in a short stack height. For cases where high flaring loads s t i l l result i n a tall stack,
a further reduction in height can be achieved by using a Coandaffndair or similar type high pressure sonic flare tip (see section 10 i n FLARE DESIGN MANUAL for dixusslon o f each tip type). Offshore the choice is somewhat more complex in choosing between a remote
vertical
flare or similar, or an Integral 45' mounted boom itare or even on board The decision between these i s more often than not governed by
vertical sta&.
economics, structural considerations and specifics pertinent t o each platform Iocation eg r water depth. Generally, however sonic flare tips are used where pressure levels allow (2-> bars) a t the tip entry i n order to reduce stack/bom lengths, by reducing radiation levels, and associated support structure weights.
4-3.
FLAREBOOM
- FLARE STACK SIZING

Is determined by the
The flareboom or stack (hereafter termed flare) length
maximum allowabIe thermal radiation tolerable on the platlorm or surrounding area.
A detailed calculation of this value for vertical or inclined flares on or offshore

under a variety of wind conditions and temperature5 can be performed using the computer program SUPERFLARE. For itasibiliry and preprojecta, however an estimate of radiation level can be determined using the method as derailed in AP 521. Set Appendix 1.
1 34
,-
.
Revision : 0
Page No. :
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
FLARE SYSTEM
Date : 2/85
9.5
Recor~ nnded Radiation levels are given
below :
I
Allowable radiation 0tulh.ftZ
1000
I 1
I
Condition
I1
I I
I 1 1 Areas where personnel may be 1 located and expected to per1 form rhejr duties continuously I
1
I I I I
I I I I
Exposure
I I
period
Infinite
I 1
I I Arear where personnel may be 1 I located from which escape is I I possible and shelter is 1 1 attainable 1
I
2000
1 I
L minute
I I I I
I I 1
I I I Areas where equipment is I located and personnel are not I normally present during opeI ration, but if present im-
I I
3000
(Emergency flaring only)
I 1 mediate shelter i s available 1 1 I I I I Areas where personnel are not 1 I permitted during operation I I t
I I 1
Helideck
I I 1
1
1
5 seconds
I I
I 1
I I 1 1
D
5000
1
I I I
I I
I
I I
1 1
r DO0
I 1
The above figures are maximum allowable radiation lntcnsities inclusive of solar radiation t 250 BTUIhr ftZ).
I t should be noted that the following recommended values o f F radiated and mach numbers at the ti^.
a) Pipe flare
Fraction of heat
LOWM W gas F = 0 . 2
Ethane
Propane
F
F
0.25
0.3
Velocities
max at design relief
normal continuous
0 . 5 M = 0 . 2M
8
b) IndairICoanda
All gases
C)
0.1 0.05
Mach I
Mardair
Mach 1
Having calculated the flare length bawd on radiation analysis and c3rabllshed both
the design flare rates and tip type the main header can now be sized.
i3 i 7
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Atvision : 0
Page No, :
FLARE SYSTEM
2/85
9.6
4 .
HEADER SIZING
T h e major criteria governing the sizing of the header are backprtswre and gas
velocity. Flare headers must bt both large enough to prevent excessive backpressure
on the plant safety valves and to limit gas velacity and noise t o acceptable levels.
Sizing procedure
I)Identlfy "weak link" wlth respect t o MABP on safety valuea. (this should have
been done when determining t h e levels of relief). This is the maximum upstream pressure tolerable in the rystcm2)
culatc the
4 P acrws the
flare tip for the relief design flow. For sonic type
ti1 the backpressure will be 2.0 t o 5,O barg depending on
load.
For plpeflare tips use :
Flare tip Fluid seal Molecular seal
- 2.0 0.2 - 0 . 5 0.5 - 1.0

0.5
psi
psi
psi
(0.034 0.lb bar)

(0.014
(0.034
- 0.034 bar)
- 0.07
bar)
3 Estimate the equivalent length of piping from the tip to the flare KO drum.
(Allow generous margins, flare headers are complex and rarely straight).
4) Calculate the mnlc velocity o f the relief gas
Vsonic
= 91.19
c
-
rn/s
K :CP/CV T : *K
This will gTvt a first estimate of required pipe id based on maximum relief flow.
The stack diameter should be one or two slzes less than the tip diameter. LIMIT
VELOCITY JN STACK TO 0.85 M A T DESIGN FLOW.

5 ) Using thc estimated D calculate the from tip to flare KO drum. The Conison equation is recommended for isothermal f b w :
2
AP
P,
Where :
1
p2
4 V p2 (39.4 2
f
fL -
2 in
9
"1
lo-'
= upstream conditions
= moody frictlon factor
2 = downstream p + pressure bar (a)

u
1 = equivalent length rn d = pipe id inchs
relocity
mls
= s p u l f i c vol m3/kg This calculation requires a degree of trial and error as - y

v
I, 9 6
. TOTAL
TEPlDPIEXPISUR
Revision : 0
PqcNa: .
9.7
FLARE SYSTEM
Oat@: 2/83
6)Examint the P l (calc) at the relief drum and decide if the stack + header diameter is adequate I t is PI (cak) drum approaching the maximum upstream pressure allowable at the plant ? if so increase the diameter and repeat the AP calc.
7)Oflcc sathfied with the drum-tip line,proceed
can
back up the flare header and
late the next section of Une diameter.
8) Continue along the headers, adjusting flowrates as necessary if sources disappear,
untU t k '*weak link" criteria has been satisfied. 9)lf the project requires,sub headers and laterals can be egtirnated from the main line
static backpressures calculated above.
EXAMPLE :
@ PS$
0
B
F n 4
Hrbr
-t
0 P< t.2 k3 I 1
L. l o o n
h3
1.1 br:,
4
a . ?
I
0.6
I. Flare design is based an vent [low from source (1) 2. Weak link in system 1s set by PSV a t source (2)
3. System must be designed for a design flow from source (1) not giving a backpressure at point (3) o f more than 1.2 barg. 4 . Size line from tip to drum (1 = 150 m) to give P drum O,5 barg (say) site lint from drum to point (3) (L = 100 ml to give PI < 1.2 barg. 5 Check that source (1) can flow from (I) to (3) with pressure drop available.
73
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Rev~sion : 0
P C ~ No. R :
FLARE SYSTEM
Date : 2/85
9.8
NOTE I ) :
laterals
--->
sub headers
--->
headers must increase in diameter
as the system progresses to the tip.
2)
Max velocity in a line is When calculating
MACH 0.7
for short duration
rdiefs only.
AP
for flare systems isothermal flow is
assumed for each section. For high source pressures with low MW
AT v6 AP profile
will yield more accurate results, i.e. adlust
temp a t specific points in the system to account for accurcd.
5- FLARE K O DRUM SlZlNC

A f l a r e KO d r u m Is provided to drop wt and collect t h e liquid part
of
the f l a r e vapours in
order t o :
5.1.
prevent
quid accumulation at the base of t h e f l a r e boom or tower
to mini11 e t h e risk of burning liquid [golden rain) emerging from the tip and falung on personnel
t o recover and reclaim valuable product materials. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
s e p a r a t e knock o u t drums a r e generally required lor earh level of flare system installed i.e. :a n H P KO drum, LP K O drum, LLP drum
cold v a p w r lines Le. < O'C) can be introduced immediately upstream of inlet line to a "warm" drum providing t h e resultant temperature in the drum does not
caH below design. This precludes t h e need for two independant drums.
FLARE KO DRUMS SHOULD BE HORIZONTAL AT ALL TIMES.

Mist eliminators a r e not to be installed. Min design pressure of drum is
3.5 b a r (6)
Heating coils should be installed in f l a r e KO drums to prevent freezing of residual liqulds. Typical is to maintain a T min = 4.C LIQUID 3ROPLET
SIZE (per AP1521)

110
Recommended particle sizes are :

VERT lCAL FLARE
(offshore)
I*
INCLINED BOOM
> 45' < 45.
150
boo
I,
REMOTE FLARES
600
u g
TOTAL
TEPIOP/EXPISUR
Revision : 0
Page No. :
FLARE SYSTEM
bate :
2/85
93
5.2.
DRUM SIZING
Bawd on the above design considerations the flare KO drum can be sized using the
method outlined in section 2.0. VESSEL DESIGN.
For a flare KO drum, t h e normal liquid level should be kept in the tower part of the drum 1.e. : utHise as much space as possible for the vapor-liquid dt-entrainment. If a large diameter drum results consider using a split flow arrangement with the cxlt noz. r mounted on t h e head. This will rnaxirnise the L/D ratio and give a smaller Iighit drum. This is especially useful offshore where weight + space are a major concern. An LSHH will normally be installed in the flare drum to Initiate a plant shutdown (or
wellhead shut in oiishore).
6.0.
RELIEF DEVICE SIZING (For more detail see API 520.521)

6.1.
GENERAL
- Safety
6.2
valves are either termed balanced or conventional depending upon the
backpressure limitation
Rupture discs are less robust than an equivalent safety valve and rannot be relied
on to function accurately.
It is recommended that rupture discs arc avoided
BACKPRESSURE
- Backpressure exists in two forms I
. flowlng backpressurc is
. superimposed
flare
the pressure on the discharge side of a PSV that i s
blowing off to the relief system

backpressure, or static backpressure is the p e s s u r e on the
discharge side of a PSV caused by another relief source in the system venting to
- For conventional valves the

6.3LIQUID RELIEF
Maximum Allowable Backpressure (MABP) for either superimposed or flowing is 10 86. For balanced relief valves up ra 40 % can b t allowed for without a reduction in the valve capacity.
The formula for siring liquid relief

A= gpm 27.2 Kp. K , .
valves is :
Kv
G
l i7
TOTAL
TEPIOPIEXPISUU
Revision : 0
Page NO. :
FLARE SYSTEM
Date :
2/85
4-10
Where :
A
Effective discharge area, ins2

Flowrate, u.3, galIons/mIn Specific gravity a t flowing temperature
gPm G
P
=
x
"d
Kw
Kv
Capacity correction factor due to over pressure (from figure 6.5) Relieving pressure minus constant back pressure (PSI) Capacity correction factor due to back pressure when balance belows value a r e used (irom figure 6.4) Viscosity correction factor (from figure 6.3.)
VAPOR RELIEF
The formula for sizing vapor relief is :
A:
inch2
C K PI Kb
Where W
T
I
: :
K = PI =
Kb
= =
Relief flow, lbslh ! i = Compressibility factor Inlet vapor remperature, ' R (1.8 'K1 Coefficient (from figure 6.1, 6.2) Coefficient of discharge (0.975 unless vendor data available) Upstream pressure, psis. Set pressure x 1.1 for blodted outlet, CV failure or 1.2 for fire plus 19.7 psia Capacity correction factor (from figure 6.6) Molecular weight of the vapour
M
6.5.
RELIEF FOR GAS EXPANSION DUE TO FIRE (DRY VESSEL)

A.
A
A,
=
A,
4-F
F '
F' =
0.1406
.
T
~1.25
CK
T
~0.6506
effective discharge area o f valve ins2 = exposed surface area of vessel ftZ
= 1560-T,'R = temp. a t relief pressure R ' .
C and K as in 6.4
6.6.
r
STEAM RELIEF
A=
inch2
SO
PI K&,
/ 40
TOTAL
TEPIDPIIXPISUR
Revili~n : 0
Page NO. :
FLARE SYSTEM
Date: 2/85
9.11
PI
l
I
6.7.
Klh
- superheat correction factor table 6.1.

RELIEF VALVE ORIFICE SIZES
= Set pressure x 1.03. (ASME Power) or 1.1. (ASME Unfired vesseis)
STANDARD
The following table may be used for estimating tho relief valve size based
won the
effective discharge areas calculated
6s
in paragraphs 6 . 3 , through 6.6. :
Nozzle
Orifice letter
Effective Area sq. inches
Normal size Designation
Avoid using 2 1/2 inch outlet flanges
(F and C orifices)
**
Avoid using 2 112 inch inlet flange (3 orifice)
TOTAL
TEP/DP/EXPISUR
Revision : 0
Page No. :
FLARE SYSTEM
Oatc:
2/81
9.12
7 .
DESlCN CUlDE Flares-Vents-Relief and Blowdown systems CFF MAY 1989 - TEPIDPIEXP
API
A
7.2.
520
AFI I b C API 14E
521
7.3.
Det Ncrske Veritas :Technical Notes fixed offshore installations
Norwclgen Petroleum Directorate :Guidelines for safety evaluations of platform conceptual designs.
LIO
YI
111
1p2
449
~ I J
1x1
141
733
7 3
WB
141
701 191 131
11+
1.2
141
992 3 3
YII
741 7 n
197
tro
if)
rlr
n r
--.
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPlSUR
PROCESS ENG~NEERIHGDESIGN MANUAL

FU.kE
ierision : C I
P W NO :
AND
RELIEF
Date
:2/05
9-13
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR

F U R L UJD RTLlEF
Rerision : U
Page No :
Dl#*
: 2/05
9.11
lrcornlnrnJ,#
The
curre m a , k Whtn a h mrbr rot ~ h c LOIICCIU~

pigYm
.
.
NOT,: ~ h. b t d ~NW. *LOW t h r ~ up to and i ~ l u d i ? LJ~p i . e*rrpl-rm, caprcilp 11 r l e c t d by L IK chbnlr m lilt. lh* cur.* rtpt#nn#rr sornp~ornirrof lhr *llWr ~ i kdr i~hvrp r w f i i e r n . rnd hr shrnw in ow*I numb.r 01 rrlet.ralws m r n u i x l w m . This c l d df LI lh. 1 *hmn tha ma** o r lb v * I w nc4 bnfiwm p,=~,.,.. A b . . 2 1 p ~ s e n l .csp.cily It rlllnll in o*.rplrUUIe. \nOwll. I h l ~ b n u l r r l u r tll h d d br C Q I~ IU~~~ Vrlvrr -ratin# low ovsrprruurrs und " c h ~ k r " :l ? r r r latiw for,. orarprnrur.r 01 k r c l h r n 10 p r c m l muuld br r*odcd
*I
.votiobl.
torlorI ( .
ar Censrant Barb.?rrssur~ Silin9 Figure for 2) plrtr"t arrrpr.,~~r. on Ilabnr.d B b l l o r s s o f a ~ ~ - l r l iV dO ~ * * S
&5
.Capocity C o r r t c l i o n l a c l o r - Due
prcrlur.
lor
Rcli.1
ond
10 0v.r. Salefy.Rrliel
(Liquidr Only)
Volr.1
in l i q u i d Scrrlcr
. -.
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR

FLAW AND RELIEF
Revision :
Pa~sNo :
Dbrc
: 2/~5
9.15
I P
I;:
L O
1 5
20
25
GAGE BACK PRESSURE
BACK PRESSURE
30
35
40 PSlC
45
50
,IPSIG
Norr: Thc abov curvcr trprrprnl rn romprnmlu or lhr ralun rcromnnded by a nvrnkr 01 rclicf wal*e mrnvi=rlutcr~ ehd may be uwd when lhc mabr or ral-e or the aclubl trilical.l?aw presrvre p i n t I01 ihr rapor or # I 3 i5 unknown. When thc makc i l Lnom. Ihc manufacortr nhwld h comrulrd lor Ihr corrcLlion f ~ c l e t T l n r curves r r r tor rt pnrurc. of 5 4 pounds p l r sqvmrr #nth *oar and abort. Thty art lirniled to h c h prcnurc klm cril*alnow p*.rure ter r ~ i w n r r pwsure. Fw wbtrfilaczl.flor bmct presrurm b l o w SO paundr p r quare inch -PC. rtu manvfrctu~rr mual br cmsultcd rw ihr v r l u a of K..
Figure b,(k-~.r~abl. o r Conrioni 8ack.Prcrrur~Sizing Focror K. for Bolontcd Bellows Sofr!y.R*lirf pars and Gases)
VaIvrr (YO.
1 .o
0.0
09
0.4
0.2
0
./0
60 70 80 90 100 BACK PRESSURE. PSI* ABSOLUTE BACKPRESSURE' SET PRESSURE OVERPRESSURE. PSIA XI00 = r X
1 0
20
36
40
50
Figure 6 * 6 L ~ o n ' l o n i 8o.k
Prelrurc
Siring roctor I(* Far Convrntio,ml ~ . h ~ ~ . r ( e l i s Volver t (Vapors ond Cares
Only1
TOTAL
T EPIDPIEXPISUR
PROCESS ENGINEERING DISlQN MANUAL
Rnl~ion :
O m t m
Prp* NO :
: 2/83
10.
?SPES VALVES + FITTINGS
/4Y
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Revision: 0
Pmge No. :
PROCESS AND UTILITY LlNE SIZING

Datt ;
2/85
10.1
1. APPLIC,
'UTY
. -
For a feasibility study a quick e s t i m a t e of the line size will be required.

For a pre-project study a b e t t e r estimate of the line s l z c will be required.
The purpose of this guide is to size only the lines in t h e process unit. For t h e both the feasibility and prc-project studies a b a q w s AFTP c a n be used :
"Pour le cslcul d e s p e r t c s dc charges des liquidts dans les conduites" "Pour le calcul dcs pcrtes de chargcs dcs g a z dans Its conduitcs"
.
.
The line sizing depends on t h e service :
F l a r e lints, pipeline end riser sizing a r e not included on this chapter.
2 . LIQUID LlNES SIZING CRITERIA

S e t Table 1.
3 . VAPOR AND STEAM LINES SIZING CRITERIA

See
Table 2.
5. T W O PHASE PLOW LINE SIZING CRITERIA

The
PvZ c r i t e r i a
as
s t a t e d for vapor lines to be followed with :

W
=rm
*
in kglm3
W =
WJ + Wv = t o t a l f k ~ w r a t e in kgfh
fl =
W1 =
Wv =
liquid flow r a t e in kg/h vapor flow r a t e in kg/h

mls
p v
liquid density in kglrn3 vap?r density in kglm3
and V = Vrn =
Pi = internal diameter of the Line in m.

om a n d Vrn a r e respectively the apparent density and velocity of the fluid.
.- - -
-- Revision : Q
Page t4o. :
TOTAL
TEPIOPIEXPISCIR
u n , , , ,
nzlnc
Datr:
2/83
10.2
.
,
The flow regime t o be checked on the figure I for horizontal lines and on the figure 2
l o r vertical lines.
For horizontal lines slug and plug flow regimes should be avoided.
, For v t r t i c a l lines slug flow regime should be avoided.

Remark : Flow chart fig. 1 and 2 are based on author's experimental results.
5. PRESSURE DROP CALCULATIONS 5.1.

MONOPHASIS FLLID (GAS OR LIQUID1 5.1.1
''ABAQUES AFTP" could be used w i t h the correction o f the line diameter
rch as indicated on there ABAQUES.
5.1.2.
Method using MOODY or "regular" Fanning friction factors.

a.
Calculate Reynolds number
R ~ fli . V
Pi
= = =
line internal diameter in mm fluid density in kg/m3 velocity in m/s
. -$
P V
f *=
fluid dynamic viscosity in Cpo

Re is a dimensionless number
b . Determine the relative roughness :

c. Determine i = friction factor :
See Figure 3 -3 & D
See Figure 4 4 f =
bar1100 rn
d.
5.2.
P=f x7 LOO ;x
&
%t
TWO PHASE FLUlD
Many correlations e x i s t to calculate the pressure drop for two phases flaw, depending of the vertical or horizontal line, ratio of vapar/liquid and pressure and temperature conditions. That is out of scope of this guide and we mention only some
authors :
POETTMANfCARPENTER FLANIGAN
EATON
LOCKHARTJMARTINELLE quick methods for an estimation are as follaws :
BEGGSIBRILL TAITELIDUCKLER
I5 . 7
T OTA L
TEPIDPIEXPISL
Revilion: O
Pmg? Ha. :
PROCESS
unuw
slziwz
nrtt: 2fg5
10.3
5.2.1.
"ABAQUE AFTP" for gas could be used with the correction of tht line
diameter. Takin as defined in 1 4 and the liquid viscosity as the fluid viscosity.
2 . 2
Method using MOODY or "regular" fanning friction factors.
It i s the same method as on C 5.1.2.
f.=P" and the fluld viscosity taken as the liquid

5.2.3.
section 11.0 PIPELINES.
i . NOTES
wlth
and V = Vm as defined on 5 9
viscosity.
A more detailed method using the Lockhart Martinelli method i s given i n
. .
Tubes dimensions are standard and an example i s given on Table 3.
With "ABAQUE AFTP" the correction for the internal diameter must be done and an estimation of the line thickness could be done with the following formula used mainly for
high pressure.
thickness Design pressure allowable stress
rnm bar g
bar
Y =
coefficient having values for tcrritlc steels external diameter corrosion allowance inch mm
P =
S
=
Be
C =
E =
longltvdial weld joint factor
5, E and Y are not always available so the following iorrnular could be used for an
estimation.
thickness in mrn design pressure in bar g external diameter in inch
P =
de =
= corrosion allowance in mm K = 43 for carbon steel and low temperature

carbon steel
54 for 3.5 % Ni and stainless steel
For small diameters upto about 10" usc the thickness given by the schedule on fable 3. For
P do not 'forget to take into account the change in clevstjon for liquld and two
phase 1low.
TOTAL
T EPIDPIE XPISUR
PROCESS ENGINEERING DESlGN MANUAL

PRCCESS WD ImXLITY
Reviaion : 0
P w No:
30.5
LXN~IZ~NG
Dete
: 2/85
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ I _ _
? P?
0
fi
4 0
9h!
1 5 9 9 N' N-
. ,
C.hC.C.CA-CICI
s>
3 EUP
NN
22 E
= a
0 0
m*
I?
rn
_ _ l _ _ _ _ f _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - d - - - 4 - - -
EC
0 0 0 0 0 0
O D "
5 .-
e 4
& I
g;aE
2 u
S.$Z
= i f
G . 2
9
V +-
5:
z 2:
11
-.'
vl UJ
*-=z
=22
k
I 0
0
x:3 m -___________-_______--------i
G
ML L U
k
P
= x:!i u OaaS
2 w~ n
0
2
U ~ M ~ W
RE
E E
go
N :
EE
v,,
8 8 N P . 4
" A
b 3-k u a v n
5oa: .snV
dVgfi
t d
5 n z u
ct
'-+vv V O O h a m n a
. ; Z
....
gam,
g: yg
G
.. 5 < s , > _-_________________---------a

I
n < >
3 z
g ." U,
.*
o . , .
*0
58
E
k k EE
0 0 11 U
8 u 2 l m r .a5
.. ; -5
M
D rd
..
M
On
v
V
2
v
a
0
:
I
d,
A
/3-5
Revision : 0
P ~ g No. l :
f LPIDPIEXPISUR
Date:
2/85
10.6
7. REFERENCE5 AND USEFUL LITERATURE
LUDWIG
.
,
Flow of flulds CRANE "Gas liquld flow in pipelines I Research regults" by A.E. DUKLER May 1969 Publ by A.G.A., API and Union of HOUSTON
"Gas liquid f l o w in pipeline I1
- Design manual" by 0. BAKER, H.W.
BRAINERD, C.O. COLDREN, FLANIGAN and J.K. WELCHEN, October 1970,
published by A.G.A. and API
"Proposed correlation of data for isothermal t w o phase, two component flow in pipelines" LOCKHART, R.W. and R.C. MARTINELL1 (1949)
BEGCS , H.D., and
.
.
BRILL, 3.P. Manual lor "Two phase
[Low in pipes" 1975 university of
TULSA
ABAQUES AFTP:
.
-
"Pour le calcul des pertes de charges des liquidcs dans lcs
conduitcs" "Pour le calcul des pertes d e charges des gaz dans Its condui tes"
PEPITE PKOGRAM
"CHEMICAL PROCESS DESIGN ON A PROGRAMMABLE CALCULATOR"
W. WAYNE BLACKWEIL, 8.5. Page 22
"Two phase pressure drop computedqq Mafik
SoLirnan, Hyd. Processing April 84
156
TOTAL
'IEPIDP/EKPfSUR
10qow
PROCESS E N G l N E E R l N O D E S I G N MANUAL
PROCESS AND
Revirion :
uTmn LINE SIZING
No :
Date
:2(es
10 .7
Iblnr
hvrllonlll t*e-ph~#a no* ( b . & m earn hDm I", i'
.Flsr
rJ.L*m.
as& Ha. 10, lBU, D.

IhODO
I
1H.I
s ,
I,DOD
8.
Bx.210.7
WG
0.5
(gO.I66\
0.33
SeC P.11.3
BY =
7.102 W C
fl V
O E z
OSHINMYO -CHARLES TWO PHIsE FLOW MAP FOR VERTICAL UPWARD f LOW a
FIGURE
- P i p Inside durnmHr, inthn
p 1- Liquid dcfisity. L ~ / F I '
xr
4
~ r ~ ~ / f i 1#53[(0, .
.
+ o , ~ ~ m ~ u]11.5111 [ p ~ 1'1~0.25 ~ ~
I TOTAL (
T EPIDPIEXPlSWR
PROCESS ENGINEERING DESIGNMANUAL

PROCESS AND UTILITY
LINE SIZING
tlevi~mn :
r *yn
o.tr
Date
: 2/05
10 .o
Fi y r c 3
- Relative
rawghnas of pipe
P i p Dim&r, ia Frd -P
P i p Djmlel. in lKhn d
11
21
ror mchrdulr 10 9 < 1 4 - m r * mot used n ~ r n . 1 1 ~ mr rolloli.. a i d t . . . are nor c m m r 0 , Y O . I I 31 fox QI lo- lim dl.+rcrr i r c m a n in 2 " incrrrrml.
'
>
2 "2..
3 I/='# 5"
.______---~
160
TOTAL
TEPIDNEXPl5UR
~ev~sio :n 0
page NO..
PIPING CLASS
Date:
2/85
10.11
1. APPLICABILITY
The purpose of this chapter is t o determine the piping class uscd
as shown on a PID line whtn the f . i ~ i n gmaterial class document does not exist. This is generally the case for
feasibility arid pre-project studies.
2. CLASS NUMBERING PRINCIPLES (From DD-5P-TCS-112 "PIPING MATERIALS CLASSES")

2.1.
GENERATION OF NUMBER
The class number shall consist of a capital letter representing the ANSI series and 5 two-digit number representing the main material entering into the composition o f the material used for the valve bodies, tubes, fittings and flanges of the network in question.
Example :
Series 150
. . . ...........
0 -
01
+
. ....,........Carbon steel
The tables below give the letters and numbers to be uscd for numbering piping
Claases.
2.2.
LETTERS representing the series of the class

Series
Symbol
1 125 1 150 1 250 1 300 1 400 1 600 1 900 1 1500 2500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l I

I
A B
Traring
Y
3 1
2.3.
NUMBERS representing the main material of the class

01 t o 20 21 t o ir5
56 to 70
: Carbon steels (ordinary, galvanized, normalized, etc...) :
:
Alloy steels
f l to 85
86 t o 99
Stainless steels : Special alloys (Monel, Hastelloy, etc...] : Other materials (Cast-iron, copper, copper alloy, t t c ..I Glass Plastic, cement-asbestos fiber, ctc...
/61
----
TOTAL
T EPtDPIEXPtSUR
Revision : 0
Pagr No. :
PIPlNc CLASS
Date : 2/85
10.12
3 P R U I U R E TEMPERATURE RATINGS
The following ANNEX G is extracted from ANSI 8 16-5 1977 (AMERICAN NATIONAL
STANDARD STEEL
PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS).
Far pressure temperature ratings higher than series 2500 tho Iollowing is used 5000 PSI,
10000 PSI,
...(used mainly for well tubing and wellhead).
WOttS ( e l p*rm.aible bul r M rwrarnnendad lor prolanomd vr. n h r * {dl "01 tab. uwd ova, 65O.f {.I n m l t* b* uwd o7.r I M ' F (h) nol io b . uswd er.r 1000.1
m'f
SI
Conv..s*n
Llo {go1 6 . 8 V I
plls
."
..-IRevision : 0
.
Page No. :
TOTAL
TEP1DPlLI(PlSU R
SELECTION OF TYPES OF VALVES

Date:
2/85
10.13
1. APPLICABtLlTY
The purpose o f this chapter is to determine the types of valves used f o r designation on the
PID.
valves are used tor two mains functions, isolation and control.
The following is only a guide line for selection of types oi valves which must follow the piping material class document when it exists. 2 . BLOCK VALVES
The main types are :
, ball
plug
. .
gate
butterfly
2.1.
BALL VALVE
Ball valves can be full bore or reduced bore.

2.1.1.
Full bore u x s
.
.
flare system : upstream and downstream of PSV, rupture disc, flare line if
required. downstream pig launcher and upstream pig receiver. vents and drains on hydrocarbon equipments. piping valves on instruments for hydrocarbon. far block valves on hydrocarbon lines if the pressure drop is critical.
.
,
.
2.1.2.
utility except water for diameter larger than 2".
Reduced bore uses
.
2.2.
Block on hydrocarbon service without solid particles.
PLUG VALVE USES

Plug\/alves have the same use as reduced bore ball valves when used for high pressure (600~ Plug valves can be as~irnilatedto reduced ball valves, Generally, plug valves
are the smaller and lighter of the two.
1 6 3
To
. TEPIDPtEXPISUR
2 . 3 .
Revision : O
Page No. :
SELECTION OF TYPE5 OF VhLYeS

Date : 2/85
10.14
GATE VALVE USES
.
.
Gate valves can be used as ball valves except for downstream of pig launcher and
upstream of pig receivers. The vertical physical space requlrcd by a gate valve is greater than a ball valve.
T i t h t shut off for ball or plug valves is superior to that of a gate.

For hydrocarbon service w i t h solid particles presentor as wing valves on well
.
+
heads.
For quick dosure purposes.
On utility lines tor low diameters < 2"
2..
BUTTERFLY VALVE USES
On water lines for service, utility or sea water, generally for diameters larger
than 2".
3. CONTROL VALVES
The main types are
:.
.
.
globe
butterfly
special
3.1.
GLOBE VALVE USED
.
3.2.
Control valve used in most Q! cases except at very high A P as defined by instrument group, or on water networks, and compressor suctlon lines for
throttling purposes.
BUTTERFLY VALVE USED
.
3.3.
On water networks Throttling a t compressor suction
SPECIAL VALVES USED

Special valves are defined by instrument grwp :
for very high A P the angle valve could be used for cornpressor anti-surge cage valves could be used.
164
Revision : 0
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Page No. :
Date:
2/15
10.15
I. APPLICABILITY
The purpose of this chapter is to calculate precisely the pressure drop in a piping network.
This may be required for either study phase for situations where
A P is a critical
consideration. For most proj-ts
however calculation of process lint
A PI wil
not be
required. The pressure drop calculations are based on a summation K method.

2.
P THROUGH VALVES
2.1.
YALYES OPEN
1
I
I
TYPE
K
I
I
GATE VALVE
0.15
I I I 1 I I
GLOBE
VALVE
I I I 1
NALlNE
0 .I
CHECK VALVE
2.4
1
1
1 ,
I
P
2.2.
P in kglcm2 : Iluld density in kg/m3
1 bar
V
: 1.02
kgicrn2
: fluid velocity in m/s
BALL VALVE
A P through bell valve with reduced bore : This

extract of CAMERON BALL
P depends on the valve vendor. An
VALVE PRODUCTS is given as an example.
The example below gives aomt values of the pressure drop coefficient K L o r fittings cncounterd in cylindrical conduits. For further information, refer to "MEMENTO DE5 PERTES DE CHARGE by I . E . IDEL'CIK, EYROLLES idition, PARIS".
A P in kglcm2
P V
I
ELBOWS
fluid density in kE/rn3 : fluid velocity in mls

:
A P=K
K values for elbows.
I
1
RID
90'
1.5
0.17
t
I I
f
3
0.12t4.721 0.08
t
I I
5
0.09 + 7.87 f
2-36 f
I I
@I* 0.1 + 8
I
1
I
f
I I
2.36 f
0 . 0 6 + 3.94
f = friction factor see chapter PROCESSIUTILITY -LINE SIZING 5 5
---
TOTAL
TEPlDPlEXPlSUA
Revision : 0
Pogo No :
AP
THROUGH VALVES AND
FIlTINGS
Date
:?/as
10,~.
3.2. taLr-t
aF
ra--~*~
T-l-#
C
'44
S. \ I .
% \-
s ,
$9
~ D H
LI-I
Y ' & , =r,
K-~'CI
- $1
K' -
:A,
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
v
Revirion :
Page No :.
1 0 .I 7
P THROUGB VALVES AND FITTINGS
Date
.
:2/B5
3.4
3-lr.4
trc
5,ts,
L
>S.
Q15,
zy2
V.,%.
5. =
5 4
vaunl<h%
Cr.*)
a)Lku.\
br-h
x . ~ + ( ~ * ~ - 2 ( , . ~ ) - , . b , , ~ ( ~ )
1
sp++b-a
z . l - ( r - sa),
3-lc.2 -
Q,
- '-'.
5.
TOTAL
f EP/DPf EXPfSUR
.
F l g a No :
Revmian : 0
A P mrnUM
VALVES AND
PI'ITlNGS
Data
: 2/85
10. 10
4,
3.4 3
v.
+--?$
5.
J '.
5,
) , c
L + .& \ .
&=***k
O C ~ C C ~ a .l
, (
+
~ * q * '
+* 4
5
V.
-3
2/,
= kt
[, *($
- 2,
I
4'. 1 C.
2)
M.72
A --I
f b
R . [O.%
*($r]
j v.
5 & 0.0 v.
5 Ye
)or$
4'
0 4
h.
b)
~ t r . . ~ h +bic*.h
oql, ( I - 4,
.-
--
16f
TOTAL
.
TEPlDPlEXPlSUR
PROCESS E N G I N E E R I N G DESIGN MANUAL

A ? THROUGH VhLVfS AND FITTING5
Revision :
P 4 t No :
Dart
;2/85
10.19
Resistance Coefficient. K
The rtsisrrnte coclicicn ncrlculatrd by thr formub:
K= r
V a l m of 1ht Irktion fmor, 1, b r valiovr pipe sizes are lined in rablt 1.17. W l u n for LtD and C. k r W y ~ n t valwr d were taltulared from thearetical s~nldcratiom.Vllvcl of C. for panialty open u a k u were rnripolalrd from in1 rnultJ lor rtprcrenlrtwe sizrr of brll v a k . Chrn 1 * 18 provides graphic reprcsrntation of vahn pahion *nus the percent of full O w n ires.
FricIlon Factor Ill
Table 1-47
Table 1.3 Calculated Values of t/D for Full Opening Cameron Ball Valves In Full Open Position
m ] T l
-. -
.-
ro
dm
.. ir
am 5-
1 Is
1.1
8,
I .
7-
'I1 .-1
*#
I .
8 .
S C rn
in I*
1.1
I. I I-
1 11
IY
.*
1 rn
I Y
Im
1r
--
.
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUA
- -.- -- -..
~ D O C E SE~N C I ~ ~ E R ~ DESIGN NO MANUAL
~*vi~io :n
a t
Pago NO :
A P THROUGH
v~LVESA m FI'ITINCS
: 2/85
10.20
Table 1-5 Calculated Values of L/D for Reduced Opening Cameron Ball Valves in Full Open Position
m w .
u n .
--r
--.... _ -.
muu - ~m 1 4-=d
111 LI
H I + I
tl
1%
w v u .
m e w .
a a l p ~ F 111 m
1.7
4 9
aI
' I I I5 111
* I
a.
1,s
. . 1
m..
1.1
3Z.m
I.rlI
I1
11 1
,it 111 -. -1 41 a *' nb g:

11 11 1
11 1
nI
1 1 1
ma
r n l
n .
L I
111
1 0 1 1 --.-m
dI
m*
*!I
1 , .
a>*
it.
u . n
, I . "
111
ISP 11 1
1 11
I , .
11 1
111
"'
11 1
aI
1 . 1
I .
UI
k*
I .I
#'*
2 2 19
1 . ,
*a
P . IH
111 13'
I ,I m.
*I 3.e
Ita
I1 7
111
1Y 111 11'
In* 111
111
1 1I
111
nnm
7 4 . n
P*
111
n.
I . 1
H I
nn
I-
91
1.1
Table 1-6
Venturi Openin Cameron Ball Valves in Full pen Position
Calculated Values of L/D for
-,-.
I .. . I I
CONTROL VALVE SIZING
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
10.21
1. APPLICABILITY
Tht purpose of this chapter is t o give some formulae to estimate the size and the number of
control valves installed for one given service, and to estimate the capability o f the control valves i n case of revamping. The final sizing should be done by instrument people.
2. CONTROL VALVES CHARACTERISTICS

Them are determined principally by the design of the valve trim. The three fundamental characteristics available are quick opening, linear, and equal percentage. 2 . 1 . QUICK OPENING
As the name implies, this type provides a large opening as the plug is first lifted from the scat with lesser flow increase as the stem opens further. The most common
application i f for simple on-off control with no throttling of flow required. 2.2.
LINEAR
Linear trim provides equal increaws i n stern travel. Thus the flow rate is linear with plug position throughout i t s travel.
2 . 3
EQUAL PERCENTAGE Provides equal percentage increases i n rate of flow for equal increments of stem
travd. The characteristics provide a very small opening for plug travel near the Seat and very l a r ~ e increase toward the fully open position. As a result, a wide rangeability of flow rate b achieved.
3. CONTROL VALVE RANGEABILITY For an estimation only it is common practice t o select a valve i n which the valve opening
.
.
at maximum flow is smaller than or equal to 9 1 per cent. For normal flow the valve opening should be at least 60 per cent while for minimum flow, il applicable, the opening should be larger than 10 per cent. If the inlnimurn flow is clor
'o or smaller than 10 per cent, a smaller valve should be installed i n parallel with
n valve.
the n
For a flow rate the valve opening depends on the valve characteristics and i t is given by vendor i n their catalcgue.
4. FORMULAE
The valve area is characterized by the coeificient Cv (except lor FISHER which use Cg for the gas (see hereafter). The Cv coefficient is the number 01 U.S. gallons of water flowing during one minute through a restriction and the pressure drop through this restriction is 1 PSI. The following formulae are slmpllfied and to be used only far an estimation of the Cv. Some corrections may be necessary for the installation of reducers around the control valve. I f so, the Iormulae given by manufacturcrs i n their catalogues w i l l be used for a better Cv calculatlon.
/ 7/
TOTAL
TEPlDPlEXPlSUR
Rcvir~on :
Page No. :
CONTROL VALVE SIZING
Drte:
2/85
10.22
4.1.
LIQUID
- Sub critlcal flow

= I
Pv<PZandPI - P 2 < ~ f 2 APS I PI - P ~ > C ~ ~ ~ P S
1 1 I
- Critical flow
v .
. ..Q j PI - PZ
=
I 1
JEZ ~
Ps
CI
Pv
critical flow coefficient (given by manufacturers and depends on the
type of valve and the action of valve by increase of variable) cf
<
=
:
P1 P2
fluid vapor pressure in bar g. upstream pressure in bar g.

downstream pressure in bar g.
A pi
PC
= PI
=
- (0.96 - 0.28 @ ) Pv PC
APS
or to simplify, i f Pv < 0,s PI,

Q
sg
PI
- Pv
fluid critical pressure in bar f b w rate in m31h at upstream conditions

specific gravity at flowing temp. (water = 1 a t 15.C)
4.2.
GAS AND STEAM
- Sub critical How PI - P2 < 0 . 3 cf2 PI

A
I I I I
1
- Critical flow
- PI ) 0.5 ~
Q
257 Cf PI
PI
f P2 I
,--=A
295
(PI P2)(PI + PZ)
GAS
I 1 = ,
I I
Cv
47.2 W
1
( P ~ + Prg ~I
C V = 54.5 W
JIPI-P~)
I I
ct PI
W = mass flowrate i nt h
172
TOTAL
TEPIPPIEXPISUR
Revision:
Page No. :
CONlROL VALVE SIZING

Date:
2185
10.23
SATURATED STEAM
I
Cv
r
72.4 W J(PI ~ 2 (PL 1 + ~2)'
I cv=- 83.7
I I I I
Cf P I
SUPER HEATED STEAM

C v = 72.4 (I
t
PI - P2)(P1 + PZ)'
0.00126
Tw)W
I Cv = 83.7 (1 + 0.00126 Tos) W I C f PI I

1.0)
Cg, PI, P2, Q =me definition and unit as 5 4.1.
= relative density (air

=
T
Z W
Tos
upstream gas temperature OK = 273 s t e a m weight in tlh s t e a m superheat in 'C
+ 'C
= upstream compressibility factor

= =
43. T W O PHASE FLOW

For sizing, maximum
PI
- P2 = 0.5 ~ 1 P2I
I 1 B With liquid vaporization
- Without liquid vaporization
&=
q )
51.8 W
1 cv
36.6 W
Cg, P I , P2 same definition and unit as 5 9.1.

W =
t o t a l fluid flow. in t/h upstream mixture density in kg/m3

d=
dl =
W x 103
-t-
WII dl1
Wlv dlv flow in kg/h density in kg/m3 flow in kglh density in kg/m3
Wll = upstream liquid dl1 = upstream liquid 1 = upstream vapor d l v = upstream vapor
172
~ O T 11 A p m.ouci.
Rkvilion : 0
v,uvis
rrmNcr
rPage
No. :
d2 = downstream rnjxturr density in kg/m3

d2
W x 103 W21 w2v -+d2 1 d2v

r
t
W21
downstream liquid flow in kglh
d21
d2v
downstream liquid density in kg/m3

downstream vapor flow in kg/h down~trcam vapor density in kg/m3
W2v t
4 . 4 .
FISHER FORMULAE
For gar 'FLSHER" use Cg instead o f Cv
C1 = valve coefficient (given by catalogue)
Cg =
0.4583
dplsin
3
-c ]
dag.
W =
gas flow rate in kglh
d = gas density at upstream tanditions in kg/m3

PI : upstream pressure in bar (a1 P2 = downstream ptessurt in bar (a)
5.0
REFERENCES AND USEFUL LITERATURE
Vendors documentations
CPSA chapter 2
TOTAL
tEPlDPlEXPBUR
PROCESS ENGlNEERlNC DESIGN MANUAL
Revision :
Plgr No :
Datw
: 2/85
/ , =
TOTAL
. 7EPlDP/EXPISCIR
Revision : 0
Page No. :
PIPELINES
Oate:
2/85
11.1
For both feasibility and preprojcct studies, long pipeline

normally be performed using PETITE or RESEAU. I t
and A T calculations will may be necessary however to make an
AP
estimate by hand. Details are glvtn below on how l o proceed on this.
2. PIPELINE PRESSURE DROP FORMULAE
2 . 1 .
GAS TRANSMISSION
there exist many methods of calculating arc :
hP
for gas transmission lines. Some of these Wcymouth Darcy
American Gas Association Formula Panhandle 'A' and '8' Colebrook
Below is given the Panhandle 'A' for use : r 11.1539
Where
Pi
P;i
=
=
C
Ts ps T
=
:
L rn
q d Z E
=
r:
= =
Upstream pressure bar (a1 Downstream pressure bar (a) Specific gravity of gas K (273 K or 298 K) Base temperature Base pressure bara(l.01325 bar) Gas flowing temp K Pipeline length krn Flowrate at Ts, Ps bast m3/d (at Ts, Ps) PIPELINE DIAMETER crn Average gas compressibility Efficiency (0.92 for a clean line)
The formula does not fake into account the pipeline profile which, i f significant, can be added t o the A P calculatcd if required.
22.
LlQUlD FLOW IN PIPELINES
Use Darcy equation :
= Mass flow
=
z
kdh
p
D
AP
Density
kg/m3
crn barlkrn
= '=
Moody friction factor
Absolute roughness
(KC page
em
= lim id
pressure drop
10.8 and 10.9)

CP
= viscosity
TOTAL
TEPIOPlEXP~SUR
Reuis~an :
Page No.:
PlPELlNES
Date:
2/83
11.2
Re
= 35.368 x M
x 0
with : A - 2.457
F = 6@lRe
F
for Re
<
2000
for
=[(31~d12 + i/(A+B) 3/21 1112

a * -
Re > 2000
Ln
=
(7i~eI.9 + (0.27 E/D)

0
(37530/~e)16
l6
BE C A R E F U L when using friction factor charts as confusion arises
between MOODY F and FANNING F' :

2.3.
F' = 1/4 F
T W O PHASE
HORlZONTAL
Estimating 2-phase flow estimate of stable.
P by hand for long pipelines
is not recommended, a8
the flow characreristics and equilibrium wUI alter along its length. However an
A P can
be hand calculated providing the phase regime is fairly
Given below is a calculation method based an LOCKHEAKT-MARTINELLI-
BAKER method. This method can be used for both longpipelines (stable regime)
or process lines.
METHOD
A P2 PHASE
1
2..
.a~cu~ate A
A P HORIZ
APVERT
Evaluate flow regime and adjust Pipeline @ if required
P ~
3. calculate &pr
4 . Calculate ( ~ P ~ / P P ~ I ~ ~ ~
5. Calculate
AP
2 PHASE
factor....
: P H
6. Calculate ApVert factor (vertical section of pipe)
For convenience pipe ids are in crn viscosity is in cp.
/7f
11.4
I I
I I I 1 1 I
1 1 1 1 1 I
4. AVERAGE VELOCITY
Vs=
(W
+ m) W1
1 1 I
I I
I
VS = !-!. 0 3 ;n/s
I I V3 = average velocity I
I I
I I 1
I 1 I I I
5. CALCULATE X RATIO
=(&)f
r
I 1 II x = C.\\S
I
I
II
I
I
I
6. CALCULATE LOADlNG FACTOR WS
I
I
I I
I
WS
1 I
W i x 0.205 A
I ws=7?123 1
1
I
1 I I
1 1 I
(
I I I I I I I 1
1
I
7. CALCULATE PH FACTOR FOR HORIZONTAL FLOW

TYPE OF FLOW I
W..SD
ANNULAR
I I
I
I I
1 I I I
..I
wbl
fS
Rt Oltl.
FLOW TYPE = b;si'f52rb
I I
[..UP
BUCBLE
i
I
I
.
m
*X
.1.*1.*
LI,.,~"
#]I
PH
I.Pf8
b.&-&Wd 4 3
~4 1
mu.
1 I I
I I 1 I I
[
I STRATIFIED I
* ''
I
1-3I
I 1
1 I
I I 1 I I I
-- WAVE
PLUG
Ey+- - I
HI.=.&
D+S5J
rn
- hhs
~h
rk Fn * 0 . 2 1 1 1
- 3-793
FLOW f YPE =
WAVE
WG
A ..
] A ? ,
=S.t54
m ~ ~ pw ~h ~ ~1. >
A PZH =
bar/km
I
8. CALL . 'LATE ~n FACTOR FOR VERTICAL SECTION
YLRTICAL
SECTKIN
II
I
i 1
I
I 1
I x I I
F w
. .
X
ra.9 "'/a
a19
V i r m h D i n cm
(x) I I R N P . ' ~ ~ XD in D i s p r r d 1l@r
APH,.
to 1 1 PH r m .
t.510
I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I
9. CALCULATE TOTAL TWO PHASEAP
Horizontal
Vertical
PH z pH,=
1-r 8 1
\.St0
AP Z , , = ~ P xGP
1
A PZH =bpGx PHZ
H =~
bar
o.ri>
1%3 4 0
I I I
bar/km
barlkm I
TOTAL
&P = (ApZHx L +APzv x h)/1000 =
I I
Sheet 2 of 2
m@/ TOTAL
TIC~W?T)tC'lP~SUR
IV
/SO
PROCESS CACCULATlON SHEET
TWO PHASE PIPELINES P CALCULATION

OAT^
ITEM : NO. : JOB NO
c nx
Ilao T I T L ~. rzniirr i
Itv
TOTAL
TEP/DPIEXP/SUR
Revision :
Pmgt No. :
PIPELINES
Dare :
2/85
I I.5
3. TEMPERATURE PROFILE
For detailed and accurate AT and h P calculations in 2 phase lines buried, subsea or in air the program PEPITE should be used. The hand calculation method presented on pages Il+6, 11.7 is accurate t o wllhln 10 96 for both gas and liquid lines. The procedure is easily adapted t o a small pragrammablo calculator and increases in reliability the greater the number of segments used.
The f o l d #ingshould be remembered when designing pipelines,
+
For long pipelines assuming isothermal flow can result in overdesign in pipeline sire and
A P.
.
.
.
If the plpeline is constant with regard t o material, insulation and burial depth along its route a fixed thermal conductivity (k)can be assumed.
For gas pipelines the internal film rcsistivity is negligible - Ignore it.
For all steel pipelines the resistivity of the metat 1s also negligible.
.
.
Small plpelines 1< 20") have a large heat flow compared to the specific heat of the flowing medium. Consequently the gas w i l l reach ~roundtseatemp in a relatively short length. For large pipelines the converse is true and a long distance is required t o reach ambient.
For oil and small gas pipelines the asymptotic temperature Ta is that of the surrounding medium. For large diameter gas tines, Ta d e p n d s largely on the JwlrThompson effect.
The attached calculation sheet can be used for hot lines in cold surroundings or vice
verm
For subsea pipelines, epoxy wrapped, concrete coated resting on the bed an overall heat transier caeff of U = 10 I S k c a l / h m 2 * ~is a good estimate for calculation purposes.
/r1
%,?.
? .
11.6
Coverinn Mcdjurn :
b
C
-
y
L
q
rn
DATA -
-+ TI,?.
= 2aa.o
Tg
Temperature * C = \O Therm. cond. kcal/hmnC = 1 . Lq
LIQUID FLOW
AY
h
Total pipeline length No of segments Len~th per segment Total elevation change Pipeline diameter Pipeline diameter Burial depth to c e n t r e Inlet pressure Exit pressure Total plpeline Initial Temperature
+ m
ins
rn
=&
losoa
= a 1-a
=
Volumetric flown3/h = Density (av) k8/m3 = M Mass tlow kg/h Cp Specific heat kcallkg * C =
= 3= 0.16~
I.tl
GAS FLOW
PI
P2
AP
TI J
bara = L o bara = l a
bar
10
OC
= A?
Valumetrlc flow Molecular mass M Mass flowrate Cp Speciiic heat
m3/d (std)s ?d 0-e = tq kg/h = wcabS
kcal/kg*C* 0.6
FLUID JOULE THOMSON COEFFICIENT = (set fig. I , page 11.8)
rc *F/IOOOpsi (
VALUE
o.ooao5)
:o-L<'~lbrr
I I STEP t I I 1. Calculate heat transfer Iactor 1 1 x = 2h/D
I I
s I I
I I I
NOTES
= tkT/ln[n + (x2
- l)f)
I I I
I x I s 1
1 1
I I
1 1 2. Calculate .
:3.33 Soil = 5 keal/hmC 1 Air I Water I Sand dry I Sand wet
II
I
kcalhm~ I
1.99 0.022 0.508
I I I
0.30 1.49
I @ @ I 1 a = r/MCp (liquid or gas1 I I 1 3. Calculate Asymptotic temperatureTa 1 1 Ta=Tg-(JbP+Aylj~p)/al
.at flow ratio per unit a
I I
( a
=rrHti ~ ~ - 1
1 1 I
I 1 1 I I I
I
1 I 1
I I
1
I
1
4. Calculate downstream temp
I I Ta=-hIC I I
I
I 1 I I
f I I L is segment length I j = 426.5 & I kcal I

I I I 1
I I I I I I
I I I
I I I
I
T2 I
T2 =(Tl
- ~a)c-aL+ T a
I 1 Repeat steps 3 + b for each segment I See s h e e t 2 for stepwise spreadsheet I
I T2 =bl.kqC I
1
I
I I I
1
1 t?2
I I I
Sheet 1 of 2
ITEM
Ho.
I I
1
TPrmP*oIPEX@
m&u TOTAL m z 3 sun

CHK
PROCESS CBlCUlATlON SHEET
BURIED PIPELINE AT CALCULATION

OCTE
108 TITLE
tsAdl
07
100 Mo
REV
.
AT.
I I
11.7
ITERATIVE CALCULATION LOG FOR A BURIED PlPELlNE
I I
I
SEGMENT N*
I I LENGTH I I I
I
ELEVATION
I 1 I I I PI I T I I Ta I T2 I I I I 1 I
I
PZ
I I
I
1
m
,..a
1
I
I
I I
a
+m
41.0
~3
1 I bar a l ' C I 'C I ' C I b a r a l I 1 I I 1

1 ~
I I I I 1
I I I t 1 I 1
I I I I I 1 1 I I
I ,*eo, I
3
4
5
I I
1 I I I
I I 1
I0r r
I
I
1
1 I I I
b
7
I I I 1
1 I I I I I I I
13s
IAI.L II I
.
I
1
A
I I
I
I
I 3 ~ 1 63 0
I I
1 I I I
9
10
I I I 1 I
I I
I I I I I I
I I
I I
I I I 1
I I 1 1 I 1
I I I I I I 1 1
I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I
1 1 I
1 I I I
I
I I I I 1
1 I
1
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ! I 1 I
J
1
1
1 1
1 1 I
I I
1 I 1
I
I
I I I I I
I 1
1 I I
I
+QT.
I I
I I I I I I 1 I
c t
I I I
I I 1 I 1 1
J
I I
I I
I I I 1 1 1 I
I I
I
I
I I
I I I
I I I I I I 1 1 I
I I
I I I
I I I 1 1 I 1
I I
I
I t
I I
1 1 I I
I I I I
I I
I I
4 4
I I
b r
*td
wrfc
..In1.1.c\*i
wnrd
Cp -1
ou
kl
. hIs0 PC I I I ~ ~ C t u v P L t O \ * ~ ~ 3 .*,I uc~.o,. .

hu
l r
PP L q . 4
LWU&JC
j.L~liv~
&
flP'OOP'D~?'ta~~sun
<>
ITEM
Sheet 2 of 2
BURIED PIPELINE AT CALCULATION

oa~t
uo
II
CHK
I roo
TITLE
t s ~ ~ t * i L
JOBwo
ntv
TOTAL
Revirion : 0
Page NO. :
PIPELINES
Date :
2/85
11.8
4. LITERATURE AND USEFUL INFORMATIONS
9.1.
LUDWIG YOL I chapter 2
4.2.
4.3.
CAMPBEL VOL I chapter 12

KATZ, HANDBOOK OF GAS ENGINEERING chapter 7
4.4.
4.5.
8.6.
CRANE MANUAL
"Equations predict buried pipeline temperatures" GiKinp, 043 March 16, 1981
"Two phase
hP computedM
R. Soliman
Hydrocarbon Processin)! April 1984
Soil
1.19
concrete sand(dry1
0.65
0.30
1.19
Wet soil 4 9 Ground -> air 2.98 G r w n d --> water 29.8 Steel 38.7
Epoxy coating 0.67
sand (wet)
1.C9
Air
Water
0.022
0.5 10
Caai tar
0.22
'5 1
ri 2
loule-Thornson coefficient'
r
m.*--
Specific heatso
\
f
'*-.Htlwa--
0 PI
ra
Pr ~.mol*l.rollml.IDP2.OPI
-c
DI
rn
b)lm.ut411nIJPIm
* I
TOTAL
TCPIDPIEXPISUR
4
PROCESS EHCINEERlNC DESIGN MANUAL
R.risim :
P q r No :
bat*
: 885
12, PACKAGE
UNITS
TOTAL .
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Revision : 0
Pagt No
'
DEHYDRATION
Date : 2/85
12.1
I. APPLICABILITY
For many studies undertaken there wifl be a requirement i o r 8 gas or liquid dehydration unit i n ardcr to reduce the water content of the export phase to acceptable limits for pipeline transportation. Generally this design will be undrrtaken by a vendor sperialist. However the engineer should be aware 01 some o f the options available for dehydration schemes, some of
the dos and donts of design and also how t o undertake the basis slzlng of the most common unit (TEG). The majority of this section i s concerned with gas dehydration using tri-ethytene glycol contact, this being the most widely used.
2. GENERAL DEHYDRATION NOTES
(English units ate used throughout this section for convenience)
, Gas is normally dehydrated to 6 to LO lb af H20 per MMSCF in order to prevent hydrate formation in gas tranrmlssian lines, and reduce corrosion. Unless the gas is dehydrated liquid water may accumulate a t low polnts and reduce the flow capacity of the line.
Methods of dehydration i n usage arc :
I. Adsorption 2.
(Alumina, silica gel, male sieve) (di- or tri-ethylene glycol)
Absorption
3. Direct cooling
4 . Compression followed by cooling 5. Chemical reaction (for method injection see 4.0)
The last three methods have minor usage and are discussed elsewhere in literature.
.
.
A sumr,
y of the advantages and disadvantages
o f various absorption liquids i s given in
Table 1.
Tri-ethylene glycol is the preferred (mast widely used) absorption liquid. Example flawsheets of di- and tri-ethylene glycol arc given in Fig. 1 & 2. In order to limit the overhead glycol losses a max practical operating temp of 38 glycol viscosity.
*C(100
' P I is used. A maximum of 50 'C (50 @ F ) i s recommended t o prevent problems due t o t h t
Glycol losses arc usually i n the order to 0.012 gaIfMMCF (0.0016 mlubility run around 0.025 gallMMCF (0.0033 r n 3 1 ~ ~ r n ~ ) .
r n 3 / ~ ~ r n 3due ) to
vaporisation and loss in the overheads. Total lossea due to leakage, vaporisation,
Concentrations o f TEG upto 99.1 % can be acheived without the use o f stripping gas. For higher purities gas w i l l be required.
if?
TOTAL
~EPJDPIEXPISUR
Revision : 0
Page No, :
DEHYDRATION
Date: 2/85
12.2
. .
.
Glycol foams in the presence of light hydrocarbons. This can be minimised b y goad prescrubbing and addition of anti-foam agents. Actual gas e x i t dew points are usually 10-15 ' f (5.5
feed
-8
'C) above the theoretical
equilibrum dew point. Take this into account when setting the specification.
The number of trays (or packing height) is usually small I 4 trays) an excess of either is always provided i n the design. Recommended efficiencies are 25 % l o r bubble caps 33 113 % for valve trays. Use 24" tray spacing*
F (204 , Regenerator temperatures should not be above 400 '

in order to prevent
#CC)at atmospheric pressure
glycol degredatjon. L i m i t heat flux to 5000 7000 BTUlhft2, aim tor
6000. Provide a t least ZOO0 BTUlgal pump capacity.
. . .
3 .
To prevent hydrocarbon condensation i n the glycol feed maintain

at 10-15
' F (5.5
- 8 ' C ) abave the gas exit.
the inlet temperature
Regenerator s t i l l column should run at but maximise water rejection.
220
' f (104 'C)a t top to prevent loss 01 glycol
Glycol clrculation rates should be between 2-4 gall/lb t i 2 0 removed (3 i s a good

number).
PRELIMINARY SIZING CALCULATLONS An exact sizing of a TEG unit will normally be performed by the vendor on request. The
CFP lnhwse program "GLYCOL" also exists Ior estimating vessel sizes, circulation rates
and utility consumptions. These arc based on data from the B5+0 design guide. The following hand method can be used however t o estimate the required size :
1. Determine water content 01 inlet gas t o contactor a! required temp and pressure Fig. 7 Ibs/MM5CF, k g / ~ ~ r n 3 .
2.
Calculate total water mass in feed gar to contactor
3. Repea: nlcuiation lor exit gas using required exit dew point (add 10 "F contingency). Calcula. dew point depression ' F , 'C.
b. Calculate amount of water to be removed in contactor. 5. Use 3 galls f E G / l b H Z 0 evaluate glycol circulation rate.
6 . Use Fig. 3 to determine required TEG concentration. %

Use Fig. 0 t o determine required stripping gaa rate
7. Use 2000 BTUlgall TEG circulated to determine rcboiler capacity.
188'
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Rewislon : 0
DEHYDRATION
pate:
Page No. :
2/85
12.3
8. Use Fig. 6 t o determine number of trays required in contactor

and Fig. 5 to determine contactor diameter.
9. Evaluate contactor height (set section I vessels) include integral KO pot in base of tower. Hence estimate weight of contactor.
A more detailed sizing method can be found in
CAMPBELL VOL 11.
4. METHANOL IN3ECTION (HYDRATE INHIBITION)
In order to prevent hydrate formation in gar transmission lines the product is normally dehydrated in s TEG or mole sieve unit as defined in previous sections. On some occasions however (wellhead to plant) this is not possible due to the location of the source. If the minimum pipeline temperature is below the hydrate point the inhibition of water i s required. This is acheived by infection of inhibitors to depress the hydrate and freezing points.
Common inhibitors are methanol, DEG, TEG. R ~ C Q V of C ~ inhibitors ~ a t the receiving plant ir normal, t h e liquid being then recycled. Econamics of methanol recovery are not favourable. Methanol i s adequate for any temperature. DEG not good below Limitations. Above 10 ' C better as lower vaporisation losses.
.
.
10 *C due to viscosity
Predict injection r a t e for hydrate depression as follows :
W =
d M 100 Ki+dM
W =
weight % inhibitor
= 'C hydrate depression M = Mol w t of Inhibitor

1297 for ,Me OH 2220 for DEC, TEG
Kt =
TO uw
v e equation
1. Predict hydrate formation temp at max. press in line TI 2 Estimate rnin flowing temperature in line T2 3. d r T I - T 2
The amount of inhibitor injected must be sufficient to depress the hydrate point as
calculated above and also provide !or vapour and liquid phase losses due to vaporiwrtion + dissolving. Adjust injection rate accordingly. For glycoI use 0.0035 r n 3 / ~ r n 3 (0.23 I ~ ~ M M S C Fvaporisation. ), For methanol use vapour pressure charts (CAMPBELL pp 159).
/ST
TOTAL
TEPtDPlEXP/SUR
Rtvision :
Pmgs No. :
DEHYDRATION
Date:
2/85
12.4
5 SOLID BED DEHYDRATION

Solid bed dehydration is used when lower residual water concentrations arc tcqulrcd than the over achieved by glycol units. This is generally around the providing the cost is competitive when cotnpared to NOTE5 :
- 40
' C mark or 1 ppm
residual water. Solid bed dehydration can be used l o r less stringent design requirements
TEG.
. .
LNG facilities always used molecular sieve dehydration t o acheive I pprn H20 or less.
Available dessicant medium :
k~HZ0/100 kg bed
Bauxite
Alumina
4-6
4 -7
cheapest
Gels
Molecular Sieve
7 -9
9-12
most expensive
.
,
Beds can be severely degredated
by heavy oils, arnines, glycols corrosion inhibitors,
salts and Ilquids. i t i s essential t o have a good feed filter or scrubber prior t o entering the dessicant bed.
Bed life i s usually 2-4 years depending on contamination.

Gas flow through the bed is generally downwards. Regeneration gas flows upwards.
This
ensures the water is stripped from the media without having to pass a l l the way t h r ~ l g h the bed. Figures 8 and 9 show a typical molecular sieve arrangement. Regeneration temperature is usually 175 " C media, too low results i n poor regeneration. Table I gives a summary
230 OC. Too high temp destroys the
o f operating and regeneration practices.
6. USEFUL REFERENCES AND LITERATURE

6.1. 6.2.
~AMPBELLVOLIICHAPTERS~~AND~S
HANDBOOK OF
N A T U R A L GAS ENGINEERING, KATZ, Chapter

"Fire tuning existing fleld installations"
16
6 . 3 .
6.4.
63.
6 . 6 .
PERRY
GAS DEHYDRATION
D. CRAMER
"Cutting glycol costs I"
"Cutting glycol costs 1 1 "
- World O i l - Jan 1981

+ C3
line
C. SIMMONS 0
Sept 2 1 1981 Sept 28 19111
"Correlation eases absorber-equilibrum dehy4ratian"W. DEHR 0 + 93NOV 7 1983
cales
for
TEG
natural
gas
1Yo
--
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR

DEHYDIUTION
Revirion : 0
Date
: 2/05
Fagr N o :
12,5
vrn
CCYT
avca
WIMT
no. g no- *tar b h i a h y l w m glyml ddtydrerian plant i C o m M omd l w r m r w .
.
LtWlD
C.IC1-
s r m u ~ ?a wm*cu IAD D r s w w w m r
MVMffiU Chlor14.
- urarrrm rxwwr
TABLE 1
DIYWUI*DU
nu,
lyhlvp l ~ l l
L L ~ L I P cU.111.
U#i c.pst1ty
kr
1.1
b . = . = . . . I . . I.*.
UI.~
1.-Y'C
bullltl.~ Iicb e l l , Cerrmd.m ~1rrrrsl~~lc.ll~ l a " I . . pll. I.p.I..II hlr*mn rdlU.'lsru 11.=1piI.Imm
t.pemair=
1 . lY 1 1 ..
Y ~-.rej.l
1 1 . 1 . .
k t b71rmlit14 l l m i l f
wht I=l.mm.L..
1 " .
1 . 1
<a~rm.l-.
-tw
.,...
10-xr p*.c.nr
MU
WC
Umt-r
t-v..
00-11 ?.rr*.r
3-10 l m r = * m *
Ol?col r4doc.e D.h~dt.t..
.I
SI
e*. . I S .lalr-*arol~.
Ciur.r
L o n - i m ~ cI11wL..
sarrl n . r mlrmel.
pu~%fi..
I . .1 .
a . ow.lln.
m n m r l.bllr.mim. r r himh rq.a.*.rlam chp.r*tur~. m e . 4 . 1 rmrra.1r 1 . prmblu. D . I pist d.pr.111m 1 . 1hLt.l a.1 1 . ~ . t h e lie t=b t h r l w 117~m1.
L 1 d z . d 1.r i r ~ r t i s a puxpom*m l
I..
rk..
r l t b rrhthrl...
I.
D i . l h , L .
Clw-1
Lubl. ..lIdih .rl

is c o 5 ~ 1 r . c d
wlrcm. IC.bI. L .p . m . .
ant-
mwr brr-.r* Can? w n u i i

I
d .UIlrrs .I u-1 e + . r * t w ta?-mtw-.
cq
Calr, e m # w u t r l h l m r i l h t r l m t b l n a t11101. n t . I a -1 r t r n t s a l n l r r r ir & l o t w o 4 m#.U?.

i in I . . . th.. t s i m * w ~ - s mimm~ namb i m i r v l *em& k . , . I d
b*. n m l U i I ~ im .m.emcr.s*4 1 1 m t h . Bnmbb I s V.UY* 01 o r i t u . EW1 . 1c q a t w r u l 0 p . r . t 1 . # i"~.t.*..... I I B h I ? hY11.rm.lc m a i l l r.ll.rmt.4 c- I t y r C"t
I.
.,...,
.I,b
li'h l m i 1 h 1 a w l w i b i t m so- r-mi., t-d*=, is ~ t u =a . -1 Itmhr L l l t a c ~ t b Ilqrli.. ~ bf ~ m l m m*IWL mu*= -ltll* b1 1 4 d d .
UI"th.
C.*q l.t 1 1 llmh i . r v1.c 1.~~10111
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXP/SUR
a
PROCE5S ENGINEERING DESIGN M A N U A l
Rtvision : 0
Plgb No :
DEHYDRATION
Date
: 2/85
12.0
f 10unt 0 I I A Y D O R I*CI(INC RrOUIRIO TOR
OLlCOt D E H I O M T O R S
-. ..
-.-
II~Y~.
7 ../.
rant
u n m err w m . *C ca.rm< or w m .m * r
s t u r - l -9.
I q4
TOTAL
~ E P ~ D P'{SLIR ~E
I
PROCESS ENGINEERING DESlON MANUAL
Revision :
Pngo t4a
DEHYDRATION
Date
maw
1
: 2/85
12.9
rmwr
1.r
h e 1 1 1 . 1
rm
Y
m m
n.p
mllrnm
mlo~vllt
m~*rlr..
, ~ M M
I
I
rrn~11~m
tu r w r * M r Sornmm-W r ~-WIII*LIC.*I. rmrlu(Wmmm
I,**,warn
i i IP
n.~.rm
n r m r n r.ll"lm~*
* * I
!w*n m n
rrmln o w
!u#lanl,
{*I
a , r n w < ~ j*m11*>1
rrmy ldmi
I
:
, kY Wl a . Irld r.mn wn vie

Y h""lhl
rsllmuhnu=b.r
d w l h * l * l W y h
I* M .
11111.11
I.,WY*
<I*
11 11 I
hkd.. r l h
n -u I" .*im m umw , , l m a .

*,whdId
n , ,.
" * c m
C(m,..llw-h
1111 r r m n n - a e q
Y l l , r * h C
I*ICL
)odn
I11G.m h k m IIC~ hmlt
JI
n
1
IU & h l evP
- r .lhrtn
~
~ ~1 1
~ U W I L I
C.hnl.P11.11
IM
8
" . U . "
/ a-tm >I m l l r m . 11.
'
,
I
hm Drrrhadam L CFIW LV ~l#lt(wlt lhPm*l

11*111
h l d r n n m *
wdlh
~nl l .ell,."
11111
'WCUID41
I
,
ulw ca.nvn*h I . 1tmr8 IJI hwq I* rlrhrtrlhallr 1Irn.IICmlm"L . (
I,1lblUI*lMl*
I . ., . " i . l m y
-. 13l
fnml
n(dl.m
ct
I0
hlb*
llm*
h l m I I C ~~ k k
Y I W W W-a ~
Lmwlm ilmln<18
I WIHVIII
't
!m l l b h t
1 ELM
.nh
I
I
n(tlN
*- > I 8 ;I*IttLI.
I
*a i r m , w IW*
HI1d nnrmm i m l l ,
ft4r)U
Basic Charmtteriattc~Of Kolecular Sieve*.
om*
SAI
IECICLEO QbI CObPIlEiSDI
F,Cdkc q
I C Y t Y N K OllO.lY
O? YOLCCULLfi l l l V l fiV10.p11m
/# r
TOTAL
TEPtDPtEXPISUR
RevisiMl:
PageNo.:
GAS SWEETENINC
Date :
2/85
12.10
1. APPLICABILITY
Generally natural gas, or associated gas contain acid components, mainly carbon dioxide
(C02) hyi
:en sulfide (COS), carbon disulflde (CS2) and mercaptans.
To obtaln a commercial product, gaseous or liquefied, the gas needs to bc treated t o eliminate these sour components for safety or process reasons. An other aspect of gas sweetening is linked with the development of the C02 injection to improve oil recovery. In this case C01 is extracted by a selective process. This section details different methods available for gas sweetening and lists their advantages and disadvantages. Guidelines are glven on which system to select lor specific services.
A detailed sizing method is beyond the sccpt of this section, but can be found in the
referenced literature is required.
2. UNIT
The specification of treated gas can be given in grains/lOO SCF for H2s or sulfur content
1 gralnllOO SCF r 16 ppm volume

3. GAS S WEETENINC PROCESSES
Various prwrcsscs a r e available :
3.1.
chemical absorption
phy slcal absorption cryogenic fractionation chemical conversion using catalyst the absorption process b the most utilised
solid bed adsorption
CHEMICAL ABSORPTION
In this type of process, the chemical solvent absorbes t h e acid components present in the feed gas by chemical reaction and releases them by heating at low pressure.
T.he main chemical solvents a r e :
f h t Alkanolamines
Aqueous ?6 normally
used cwt)
. . .
.
MEA (Monoethanolamine)
DEA ~Diethonolomlnc) DCA [R)(Diglycolamine), {FLUOR ECONAMlNE) MDEA (Methyldiethanolamine)

DlPA (Diisopropanolamlne), (AD]?)
15-20 20-35 up to 65 15-30 30-50

25-40
or alkaline salt solutions as potassium carbonate KzCOj
146
nevirion : 0
GAS SWEETENING
act*
!
TOTAL
TEPIOPIEKPISUR
page Ida. :
2/15
12.11
Alkanolamincs cannot be used undiluted because :
. lo
-c t o solid s t a t e a t ambient conditions
gtability et high temperature (heating is needed to extract the absorbed acid
gases) wlth generation of highly corrosive products by decomposition. Table 1 shows the advantages and disadvantages ol these p r o c t s ~ s .
3.1.1.
MEA PROCESS ( x e figure 1)

MEA solution was the first solvent used and is still widely used. Generally a
I5 % weight solutjon is utilized.

a) A d v a n t a ~ e s
high reactivity
low solvent cost

publicly available (no licendng fees)
- good chemical stability

b) Disadvantaftcs
- irreversible degradation into corrmlon products by sulfur components such as COS, C52 - trreversible degradation lor t h e salvent by oxygen (Direct contact with - high utility requirements - high vaporisation losses - need of reclaimcr t o purify the circulating solution - no selectivity far absorption between H z 5 C02 - foaming problem
and
C)
air must be avoided) ineffectiveness for removing mercaptans
Fields of utilization
- general use
: MEA can be utilized for gases conraining from 60 ppm to
I5 % volume acid gases without COS, CS2, mercaptans and with acid gas partial pressure up to 100 PSlA currently maximum capaclty for a MEA unit is around 250 ~ 1 0 SCFD. 6
3.1.2. DEA PROCESS
The second most wldely used gas treating process with a tcndancy t o replace the MEA process and some improved processes.
Flow diagram very similar t o MEA process without rcclaimer.
14 -7
TOTAL
- TIPIDPIEXPISUA -
Rrvlrion :
Page NO, :
GAS SWEETENING
Date : 2/15
12.12
a) Advanta~cs
no degradation by COS and CS2 (hydrolysed into C02/H25} a significant amount af the light metcaptans present on the feed gas is absorbed
a good chcmlcal stability a very low absorption of hydracarbons
no need for a reclaimer reduced vaporisatian losses
publicly availabIe
b) Disadranta~es
lower reactivity compared to MEA and thus higher circulation rates
lor the conventional system (Not applicable to SNEA-DEA process)

an irreversible degradation of the salvent by oxygen and HCN hlgher utilities rtquirelnents no selectivity l o r absorption between H2S and C02 foaming problems
C)
Fields of utiiization
The DEA process i s used t o treat gases containing H25, COZ and also
COS, CS2, RSH (up to a total acid gas content of 20 % volume)
Hz5 content of the treated gas lower than the normal specification
requirements 14 ppm volume) can be achcived. The CO2 content of the treated gas can be as low as to I00 ppm volume. Performance of the
process depends on the C02/bi~Sratio in the feed gas.
dl Improved DrDceSSeS
I . Split flow (see figure 2 )
For sour gases w i t h high acid gas content (above 25 % mole), DEA
flow rate can be reduced. Investment cost increases significantly (more equipment, complex columns, increased regenerator height).
2. SNEA
- DEA process.
SNEA company has developed a pracess using a hlgher concentration o f DEA (above 30 % wclght).
The process licensor claims to give In one step, for gases containing 0 to 35 % of Hz5 and 0 to 35 % of COz, a treated gas matching the most stringent H ~ spe~iiication s (4 pprn by volume).
1 q r
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISU~
Revision :
Page No. :
GAS SWEETENING
0ate :
2/~5
12.13
3.1.3.DIGLYCOLAMINE
(DCA) PROCE55 (FLUOR ECONAMINE)
The DGA process has a limited number of units compared w i t h MEA and
DEA.
Although in the public domajne, the process was developed by FLUOR and is
refered t o as the FLUOR ECONAMINE process advantages and disadvantages
to compare with MEA arc :
a) Advantages
low solutlon circulation rate due to the concentration (same absorption
capacity as MEA)
- very low pour point (-b0.F)

b) Disadvantages
low utilities consumption
- Plants in cold climate areas
- needs cooling of the solution during the absorption phase

high solubility hydrocarbons and aromatics are dissolved
high solvent cost.
c) Criteria of selection
Like MEA, DCA reacts both w i t h C02 and CS2 and a reclaimer is required. The process i s applicable to gases with acid gas content from 1.5 to 30 % volume and CO~/HZSratios between 300/1 and O.lf1 a t
operating pressures above 15 PSIC.
3.1.4. DIPA
PROCESS Cot-
This process has been developed by SHELL under the ADIP trademark name.
It is characterized by the selective absorption of H2 S in presence of
3.1.5. MDEA PROCESS

As with DIPA, MDEA is characterized by its selectivity for H2S i n presence
of C 0 2 .
MDEA processes arc proposed by process liccnaors :
SNEA (Dl UNlON CARBlDE : UCARSOL
lr Y
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUII
Reviston : 0
Paga No. :
GAS SWEETENING
-
Date:
2/81
12.1b
3.l.b.HOT POTASSIUM C A R B O N A T E PROCESS (see figure 31

A n activator specific t o each process licensor is added t o increase the
reactivity o f the ~ l l u t i o n
- BENFIELD (amin@m d other activators)

-
CATACARB (aminc and other activators) GIAMMARCO-VETROCOKE (arsenic and others activators)
The main characteristic of the process is that the absorber and the
regenerator operate a t the same temperature (1 101115'C)
a) Advantages
no degradation by COS and Cs2 which are hydrolysed goodthemical stability no reaction with alr
- no need for a reclaimer

low heat requirements (isothermal)
low hydrocrarbon absorption
selective C 0 2 absorption
(GIAMMARCO)
bJDisadvantages
licensing fees required low reactivity with M2S
- no mcrcaptan absorption
high water content of treated gas
c) Fields of utilization Applicable mainly on gas with high C02 content. Low H2S absorption
makes it difficult t o achieve specification o f 4 ppm voiume.
Generally a two stage process w l l l be used
3.1.7.
K2C03 for C02 removal
arnine l o r H2S removal
This dual system (amine
/ K2CO3)
can
be
in
some instances more
attractive cost wise than an amine process CONSTRUCTION MATERlALS
Carbon steel generally utilized in the chernical absorption units.

Regenerator can have a strainloss steel cladding and trays. Rtboller tubes can be stainless, but s t i l l subject t o corrosion. Monel is an alternative by costly, copper alloys shall bc avoided.
h
2 00
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Revis8on : 0
Page No,,
GAS SWEETENING
Date :
2/85
12.15
Generally solutions treating gas with high C02iH25 ratio will be rnorc corrosive. When the C02/H2S ratio is high, 3tainless steel w i l l be preferred far the following equipment : amlnelamine exchanger
tubes,
expansion
value
internals, regenerator trays and rtbailer tubes.

3.2.
PHYSICAL ABSORPTION
In
i
type o f process, the solvent extracts the acid components by simple physical
cofltc t and releases them by simple expansion at low pressure.
High pressure and low temperature favour the physical absorption. Table 2 l i s t s the advantages and disadvantages of physlcal solvents. These processes are applicable especially in the case of high acid gas partial pressure (above 5 bars also). Not suitable l o r sweetening at low or medium pressure (10 bars abs) gases containing large amount of heavy hydrocarbons. Can be considered for a selective absorption. The main processes a r t :
3.2.1.
WATER WASH
Can be used as primary treatment. For absorbers water wash can be achieved
by addition of trays
in the top section.
Because of Its low efficiency, water wash should be used mainly on gases with
a large amount of H2S. Corrosion problems for this process should be

considered carefully.
3.2.2.
SELEXOL PROCESS (see figure 4)
developed by
NORTON CHEMICAL PROCESS can
be applied to gases
with large acid gas content.
has been applied for sweetening of gases containing up t o 65 % of C02 and 9 % o f H2S a t pressure ranging from 25 t o 100 bars abs.
treated gas specification can reach 0,02 % C02 and 1 ppm W2S. When used to absorb selectively H2S or C02 it can also dehydrate. other sulfur compounds (COS, mercaptans) are also eliminated.
do 1
TOTAL
TEPIDPAXPISUII
Rrvisi~n : 0
Prge NO. :
GAS SWEETENING
Date : 2/83
12.16
3 . 2 3 FLUOR SOLVENT
- developed by FLUOR, propylene carbonate is used as t h e solvent

primarly intended for t h e removal of C 0 2 from gas containing up t o $0 % volume residual CO2 content arwnd 1 % volumc in treated gas.
C02 solubility is higher than t h a t obtained with MEA o r potassium
carbonate.
- c a n bc used
3 . 2 . 4
to treat gas containing Hz5 and C02. H2S content would
require a iinlshing t r e a t m e n t douwstrcam t o obtain 6 pprn of H25. COS and rnercaptans a l s o absorbed. requires an extensive use rotating equipment.
PURISOL PROCESS
- proposed by LURGI uses n-methyl-2-pyr-rolidone as solvent - ss t h e scrlubility of Hz5 is higher COZ can be c~nsidertda s a rclective
than
precess t o r e m o v e H2S even in case of low H2SICQ2 ratio.

3.2.5.
RECTISOL PROCESS
- developed by LURttl, uses a refrigerated solution of methanol as solvent.

High s e l c c t i v i t ~ lor C 0 2 , primarly used on synthesis gas o r on p r e c w l t d
gas (cooling by an external refrigerant c y c l e for example).
- major disadvantage of t h e process, when not integrated in a plant already

equipped with refrigeration cycles, needs refrigeration a n d methanol injection.
3 . 2 . 6 .
ESTASOLVAN
Developed by F. UHDE GMBH uses trl-n-butylphosphate as solvent. Selective process for H2S extraction. li C02 specifications on the t r e a t e d gas ate stringent, additional unit downstream will be required.
3.3.
PHYSIC0
3.3.1.
- CHEMICAL PROCESSES
SULFINOL this process has been developed by SHELL
- involver a physical solvent (rulfolant) and a chemically reactive agent [DIPA alkanolarnine) in aqueoLls solution.
Revision :
*
A
PrgeHo. :
GAS SWEETENING
TEP/DPiEXPISUR
. + &
------
------r*-rrrrr.....-.--
Date :
-..,.- -.
2/85
12.17 -.--.--
Sulfolane permits deep absorption of C 0 2 and H Z ~Arnir~e . facilitates the
extraction o f the acld gascs from solvent during repcncration performances for selective and non selective kt25 absorption depends on operating conditions process also permits extraction of mercaptans and other sulfur cornpounds
(C05). As tor physlcal absorption, absorption of heavy hydrocarbons
occurs (mainly aromatics). Does not d9hydratc the treated ias. Compared t o smine processes, SULFINOL shows a low foaming tendency
3.4.
SULFINOL solution freezes at about -2.C.
SOLID BED PROCESS
3 . 4
h4OLECULAR SIEVES
not widely used for gas sweetening can be used as a finishing treatment to remove rnercaptans absorption in molecular sieves is particularly well adapted for LPG as finishing treatment to obtain the sulfui content specifications of propane
and butane
good absorption capacity for Hz5 low for C 0 2 . They retrlove water preferentially
sieve l i f e is reduced for gases with high
3 . 3 . 2 .
C02 and Hz5 content
IRON SPONGE PROCESS
could be also classified as absorption process or as a conversion process

(Hz5 is converted to sulfur)
mainly applied t o gas with low H2S content discontinuous process, iron oxide has to be regenerated or replaced. Spontaneous combustion of the fouled product occurs w i t h air.
CRITERIA FOR SELECTION OF ABSORPTION PROCESSES
there is no multipurpose process for gas sweetening, each case
is specific and shall be
studied accordingly
final selection is done on the basis of ccor~ornicalcriteria from short l i s t of prwesses which seem appropriate to satisfy the treated gas specifications
--
c . 2
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
k
Revision :
Psge NO. :
GAS SWEETENING
Date:
2/89
lLll
chemical processes are characttrizcd by their ability to absorb acid gases w i t h a Low
influence of the gas pressure. They require a large heat quantity for regeneralion physical processes performances are more dependent on gas pressure. A t high pressure with high acid gas partial pressure, the absorption is better than l o r
chemical processes
4.1.
4.2.
selection criteria listed herebelow can be used for preselection of sweetening processes but shall not be considered as definitive.
C02 ABSORPTION (NO HtS 1N THE GAS) (we figure 5)
SIMULTANEOUS ABSORPTlON OF CO2 AND H2S (see flgure 6)
Q.3.
H2S ABSORPTION (NOC02 I N THE GAS) (see figure 7)
This is not e frequent situation with natural gases. 4.b.
Hi
ELECTIVE ABSORPTION (H25AND C02 IN THE GAS) (see figure 8 )
Physical solvents are particularly welt adapted in this case.

Among the chemical proccsscs, only MDEA and OlPA seem t o be adapted for this
service.
REFERENCES AND USEFUL LITERATURE

(1) Natural gas production transrnlssion and processing
F.W. COLE, D.L. KATZ, L.S. REID, C . H . HlNTON

(2)
Gas
conditioning
and processing [volume 5)
gas
and
liquid sweetening
by
R~BERT N. MADDOX edited by JOHN M. CAMPBELL.
40'1
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR

GAS SWEETENING
Revision : 0
Page NO
12.10
Data
. . 2/85
FIGURE 1
YE). P R O C E I I
?Lor
DILGRIY
TOTAL
T EPIDP16XPISVR
h
PROCESS ENGINEER~NG DESIGN MANUAL GAS SWEETENING
ntvllloll :
Pnye No :
Oat
TABLE
: 2/85
12.20
AOYANThGCS CNn W l A P V h H f A G t 5 OF AnwPP7KYI PUCS5Ef . . I CHEMICAL J O L Y L H ~
xIt#nl i . c m n e ~ tel i h r q w . r L n y p r t s r w e
~ r r n r v It ~ Lpnw!lw
m rh*
RiL
l o a m 6 9 when ihr $alutom t i ~ ~ l l ~ l ~ d l h ~ o r f f ~ r b o n l . . ~ s w " d e d 5011d11

Corr~mnm problems r e s v l t i n ~1r.m ~elulbon o.~allmbn l c m 1 1 ~ 1 wllh ,if) a irom mlvrlon ~lp*rhc.ain~hlrmng rtFtnrr*loen.
Pure
v t r y slicnt ~ b g o r p t i o n 01 h r w y hldroc~rbonb ~a,8blv w r ~ c n 80 l !he feed a l l

r l a r r -1 i h r I*W~%ICJ availnbb ir the mhblic o o m l m Irm trrcnMn# I t r r )
.lcmd # a r l t o l ~ = n r t~uilibri4 ~ . 1 n . IltlC~aIw.
..I+, tequmrrd to dilvlr !he mlv-nl

* . r e , c m l m l 01 l h r ~ r e a l t d 11s
.~.ll.blr
in the
Hilh
i
.
i l ~ 4 ~ 0 ~ cog1 b l 01 t mlrmls
H~.tin@ r m u r t d lor wlrefil 1101aEe.
TABLE 2
PHYSICAL
D V '
SDLVLNT~
@~SADVANTAGLI
tGEI
L o w e r u r l y tequtrrment? !or
n l l h imltbilily . s a d d 81s ~ r t i a l
prr~~url
te#emwariam
I
I
. Ler
r m r r r r m l e n t of thv
4bim~1ia.sI h r a w hlrdrcc.~lrbom lram the 1 e . d
!remt*d
8,s
8Ij
V o healin# required lor w l r e n t

,Iarqr
. Highcssr 01 lhe %ol-*nn
-Revision : 0 Page No
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPlSUR

GAS SWEETENING
Datr
: 2/85
12.21
.el0 *.I
mamum
ue"YYL.IoI
1011
nut"
IOI
. , u
IlllL".!
8 . ~ ~ OCI 1
.11*..1n
~ 1 0N 1I U V ~
IWI C I S
11EA"
I
-
M O T C A l l B O N L T PROCESS
FIGURE 3
RESIDUE G A S
COMPRESSOR
4 HEATER
4
n2$ 6
AIR
FUEL
aBS0RBER
'ICET G A S
STRIPPER
SOLYEWT VENT
M O L PROCESS FLOW FOR HlGW GOl AND MIOM HIE
PIR
COMPRESSOR
FIGURE 4
.-
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISLIR
PROCESS ENGINEEllNG DESIGN MANUAL

W\S SWEETENING
Revision : W
Dale
: 2/85
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
P
PROCESS ENGlNEERfNG DESIGN MANUAL

GAS SWEETENING
Revi*ion :
Psgc No
12.23
Dale
: 2/85
TOTAL
TEPiDPlEXPISUR
Revision : 0 REFRIGERATION
Date:
Page No. :
12.24
2/85
I . APPLICABILITY
For both fea5ibility and pre-project studies, the engineer will be required to select a process scheme k c . : choice between coid frac and refrigeration system) t o estimate the
power, utilities, weight af this package,
2 .
DESCRIPTION
The description is based on simple cycle. A refrigeration cycle is based on the exchange
between a hot source and
s cold source. The
cold source is a refrigerant, the air or rhe
water, the hot source is the gas to be refrigerated. (see figs 1, LA) Figure 1 shows such a cycle where :
tl
: : :
r
:
Is refrigerating stream temperature

is condensed refrigerating srream temperature is vapor pressure of the refrigerating stream a t t l
t2 P~ P2
Pd
td
is vapw pressure of the refrigerating stream at t2

compressor discharge pressure Compressor discharge temperature initial and final temperature of the hot source initial and final temperature of the coid source
:
:
:
Tl/T2
TRlITR2 :
On the figure I A , i t is easy to explain the cycle on a pressure enthalpy diagram
A 91
is the duty of the process to be refrigerated is the duty of the condenser
A Q2
A Q2
HP HP i s the power oi the compressor

+
Q1
3- MODIFICATIONS
- ECONOMISER
During the. discharge of the cryogenrc refrigerant, a mixed phase is generated (vapor and liquid). Only the liquid phase participates i n the coding duty. The vapor phase being compressed from low pressure t o the high pressure without participation a t the refrigerated duty.
I t is possible to remove a part of this vapor phase by addition o f an intermediate pressure
stage removing the vapor from the low pressure stage compressor which i s called
economiser (see figures 2 and 2A). An economiser is widely used in the industry.
a ia
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
.
Revision : 0
Page No. :
REFRICERAT [ON
Date:
2/85
12.2s
4.
SELECTION OF THE REFRIGERANT Depends on the required final temperature of the hat source and the disponlbility of the
country where the units are installed.

Tables 1 shows the performances of different refrigerants in various conditions.
it
is recommcndtd that the compressor suction pressure be maintained abovt atmospheric
pressure.
5. CHOICE OF DIFFERENT PARAMETERS
5.1.
REFRIGERATlNC STREAM TEMPERATIJRE t l AND COMPRESSOR SUCTION PRESSURE P2
tl
to be
3 t o 6*C lower than the final temperature of the hot source 12.
With the selected refrigerant and t l read on the MOLLIER diagram of the selected
refrigerant the vapor pressure.
1.2.
CONDENSED REFRIGERATING STREAM TEMPERATURE t 2 AND COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE PRESSURE Pd
In first, estimation take t2 t 2 to be checked later If it
:
TRl
(initial temperature af cold swrce) + I 5 or 2 0 ' ~ .

and the pinch
Is compatible with the cold source flowratc
of the condenser [pinch are shell and tube g 3 note 2) which should be 3'c minimum. With t2 determine PZ which is the vapor pressure of the refrigerant a t t2 (read MOLLIER diagram). Cornpressar discharge pressure = Pd
condenser.
: P2
P through the
5.3.
PRESSURE I N THE ECONOMISER
P ,
This pressure w i l l be finalized with the compressor manufacture but for an estimation
take
!
p ,
Pi
dI/
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXP~SUR
REFRICERATION
7-----r
Revision : 0
Page No. :
Oate :
2/g5
12.26
6 .
CALCULATION N T H ECONOMBER (a figure 2A) Step 1 Deterrnlne refrigerant circulation through the evaporator = rn2
W vapor at evaporator inlet
Hz
% liquid a t evaporator inlet
.
H3
'42
HZ
- '43
H5
'45
x 100
Step 2 Determine vapor refrigerant circulation rate through the economiser = mj

% vapor a t econo~niser inlet =
"I
x 100
H4
% liquid a t econorniser inlet =
H5
H4 H4
HI
H5
m1=
m2
% vapor at econorniser inlet % liquid a t econorniser inlet
m2
HI
HQ
H5 HI
Step 3 Dctermine refrigerant circutation through the condenser

rn=
ml
rn2
Step 4
Duty of condenser
rn
A Q ~=
Step
(Hd
HI)
>
Calculate the compressor discharge temperature and power (see compressor chapter).
Step 6 Check the pinch in the condenser and the cold source flowrate (if not
acceptable select a new 12 and Pd and repeat the ca1culation). Step 7 Size drums evaporator and condenser (see vessels and shell and tube exchanger chapter 5).
TOTAL
tPlDPlEXP/SUR
Revision :
Page No. :
REFRIGERATION
Date:
2/81
12.27
7. SELECTION OF MATERIAL
The material selection t o be made carefully. We recommend t o take the temperature corresponding a t the vapor pressure at the atmosphere pressure (1.e. : for propane it 1s recommended to select the law temperature killed carbon steel).
MULTISTAGE CYCLE
If we look at the enthalpic curves of the exchanger (precess refrigerant) with or withwt
economiser, it i s obvlous t o see that the area between the process stream and the refrigerant stream is proportional t o the compressor work (in a first approximation).
It is possible to reduce this a r t a by addition of several pressure levels between the discharge
and the
5'
'ion of the compressor. However, there is more equlp~nent (drums, exchangers,
regulation)
d the compressor
is more complicated.
The number o f pressure levels is an economical problem but the maximum i s 3 or 4

selections of these pressures: the pressure ratio between each pressure estimation.
Is for a
first
=ne
LUDWIG
n PI P2
= number of cornpresser
condenser pressure
suction
= first compressor suction pressure

9.1. 9.2.
Gas conditionning and processing volume 2 by Dr. John M. CAMPBELL
Applied process design l o r chemical and pctrxhemical plants volume 3 by Ernest
E .
9.3.
Chemical Engineers Handbook by Robert
H . PERRYICECIL M. CHILTON
21%
L
-__-..-.
TOTAL,
TEPlDPIEXPISUR

REFSICATION
Revision : 0
b g e No
Date
: 2/85
12.29
REFRIGERATION CYCLE WITH
ECONOMISER
FIGURE 2
EVAPORATOR
ACCUMULATOR
FIGURE 2A
Table
cOHPARISON O F COmON REFRICEWTS
Tap.
4.11
5.68 4.64
oC
Evamratw 0.655 0.513 0.271
6.15
1.41
3
P~CISUN
0.4%
2-65 4.00
5.03 6.62
I n hrs
2-02 2.97 3.56
h n l a Pmpyl*lc Proplna Freon12
0.38t5 0.198
0 D.YOI 0.614 0.363
5.986 1.11 0.868 0.491 -
0.716 1.13 1.2 0.641 -
0.958 1.79 1.41 0.827
1.26 2.21 1.1 1

1.63 2.69 2.16 ,
2.095 3.31 2.63 1.64
3.M
3.31 4-82 3.86 2.46
5.51
7.79 6.485 4.23
9.03 7.58 4.99
0.204
W c n r c d l i q u i d T a O c r r t u r t 35%; Condmser Proswe In B*rs i9mPnir 35.58; R o p y l w 14.61; Propme 12.20; Frwn 12 8.48
0.196
0.195 0.780 0.789 1.91 0.776 1.87
1.50
n
0.191 0.191 0.190
0.726
0
C)
kqn refrigerant p t t minute p a r tan of r efrlgcratian 0.913 0.958 2.28

2.80
krsnlr R . o p y l e ~ 0.939 RDWIIC 0.990 FreolLZ 2.35

0.206 0.889 0.925 2.2
O.871 0.898 2.16

2.41
0.202 0.848 0.875 2.11
0.200 0.199 0.830 0.812 0.853 0.830 2.05 2.00
0.197 0.798 0.807 1.96
0,767
0.193 0.192 0.153 0.139 0.756 0.739 1.81 1.79
0.721 6
0.112 0.7OB 1.73

0.648
0.699 0.694 1.10
0.W
1.03 1.00 1.01 1.05 0.835 0.830 0.800 0.W8 0.647 0.622 0.668
0.485 0.49 0.490
Z
0.768
0.716
n 2
m
m
Ammia Prapy3ent 5.M)

4 3.96
2.69
2-67 2 6 2.32 2.47
2.15 5
Brake hwsrpo*s* p t i tcn of refrigcrbtfon 4.47 4.3'1

4-98
2.09
Propane
3.87 4.33
1-80
1.54
1.98
Freon12
1.55
5.10
3.74 3.61 3;43 3.19 1.46 1.49
3.23 3.10 3.03 3.31
2.08 2.06 2.03 2.14
1.78 7 4 1.75 1.83
1.26 1.20 1.24 1.24
I *
m
3.33
1.51
3.27 3.72
3.22 2.95 2.89 3.23
LRmnl* 2.79 2.62 2.56 2.83 2.01 1.99 2.L3 1.75 1.73 1.4
0.483 0.623 0.619 1.12 1.09 1.11 1.16 0.753 0.791

0.483
0.360
0.362
9 '2
0.342
0.464 0.498 0.366 0.940 0.895 0.925 0.970
Xlloultr pcr tom of
Propylmt
'"
0.591 0.633
R Z
refrigeration
h w n e Freos12
3.73 3.72 4.25
2.41 2.3L 2.26 2.47
1.60
1.33 1.30 1.31 1.37
z !
Cmdcnaed Liquid T e m ~ r r t u r c52'~; Condenser Pressure *n U r s : L R o n i g 20.8B; R o p y l m a 21.64; Propane 17.92: F r m 12 12.68
0.219
Jamnia
0.204 0.207 0.894 0.903 0.213 0.980 1.01 2.33 0.211 0.210 0.203 0.957 0.234 0.912 0.980 0.953 0.925 2.15 2.27 2.21
0.205 0.857 0.857
0.BU
1.07
tgm refrigerant per alnute prr tan of
Pmpylme 1.21 Propane . 1.30

1.11
2.54
0.223 1.13 1.19
rcfrSgcntlon
5.68 5.96
4.96 4.38 4.71
Frean12
2.91
1.17 1.21 2.8
2.7
0.221 1.10 1.15 2.63
0.217 1.03 1.07 2.47 0,215 1.41 1-04
2.U
2.10
2.92
2.54
0,206 0.875 O.BB0 2.05

1.90
2.01
0.835 1.96
Amnia
5.85
4.60
4.78 6.25
3.23
1.16 1.31
Brrke hovscpol*r pr ton of rtfrlgerbtlm
5.32 5.18
5.46
3-18
3.20
2.79 2.81
1.63 1.78 1.77

1.81 4.11 4.06 4.18
1.25
2.78
1.89
0.952 L,10 1.03
..
3.13 3.66 3.59 3.61 2.03 2.07 0
Propylac 7.49 Propane 7.47 F r e m l 2 8.09

5.01 4.92
6.72 6.60 1.11
2.19 2.41 2.43 2.41
1-77
1.22 1.33 1.32
1.38 1.55 1.50 1.49 1.03 1.16
1.24 0.865
-1.02
0.110
~ i l w a t ~r t ton of r e f rtgcrrtta
0.977 0.821 0.933 0.788

2.08 2.1D 2.07 1.32
W n i a h p y l a n e 5.59 5-57 to pure Frcon12 6 .
5.30
4.24 1.45 4.S 4.66
3-70 3.97 3.86 7
3.27 3.50 3 . 3.57
2.84 3.09 3.03 3.12
2.48 2.73 2.68 2.74
2.18 2.41 2.37 2.39
1.63 1.80 1.81 1.80
1.42 1.51 1.54 1.54
1.12 1.11
0.925
0.761
.
0
..
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPlSUR

REFRIGERATION
Revision : O
P~pe Ma:
12.31
Dart
:2/85
Refriv*ranl Wvlblr
(kR1 mlprutionl
-22
r-113
F-111
Vapor C 1.013 lrrr
-1'~
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Revision :
Page No :
Omre
: 2/85
13.
UTILITIES
2 1q
TOTAL
TEP/DP/EXPl5UR
Revision : O
UTILITIES
Papt No. :
Date : 2/85
13.1
1. APPLlCABlLITY
For both feasibility and pre-praject studies the engineer will be required to make an estimate of utility requirements both in consumptions and equiptnent required.
This section details e few gutdelints and notes on the following utilities :
WATER TREATMENT UTlLlTY AND INSTRUMENT AIR INERT GAS GENERATOR5

WATER SYSTEMS
FUELS
2. WATER TREATMENT
T h e following details the common used effluent water treatment equipment given in order
of
effluent quality :
API gravity settler
.
,
Usually the first line of d e a n up. Simply a settling tank with a top skimmer to remove
any floating oil or debris and a bottom skimmer to remove sludge.
Effluent quality around 150 microns globules and 150 ppm oil.
Large bulky items, cannot be used offshore, Either circular or rectangular in design.
. . . .
.
Simple, cheap very common in onshore use.
Tilted Plate Separator (TPS), Corrugated Plate Interceptor (CPJ) Widely used both offshore and onshore. Uses plate packs, usually at 45* mounted in a tank and relies on gravity settling between ail + water within the spaces between the plates. [flu
quality dawn to 60 micron oil globules and >0-200 ppm.
. .
Can have problems with high solids content
it upstream settling tank i s not installed.
TPS units are usually used as the first treatment stage offshore.
Flotation units
Uses induced or dissolved air flotation t o remove any residual solids/oil in the cjlluent.
Works in reverse to a gravity settler (small air bubbles trap debris and float to top of tank).
22
>
-,
TOTAL
TEPtDPlEXPl5UR
Revision : 0
Page NO.:
UTILITIES
Date : 2/85
13.2
Effluent quality better than 40 ppm. Vendors usually guarantee
< 30 pprn.
Can be used both offshore and onshore. Usually instalIcd downs~reamof a T PS unit or
API separator.
Filtration (Use for Water injection systems only)
.
. . .
~ i l t r a t i o nunits either uses media beds [sand, anthracite, garnet, walnut shells) to achieve water quality or filters (fibre sccks, mesh, stainless steel cage).
IJrwlly not required for effluent water treatment unless very ldw residual solids
content eniorced by lacal effluent standards.
More commonly used for water re-injection where high quality, low solids level is
required. Can achieve 1-2 ppm in certaln beds, 10-15 ppm is more common. Units arc generally cornpacl but heavy due to media bed weight.
Good pre-filtration is required to prevent fouling up of main bed units.
Effluent standards
Listed below are maximum residual oil content in effluent water for dumping t o sea :
NORTH SEA
40 PPm
30 pprn
20 PPm
INDONESIA t MIDDLE EAST CHINA

LOCAL ESTUARY (river)
5 pprn (European standard)
Process drains, produced water, deck (site) drains [see figure 1)
Produced watcr may need degassing before treatment. If the amount of dissolved gas is small it may be possible to handle it i n the TPS unit.
Deck
or
site drains normally iluw to a separate sump tank before Qe-oiling. If the deck
drainage i s small or produced watcr itow is small, both streams can be combined
through one TPS unit.
Process d r a l n ~ are normally manually initiated and pass directly to the return oil slop tank. These drains are generally watcr free. Always try
3
use gravity iced between units. Pumping can cause e m u l s i o ~ and make
oil-water stparatian harder. Similarly avoid fast flowing lines and turbulent pipe arrangements.
22
TOTP I
TEPIDQIEXPISU.
Revision : 0
Page NO. :
UT1LITIE.S
Date:
2 h 5
13.3
3- UTILITY AND INSTRUMENT AIR (see ligutc 2)

C O m p r e ~ f e dair is used on plants lor instrument control, turbine a n d engine strtt-up sod utility services t g : pneumatic tools, cleaning, etc.
:
For turbinelcngine start-up 17 -25 bar supply will be required.
. .
.
For general instrument and utility air, compressor discharge around 9 bar is adequate. Consumption :use 0.6 scfrn 0.017 rn3lrni1-1)for each air pilot (- valve) 0.8 s c f m (0.022 m3/min) lor valve pasitioner (instrument air) generally 1 m31h per valve unit will do as first estimate.
Add 25% to comprcswr capacity for design.
Utility a i r : consumption is intermittent and difficult t o estimate a t early project stages.

Add 75-100 t c f m (130-170 m3/hJ t o compressor capacity for initial estimate.
.
.
All plants should have 100% instrument air standby capacity. Utility and instrument air c a n be supplied from same compreswr or separate ones depending on capacity requirement. Instrument air must be dried befare use. Dew point of air b dependant on minimum air t e m p e r a t u r e in location of unit. Generally dcssicant bed driers arc used giving dew points
as low as -60C.
Size air r t c c i v e r s t o give 10-15 minutes of instrument air assuming t h e compressor goes down. Pressure in the instrument air receiver should not f a l l below SO psig (I.>bar g) during this period.
For long air transmission headers in cold climates intermediate KO p u t s may be required.
An e s t i m a t e of compressor and dryer weights and power a r e given in figure 3.
.
.
4. lNERT GAS GENERATORS (N2,CO2)

Inert gas i s required in all plants for purging and incrting of equipment. For small requirements Nz bottles c a n be used in racks. This hawever i s not feasible for large units and so gas generators must be supplied. The main types a1 generator in use are :
- cryngeni,~distillalion of air - oxygen absorbtian on sieve
gas combustion
For nlrrging purposes estimate capacity based on 3 times the volume of the largest vcsscl
to
bt
lrgtd in one hour.
22 :
TOTAL
TEPlOPlEXPlSUR
Revision : 0
Page NO. :
UTltlTlES
Date: 2/85
13.4
. .
.
Cryogenic
"stillation i s used only for large volume requjrtments, $pecifically LNG ed offshore.
plants. Not
Gas combustion produces a N2, C 0 2 mixture for inerting and purging purposes. Not used
much these days except for onshore large volumes.

Pressure swing absorbtion is the must common used method for
N2 generation. Skid
mounted units are sometimes supplied with dedicated air compressor, or can use existing plant air compressor for supply. Air consumption is 4-5 times inert gas production rate, residual 0 2 i n gas is 1-2%-3%.
. .
. .
Details and weights o f common units are given i n figures 4 and 5.
5. WATER SYSTEMS
Seawater
Used for coaling purposes both onshore and offshore. sanitation water and feed to potable water units.
Can also be used as wash water,
Seawater is also used for fire water systems but is usually a separate system. The seawater cooling circuit is normally connected to the fire water ring lor emergency supply only.
Always coarse filter the seawater before circulating to the plant. This removes any
debris or rnatine life.
.
.
Treat with chlorine at I - 2 ppm concentration water exit a t 0.3-0.5 ppm.
- maintain a residual CL- level i n the
S e a w t e r exit temperatures t o outfall canals or drain caissons shouId not be above 4 0 ' C
to prevent corrosion.
.
.
Once thrwgh water systems are preferred for small, cooling duties with only 3-4 exchangers. For large duties and number of units where the cost of corrosion proofing i s prohibitive conslder using a closed loop cooling medium system. Cornmon used i s
- 25% TEG
in water.
For cooling medium/~awater exchangers consider using titanium or similar plate exchangers. These are especially ideal offshore due l o reduced weight and space requirements.
a2 6
TOTAL
TEPtOPIIXPISUR
Revirion: 0
Plgc No. :
UTILITIES Date: 2/85

13.5
Potable water
.
,
Depending on location of plant potable water can be made i n sttu or supplied by tanker lor storage, or taken ditccily from a mains supply. For onshore plants most common method o f water supply is evaporative distillation. Problem with these units is size and weight are high and residual
T D5
(Total Oissolved
Solids) is 5-10 pprn. This results 1 s a bland distilled water which is not pleasant t o drink.
Increasingly popular now arc Reverse Osmosis units (R01 which art lighter and need less maintenance than cvaporativt units. Water quality i s 400->OD TD5 (World Health Organization TDS for drinking water i s 500-1000) operating costs o f RO unit5 i s
1.5 times that o f evaporative distillation.
Power consumptions : for a 100 gph (0.38 m3ihl unit. Evaporative Distillation unit Reverse Osmosis Vapor Compression unit
IEO) 3.5 kW (XO) I kW

(VC)t5
kW
.
. .
Most common unit ofishorc a t present is the VC unit which i s very reliable and easy t o
operate. Unit operates a t 100.C and is more susceptible t o corrosion.
RO units are relatively new, operate at ambient temperature and has lew mechanical parts lor servicing. Average membrane life is 3 years.
Consumption : estimate on 50-60 gallons per day per man ( 0 . 2 m3)
Storage
: allow 10-15 days for oiishorc units
I0 days for onshore remote artas
.
. .
Potable water can be dosed with hypochlorite a t 0.4-0.5
ppm to inhibit bacterial growth.
U1astt water and sewage Before discharging to rivet, sea, or underground sewage + waste water must be treated t o meet local health regulations prevalent in the area. Limlts are imposed on BOD (Biological Oxygen Demand), COD (Chemical Oxygen Dcrnl-d), coliiorm bacteria count and 75s. Examp Limits are r bacteria
< < >
200 per 100 ml

150ppm
T DS
BOD
100 mgll
0.5 mg/l
C L ' residual
<
1 O , mg/l
22 3
TOTAL
TEPlDPlLXP/SlJII
Revision : 0
Page NO. :
UTILITIES
D a t t : 2/85
1 3 . 6
.
.
Sewage is treated by physical attrition, airation and chlorine dosing to 30-41 ppm raw sewage. Provide 15-20 hr retention time for enzymic action to reduce 3 0 0 . Allow 30-50 gall/day per person (0.15 m3) for sev;age, shower, laundry and kitchen wastes. Use upper limit for hot unsociable climates.
6. FUELS
Diesel . Used
for emergency generators, pump motors and air compressors, cranes, and alternative fuel lor turbines, For emergency equipment pravide individual day tanks sized on providing fuel for 2@hr operation.
. .
Main diesel tank [for fecd to day tanks) should hold 10-12 days supply. This is dependant
an location of plant and normal supply periods.
.
.
Diesel should be filtered t o
* 5 Microns.
Can be centrifuged to remove residual water
and smaller particles. This is especially recommended offshore where longer storage times, supply boat debris, seawater contact and poor supply quality can lead t o operation problems. For storage use atmospheric venting tanks with vacuum-PSV pedestrals, platform legs or inter-deck space for o f lshort storage. vent. Use crane
Gas -
Fuel gas is supplied as normal fuel to generators, turbines and any gas driven motors.
.
+
Always pass FG through a scrubber before use. Filter gas supply to turbines 10 10 microns (generally turbine manulacturcr will s t a t e quality required and may InClude his own filters)
- do not rely on this and provide separate treatment anyway.
Maintain FG temperature at least 15'C above dew point. Minimum temperature of gas
to be 5'C.
Common supply pressures a r t 15-20 bar fsome jet engines need 35 bar).
Size fuel g a suppiy on maximum design duty of all users operating. Allow + 10% margin.
FC used for flare purge and pilots, ctc., does not need t o be filtered to 10 microns
gas strai, ' off scrubber overheads.
- use
&k if
Ldyoul plan
I a i mn*rrsur PAhcdr
3 num,r
4 Adwbrr
5 Pmduo buLv wsul
6
sblrrrt
TOTAL
TEPIDPAXPISUR
R#rlrion :
P q e No :
Dote
: 2/85
22
---
TOTAL
TEPIDPRXPISUR
Revision :
COMPUTER PROGRAMS
Date :
Peg@ NO. :
14.1
2/g5
. AMINES : Sizing of gas sweetening unit.

FUNCTION
This program provides capability for the calculstion of gas sweetening p r c c e s r s using s single aminc (MEA at DEA). It also determines the main equipment characteristics of the unit for preliminary studies.
OUTPUTS
Contactor bottom temperature Amine Howrate Exchanger amine/amine area Contactor diameter (3.5. CONNORS formula) and number of trays Stripper reflux drum : height and diameter Reflux ~ w f f p :power Amine pump :power
RANGE OF APPLlCATlON
The temperature of the rich arnine entering into the stripper is 190 f.
The bottom temperature of the stripper is 240 F.

The default pressure of the reflux drum is 20 psia. Steam saturated temperature i s supposed t o be 250 F.
2. BRILL 1 and I1 : Pressure drop profile in gas and liquid pipes FUNCTION
BRILL 1
The program predicts pressure gradients and liquid holdup occuring during the simultanews
flow of gas and liquid i n pipes;

BRILL I1
This program is specially assigned t o calculate the transpdrt capacity in the case of a
mixture of t w o gases.
RANGE OF APPLICATION
These programs were written for the
FRIGG pipetine.
However, the)' can be used for other
lines, sptciaHy far gas w i t h condensate.
REMARKS The line can be level or not.
The r i s e r s are calculated. BRILL 1 takes into account the line temperature profile.
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Revision : 0
Page No. :
COMPUTER PROCRAMS
Date : 2/85
14.2
3. FLASH : Equilibrium ~ a l ~ u l a t i a r .
PROCESSING The program is based around the
Peng Robinson equation
of state and the API (modified
Lee-Kessler) corr+sponding states method for thermal properties.
REMARK
This program is not as robust as large commercially available batch simulators such as
PROCESS, but it is very quick, cheap and easy to use.
L%nswers are instantaneous.
The program is self documented.
1-
C O M W L Y : Multi-stage compression unit
FUNCTION
This program simulates a multi-stage polytropic compression unit.
PROCESSING
CPSA method.
RANGE OR APPLICATION
The transformation i s assumed to be polytropic,
The number of stages is fired Qr calculated (for a compression rate). It is possible t o input
non-standard components. The KATZ table glving Z (Pr, Tr) is included in the program.
GLYCOL :Sizing of gar dehydrating unit
FUNCTlON
This program simulates a gas dehydrating unit using tri-ethylene glycol. PROCESSING
The gas is countercurrent dehydrated in the absorber using a triethylene glycol solution which is then regenerated by stripping in a packed column.
Gas input pressure into the absorber must be between 200 and 2000 PSIA.
Gas input temperature into the absorber must be between 40 and 160 F .
Gas dewpoint temperature must be >
- OD F.
TOTAL
TEP!DPIEXP/SUR
Revision : 0
COMPUTER PROGRAMS
Page No. :
Date : 2/85
14.9
6. GULF : Sizing of petroleum ptatlorms
FClNCTlON
Estimates and simulates pttroleum platforms. For preliminary studies, it calculates :
.
.
size and weight of equipment5 [ p r ~ e s utilities, s drilling quarters)
size and weight of structure and substructure

cost of the construction
PROCESSlNG
The equation of state used is a modified version of SOAVE REDLICH KWOWG.

REMARK
Oil flowrate can vary trom 3000 to 300 000 BOPD. The program i s specially adapted for compact platforms [drilling, quarters, production) but can also be used for production platform only. The accu
y
of the weight and cost estimations is respectively about + 15 % and + 20 %.
7. HANLEY : Density, thermal conductivity and viscosity calculations
FUNCTION This program uses the HANLEY equation t o calculate density, thermal conductivity and viscosity of hydrocarbons and hydracarbon mixtures.
INPUTS
The program w i l l handle a 20 component mixture. Library data is available for C 1 thru' Cl7'
Nitrogen, Carbon Dioxide, Hydrogen Sulphide and Water. Pseudo components can be dcflned
in the input file r if they are used, thermal conductivity will not be calculated.
A datafile i s required. For each pseudo component, the following properties are needed.
.
. .
critical pressure, atm critical volurnt, ~ r n 3 / ~ - r n o l e critical temperature, Kelvin
Acentric factor Molecular weight Normal Boiling Point, Kelvin.
This empirical equation is believed t o be the best correlation currently available for
estimating liquid and vapour densities a t pressures above LOO aim. Vapour densities calculated using this method a r t believed to accurate up t o 680 atm.
The viscosity correlation is very accurate !or the vapwr phase, but not as reliable for
liquids. The best available method is probably the Chung-Lee-Starting equation, with an average deviation 01 24 %.
The thermal conductivity correlation is included for completeness, but i t s accuracy has not
been assessed.
2 p s
TOTAL
Tf PlOPlEXPlSUR
Revisron : 0
Page NO. :
COMPUTER PROGRAMS
0ate :
physical properties calculations
2/85
14.4
8 . L l B P R 0 0 :Fluid
GENERAL
The LIBPROD iibrary encloses
FORTRAN subroutines for calculating various properties.
FUNCTION Subrwtine ASTM

:
stock tank oil viscosity at a certain temperature by the ASTM
correlation. Subroutine CALBO : Subroutine CALFRI : Subroutine CALSIG : Subroutine CHEW : Subroutine LEE : Subrwtine RSOUPB: Subroutine ZED : Oil Formation Volume Factor by the STANDING correlation. Friction Factor by the MOODY diagram Gas-oil surface tension by the BAKER and SWERDLOFF correlation 0 1 viscosity by the CHEW and CONNALY correlation
Gas viscosity by the
LEE-ET-AL correlation
Solution Gas Oil ratio by the STANDINC A N D LASATER correlation Gas compressibility factor by the STANDING and KATZ correlation
9. MASBAL :Creation of mass a n energy balances resulting from PROCESS program. FUNCTION The "MASBAL" program generates mass and energy balance tables, in conjunction with the
SSI program, according t o the user's specifications. The program uses %he output of SSI program and generates mass and energy balance tables which can readily go into a report.
PROCESSING The tables can be generated either in Metric or in English dimensional units system as i t
may be the case in the 551 program. The clasaificatlon of components defined in the 551 program can be reduced for mass and energy balance tables (components up to C20 for SSI program can be classified up to C[o+ in mass balanccl. Printout of cnthalpy is optional.
The stream composition can be expressed in the four different ways : rnolal flow rate, molal percentage, mass flow rate, mass percentage. Each table contains 8 streams maximum.
P 3d
>
..
Revision : 0
COMPUTER PROGRAMS
Dale:
Page NO. :
TOTAL
TEPIOPfEXPfSU4
2f>
14.5
LO. MONOAGA : Pressure drop profile in dry gas pipes FUNCTION Calculation of pressure lossscs for steady flow in dry gas pipes. PROCESSING
MONOAGA uses the A G A method which i s based on the general equation for compressible
fluid in pipes, whatever their profile may be.
OUTPUTS
Any af the lollowing five variables can be calculattd :
.
.
flowrate length inlet pressure
outlet pressure inside diameter
This program can also be used to predict the behaviour of gas with very low condensate contents (less than 50 crn3/~rn)). The profile of the ground can be f l a t or otherwise.
The tern--raturt profile can be fixed.
1l.F'EPITE : Pressure drop and temperature profiles in gas and liquid pipes
FUNCTION
This program calculates the profile of pressure, temperature and hold-up liquid along pipes carrying single or two-phase fluids.
PROCESSING
This program user the most efficient correlations which exist at the present time for single
or two-phase flow, whether the ground be flat or otherwise.
Pressure losses for two-phase flow are based on the research work carried out in BOUSSENS. The calculations methods used are commented in the note "Two-phase flow in pipelines" written by Mr LAGIERE, and included in the 1982 Surface Seminar.
OUTPUTS
The program can determine, at any point of a pipeline, the pressure, the temperature, the flow pattern, the liquid content and the other hydrodynamic characteristics.
..
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUII
Revision:
COMPUTER PROGRAMS
Date : 2/85
Page NO. :
14.6
R A N G E OF APPLICATION
The many tests run under various conditions show that PEPITE is definitely better than
other models. The good results arc obtained by PEPlTE 80 t o 90 % of the time, whereas traditional models only provide acccptablc results 50 % of the time.
The least effective results obtained by PEPITE are those for steep uphill slopes. This drawback is on the point oi being solved. On a whole, the accuracy of the calculations i s in lint with that of the accuracy of the measurements themselves.
REMARKS In addition to pressure and temperature calculations the PEPITE program will define the
flow pattern. The user can do ten dif ierent calculations with a single run.
The results can be either summarized or detailed, on request. Either starting on finishing conditions can be given as inputs lor the PEPlTE program.
12. PETREL :Pressure drop profile in gas and liquid pipes FUNCTION Calculation of the pressure losses and liquid content of the pipes, for condensate gar, oil and gas, oil gas and water flows in horizontal, slight slope pipes.
INPUTS Temperature profile o r average temperature. Physical properties af the fluid. Line profile. Some physical opertles can be predicted with correlations included in the program.
PROCES51NG
The PETREL program offers several caiculations methods corresponding to different fields of application. Methods available in PETREL include : DUKLER, HUGHhlARK, EATON, BONNECAZE and FLANIGAN.
OUTPUTS Anyone of the following parameters can be calculated : inlet pressure line length outlet pressure
. .
RANGE OF APPLlCATION
This program does not calculate risers. The calculation of liquid contents is doubtful in the case of condensates gases.
a3' t
TOTAL
TEPlOPlEXPlSUR
Revision : 0
page NO. :
COMPUTER PROGRAMS
0ate:
2/85
14.7
13. RESEAU : Combination of PROCESS and PEPITE programs GENERAL
This program i s the combination of the PEPITE and PROCESS programs.
FUNCTION
This program calculates pressure drop and temperature profiles using the results of the proctss program. PROCESSING Fluid physical properties needed in the PEPITE program are interpolated into tables generated by
INPUTS
PROCESS program.
Input data is composed with : Process input data Unit called " U S 14" (name, inlet and outlet stream numbers) Options of the calculation Pipeline ~haracteristics RANGE OF APPLICATION Pressure must be included between 1 and 7 250 PSIA Temperature must be included between - 200 and + 200 ' C Only tv-nty "US 14" r a n be calculated per run.
The PRC
'SS options r OUTDIMENSION, SCALE and SEQUENCE cannot be used.
The PROCcSS option "CALCULATION TRANSPORT

lib. THERM :Pressure drop in liquid piper
= 2" is compulsory.
FUNCf ION
The TERM program computes heat and pressure loss calculations in liquid pipelines f o r
Newtonian or non-Newtonian flow.
It can
alsa predict the restarting pressure after a shut d ~ w n .
I t also allows pump calibration.
TOTAL
TEPIDP!XPISUR
Revision:
Page No. :
COMPUTER PROGRAMS
Date:
2/65
14.8
INPUTS
Physical properties of liquid :
. . . . .
, viscosity versus temperature (for Newtonian flow)

viscosity versus temperature a t dltferent shear rates (for non-Newtonian flow) ylcld strength versus temperature
density versus temperature
specific heat versus temperature thermal conductivity versus temperature. Some of the above properties can be predicted, but it is preferable to obtain viscosity and yield strength of liquid from laboratory measurements.
OUTPUTS
. . .
Three artput formats may be selected by the user "finite clement length" "percent length increment"
"preselected finite element length"
In the third case, the program also computes the restart pressure as a function a1 time
after shut down.
15. UPFLARE :Flare calculations
FUNCTION
Radiation level calculations for an oriented pipeflare or INPUTS
Boom and tip characteristics.
a Coanda flare tip.
Gas characteristics (flowrate, gross heating value) Climatic conditions (wind, sun) Calcvlatim
ions
PROCESSING
The calculatjon methods a r e API RP 521 or KALDAIR.
OUTPUTS
Flame profile
Radiation levels a t given points or isopleihs {lines ol constant flux).
REMARKS
The method used [API RP 521) has been extended to three dimensions and any flare tip orientation.
a ro
C
-.
.-
TQTAL
"..
TEPIDP/EXP/SUR
PROCESS ENGINEERING QESIGN MANUAL
Rarision :
Pbg?
Ma :
D m t r
: 2/83
Z YI
TOTAL
T EP!DPlfXPlsi!R
Revision :
0 2/85
Page No. :
DATA SECTION
Date:
-
15.1
PAGE
2 3-9
General data Converslon tables
I0
11-14
15 16
PSEUDO CRITICAL5 AND OIL PROPERTIES
Figs. 1-3
9
5
17 18
19
6
7 8
Phy slcal properties of hydrocarbons Camprtssibility factors of natural gas Pseudo critical pressure VS. MW Critical constants for gases and fluids Critical temperature VS. normal boiling point Characterised boiling points d petroleum Fractions Molecular mass, BP, and.denslties of fractions DENSITY -density of petrolturn fractions VS T Relative density of petroleum fractions VS MABP
20 Z1
22 23
24
10
11 12
13
25 26
27 28
29
VlSCOSITY Viscosities of hydrocarbon gases Visc~ities of hydrocarbon liquids ASTM viscosity chart
VAPOUR PRESSURES
14 15 16 17
18
Low temperature vapour pressures High temperature vapour pressures True vapour pressures of petroleum products and oil Hydrate formation pressures SPECIFIC HEATS Specific heats o f hydrbcarbon vapours at 1 AT M Heat capacity correction factors Specific heat capacity ratios a t IA T M Specific heat capacity of hydrocarbon liquids THERMAL CONDUCTlVlTY Thermal conductivtty o f natural gases Thermal conductivity ratio for gases Thermal conductivity of hydrxarbon liquids LATENT HEATS OF VAPORISATION Latent heats af various liquids Latent heats o f hydrocarbons Heat of combusion o f liquld petroleum fractions
30 31 32 33
19 20 21
22
3 C r
35
23 24
36 37 38
25
26 27
39
40 4I 42
28 29
k3
44 45
16
30
31
32
33
31 35 36
47
48
SURFACE TENSIONS - MlSCELLANEOU5 Surface tensions o f hydrocarbons Dew points of natural gases Solubility of natural gas in water and brine Sobbility of methane in water Solubility of natural gas in water Solubility of water in hydrocarbons Temperature drops for expanding gas Temperature drops for expanding gas Physical properties of gas treating chemicals Physical properties of water Physical properties of air
2 93
7
TOTAL
.
TEPIDPIEXP/SUR
~ R O C ENGINEERING E ~ DESIGN MANUAL
Ravision :
P&grNo :
GENERAL DATA ~ ~ l ~ it,. . ,
~srm
R in TV
:~ / B S
15
-2
i.'*h.
R
-**(
& ,,*
*,Ck~**,,,~~.n.~o.C.J
, J.; ~o~.~~~'*."'*~rdrtonbionl
n1 1
r.*e~*a.d
1'L*M.+M
.muJ r
k=*!*L.*d
d .
" 4 L -*I LnJ
T.~,..~.,. r,.~..
I
.m
J r* d n*
a
I
m a *a
.1 .L*. -
Y-lrm*
C*.
cm'
L . 0
m o ma 057 m
1 1.a37
b2
1.rnp~lur.
R
Irn.rm1
rol
n*
. m l w i m
I
1
w*
h*.m LW.h
DW
I.*%* 1.1111
u 4
I L
T
C.. b.1.m'
i 1 4
l i t . ,
L 1 . r
" , I
OM1 1 5 . 0.01.18.
C d b r*
w
.a
\.HI1
OOD54lW tlR.3
#')I.'
O . w 2110
1
-1
h a ha
bn*
b-d
bur
b
.I* bnJ
M 1
-I .D . I
nrnp
blka
hb
h' hJ
-1
4 1
zrnl~
53a.n
OOOlllAL 0.1301a
b. I Ib ad
. I
L d
lo.?=
.
V L . .
L ,O ,l.
**
I , . ,
Llh'
K
I
own m- M e i ? r n
b*
*I*.
15i3.3 1.3144
k l
V P1.1113 I I?
i d
A h
Y,
I
* . I .
ems l a 5
6. ,d.cb,
" g .* , ; . m l
6''d.'
.I
~.~6...11. lo8 .."pl..
I
lb
l * llnl
brwr Bmuml or A.P.1. T h . rrl.bmn Gmtiry erprrrd by the 1 0 i b d n r formuln: F~~ (i+d. lighter than w o w
~ ) r ~ Bmumb ~ t m =
lo
Specific
m w wuIYM Ir u .
1O . $ I
bra
> , * . . I ~1'
-g - 130
140
0-c
13.~.C
D*.-
n'
I
G 1 130 + D e ~ r t a Erumk
Dcrrec. h . P . 1 . '
l4lJ - 131.5. 7
141.5
r4 -1.
0.c
('D.,
15.I.C
11.111 11.b)L
., .
131.5
+ Devc~S A.P.I.
*C
liquids heavier l h ~ Mkr: n
~ Bnnmb ~ s~ 115 ~ 7I G
145
-F L 915 (me) + 32
~~-c+n3.1$-5/9R
5/9
PF
321
145
= *F+ 468.61 - 1.8 K

145
~egress Bwmb
51 prrfi.rr id Mvl~lptialla f1ct.n:

Pr.(br
1
I @ HH
G v.Lum,
S ~ i h GrnvitY c a, @- ~.h~.nheilto ol*rahr .I B[r F*hrenh*it.
.t th. w e i l h l 01 given
h e weight
by m i ~ i w o i 1 8 0(if. f
S ~ b d T
,,,,lmi,,.t~.r~lg
.T.VI~Y
lo'
i~
nrP ti10
1cJ
18 10'
{ermt grrvitin:
Dt
md, + ndg ,+n
lo-'
10-1
0-1
ta * drd
e
pnLi
ot m i x l u r ~ dl d*n'!ty = velum. p r ~ p o n of ~~ oil n dion o i l of dz d e n ~ l t r s Volume pmPq & = #+ficGr.vlt~ or d t " + ~ of ?" & , specific Gravity or drnnsty of n
,
,
.ncCr.vity D e Denlily or SpICL
LO-'
milli mW
pia
I**
10." I *
I
a114
.a
P
1
1
nr
USEFUL WTU
ldrlhId:Ucb.~'
hrq1droc"U"'
I
, R/moL
101 : U
N.
.
.
=
/
~
'.02212.
IOU rn44eJ-d
,
y(
~=&.tiorr
01 4w~i11
*.&I mt*= ) I . I ? frls2
vdooip 01r".'"d in
0.c.ndi.m
*!
, t,,l .
. f
% ,+ * .
.I*
*J .
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
PROCESS ENG~NEERING DESIGN MANUAL

DATA SECTION
Revisien : o
Data
Page NO :
5
15
-4
I
AREA
LENGTH
I
3.937wO+01
mitre
1 , M Y ) o O O L ~ Z 1 . O m W E W 1.6d0000EtiO
cenrimitn
I . ~ ~ D D ~ rE ~ Z
t . 0 m ~ t y w1 . ~ ~ 1 0 0 , ~0 31 ~ 0m ~ - 0 1
VELOCITY
TEPlDPlEXPlSUR
DATA SECTION
DENSITY
5.)8? 037 t -04
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
PROCESS ENGINEERING OESlGN MANUAL

DATA SECTION
Revision : 0
Pan* No
Date
: 2/65
I5
-7
.
1
VISCOSITY (Kinematic)
3.835 091) E fbr
n i t r m ad Wr
u d *
~.WOWO~+OF
1.076 3ni E+OI
mnu'nokwr
\ w o O Q l E Q
1.016 391 1-05
3 . 1 1 75 008.5 -02
munr.
I r t
pw wand
9.290 304 E-02
e . m lor r +ol
2.W1180 +Of
a.6m ~ o Eo*a3
,quan feet @r bru*
?.6806*0 4
3.117)78E-M
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
PROCESS ENGlNEERlNG DESIGN MANUAL

DATA SECTION
Revision : 0
Dale
Paw No :
1 5
: 2/85
-8
5PEClFIC HEAT CAPACITY
THERMAL CONDUCTIVlTY
Cr*IDUCIIY,Il I*sY'Om
WIC.~
rwr-.'c
waw*.h:#
m , m, ,-4
N-'
1
muw
ha.**,.
e r n . *
1101rn 1-01
I H I 1I1I41
,"
4-4t.kir
..
hr+dIm
%.it1 l?lIiQO
4 . 7 1 s 1 U -01
Mi!hulArrk.
I , . w
F h W h
~ . ~ e r n t r s
1 . . 1 ~ 1 ~ 1 * 0 0
HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT
FORCE
-Revision : o
Pagr f f o:
TOTAL
T EPlOPJEXPlSUR

DATA SECTION
Date
; 2/85
15
I
carrcilt
NICI#IEt
~UERMIW%
HEAT CAPACIT Y/ENTROPY

JIK
LWIK
ktd'~
POWERlHEAT FLOW RATE
TOTAL
.
TwtnP/Ewnutt
Revision :
0
1/15
Page No. :
DATA SECTION
'
15.10
PSEUDO-CRITICAL5 AND O f L PROPERTIES
Deflnitionr :
True vapour pressure
actual vapwr pressure of a crude oil a t the actual
temperature of the fluld.
Reid vapour p r c w e
temperature of I00
- reference vapour
pressure of an oil at a controlled
*F (used as a basis for

pint :
product specification).
Mom average b o -
equal to t h t Sum of the mole fractlcm of tach

OR.
component x i t s atmospheric boiling point
Volume average b o U i ~ point r VABP :
- average temperature at whlch the ASTM

5
10 %,30 %,50 % , T O 96 and 90 % volumes boil.

VABP. T I 0 % + 730 % + TJO % + T7O % + T90 %
M e a n averrEe bailing polnt :MABP I
- the slope of the AST M distillation curve i s used

Fig. 7
to c a r r u t the VABP t o give MABP. See
Cubic average boULng point z CABP : another corrected form of VABP.

llOP K or WATSON CHARACTERISATION FACTOR
KS~!!!!
Sg
i g at 60/60 CABP in ' R
Thfs lssued a s a characterisation factor when defining crude oUs. I t is required for variws other data evaluations.
dS3
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUA
b

DATA SECTION
Pagm N o .
Dare
: 2/05
1 5
-11
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR

I
Revision : 0
PW No :
1 5
DAth SECTION
I
Dam
: 2/85
- 12
PHYSICAL CONSTANTS OF HYOROCARBONS(27)
Revision : 0
Date
-.Pagr
TOTAL
TEP/DP/EXP/SUR
I

DATA
No :
SECTION
: 2/85
15
1 3
ASTM
DCI~W
5 a NUII NO
Nlt
PHYSICAL CONSTANTS OF HYDROCARBONS(~$)

10.
H U I ~ WIW. 15 *c'
I l ~
12.
13
Flarnnyb~la~v tumuls. "01 % ~nb+r rniw!u<~
hrmw
i
I
No
cmwum
1
-
37.691 33938 I wrnmr 68.032 51.58bh 1s 4 5 b 1 Elham 60.395 86,453 93972 Y 1 . W 25 39Ib 3 Prmw 4 n.Eulwt 112.391 121.>19 49.158" 247ll)L l12'.0Jl 121.4X 49.DUb 27621. ' 5 lr~qrl1n . ' I=,= 149664 . 8 . ~ 7 PIw a nPtnlarr 7 lwpntm# 13,0114 149.31S 48.570 90333 137 465 I 4 L 7 S . 8 4 2 f h 281L064 I Nmantrnr 1Sr.402 l 7 t . W ' 4.W 32091 9 n.Mbrw 10 2 ~ l l l v l ~ n l w lbr076 171.22P 46313 9 1 7 4 2 11 3Umhrlmnlbm 1 w . 1 ~1 7 1 . ~ 1 #.m 3 31 512 1 7 6 1 1 I 2 keoh*=m 161 0% 171.170 40.1W B 1st 13 2.3.Dm~thvibutalu 14 n4ilotrn 1m.m ~ 0 6 4 3 1 48.101 m a s 190,099 205.132 4E.m) l 2 l O O 15 Z*Hlthwlhm.M IW,243 m . 2 7 6 u . 0 ~ 2 3 3 2 4 ~ 16 3.M.lhvihr.*~ 35m6 17 1Eihvlmn1mr 1555327 205.3S -.rot Y . m 479b4 1896XI K I@ ~~~lmlhulp.ntbn B . W 32501 I n 2,44vnr1n*lpn1an IBP.W3 20..d% 1 4 1 33. I 20 3.30imlhrlo.nnn I I W W 71Y.722 47Sa2 33319 f l Triolm 318174 2132M 47PtB 33166 22 nOtlmm 215,191 2 3 1 7 m 47la32 33 312 23 Diirobrl~b 315.732 232.644 A7.843 PlZPD 4 Ismclan 342.389 =;.I= 47.7B3 M 4 5 25 *-NDIW 47.8'10 2 8 9 ~ ~ ~ %PBS 21 n-D.onn 131.114 tW.KP 41955 35225 z7 Cvf~oafiram ?I W t n v l h ~ l ~ m n ~ r r *1S6.757 IM.033 46.8Z3 JJ 270 S497 46.1580% 167.29 C~rcbhesaw 1E1,%7 1 9 4 . I M 46.5n J5Wt 3 wm,lc,ck,n.bm 50.10Q 55.042 31 C l h r r lflhvbml 07.11G .r r l . . w l 11.402 n P ~ o D . ~i l 0 7 . 4 n 114.991 .80814 Zn9leh 33 18ul.N I~UWIHI 107.191 114.701 47.027h P ~ S L 34 ri1.2.0urw 9 lMh 1 W M 7 114.473 4 7 M a " 1 35 t~.ru.1.lucmr 106.755 114.211 4 7 . 7 W =feen 3 ltarrrr m ~ 133465 l u m o 47.71~) 37 I*UIUUM Y .W* 31 21011 101.118 1a.755 4 J I lI.&rwmr* 29242h 101,017 1 0 7 5 8 41.P I . Z h w i ~ 1273m iIY.141 aL4m 31 62d 40 IVCPYP70 53cw 41 Aolvllr* 6 rY,OSS 139691 4t.843 3 42 Bvru*rr O O O 159531 107.MO a2450 D 43 Tolunr lE%,s% lV4.DS 43.014 37478 44 Ethvlhnr.rr 165.002 194.407 42WO 37 935 15 a.Xvl*rr 1%5,0;10 194.415 42.M1 37 245 40 m.xrl47 #.XvIer* lll5,OSO 191.445 4 2 W l 37 131 1@0,?PO 1 8 7 . W 42.213 3 8 4 8 4s Slyrru 443.410 375Q1 211.324 1 ) 2 r # imp.opv~brny*ru 3 Z W . 2 2 . a I 8 067 . 28 ? Z a CIu.1hVl.lcYW2 W.WS OQ.107 23513 51 Elh*l .*&I 11.9% ll.SS 52 Clrmmmwmm& 0 0 53 Clrbon d i o d e 21.912 23.791 Y n v ~ , w wit* 55 Sullur dm141 1 p . m ~ 10.1ai 54 4vmonib I 7 Air 12.a1 10.230 5d Mvdl-n
;
m1.U 31511 ~
~ 8 48Q.M 42573 38556 =LO 7 2 Y23D 3 H Y m B 1

-24 1 316.33 307.17
6 1214 0 4 ~ 1,219135~ 1.33?0*.
23.86
31.02 31.02 . I 1 3810 45.3 45.Y 45.24 45.3 4S.Y 5
51.-
9 9 16.70
50
2.9
1m24
1 -6
9 1
ID103 84#1 Z9S.07
1311 46 13lllt 1.3m 18 1.371 5 1 1.377 9 1 . 3 I~ I 138743 1 a 1 19 1.38594 1,38475

I .
18 1.8 1.4 1.4 1.4 11 11 lr.21 1.2 l1.N
I50 130
I,4
- -1
84 s.3 1831 1B.31 7. 17.71
09.b' 970
93 # -0.rd.f s1.r B23 85 5 24.9 73.4 74 5 018

0.0
.
90.3 80.2 28.0 135 7.1 934 94.3 0.0 48,4
n . 1 1
.
I711 17.71
10
+o#
52.9
la
1141
51.50 $1.50
llal
llOI
2Bll.W
YIlI6 27154 2
285.89
S9.m 35.51 55545 31703 482.77 437,gl
nsos
1.31342 1.391 W 1 W @ I 1.S4BB 193P2 1.407 73 I 1 1.r11027 1.412 UI I.42llS2 1.42566
U.W
5250 5
11.ot 1111 (1.01 tl.OI

0.W
J9M
=.ID
5Q65
66.81 7397
I0.98I I,O
0.87'
29
A
17.01 17.01 17.01 17.01 17.01 17.01 17.01
%,a
wj
838
88J
95.6
55.7
if
41.4 S2,O ~ 5 0 9 2 ~ s3.1 80.0 +lsf 1
+ ,
552
m.m
416.10 2s
14a.61
zs
~ .nrai
%.425%
1410.7) 1115.21
333.32
360.14
59 Omvw 60 M t r m
81 Chlarbn
6 2 W11.r
- - -
63 MrIium 4 nvdrep.-chlarldb
- - -
1.879
- - - - 0
342.47 Y.02 1351131 31125 107547
WPII W d O
bcO.54
215.70 5 $48.01 7 . 7 I*. 214. 450.4 11%
l.SM31 1.lOP73 1JWS 1-3 95 1.4wM. 149B9s 1.998 I lB4u) 1.m1.38345 1.~m30 I.WO*O 1.mOl IPOP w I.-%
1 , m 13
2.6 1141 11.21 428 . 42.W 13 7.8 5011 1.2 Y O 1 4 . 2.7 10.0 3140 - 2 0 21.63 16 2 I1 61 H.83 11.61 11.81 2 1.4 BY a . 2 5 11.0) 112.1 11.5' . 2.0 m.41 11.51 11.93 2.5 80, Jb.79 1.9 1 . F 42% M.11 o~W 1.1' m.11 1.1' S.11 N.11 1.1' 47~72 5 51.21 7.14 1.12(51 X . 9 3 14.33 328151 1815 7430 2 . p 12.WlSl
0.7~
m
B(I0 77.3 71,) 756
-0.1'
1
[
74 8
- 0 ~ f 1
n.m
- 03.5 - 77 - 00s A
11.0
1 - w .1
- r2.1'
A
A h '
7.16
4.xrtSl
46.60
2
1.3
IEla
27M
?W
0 1257.
431.5
100027 10m18 13R71t 1~33347 lDDDDj

I
42
4ODl5l
14.10
- - - - - - - - - a
n9 3
3 s&
-~
~ ~~~
______-__--.--
..-
7 -
--
DESIGN MANUAt
HWKHBSCES
#El1nmn.u*..1 C"1lr.l hur 111 llld#nan. -llnnAbnl ul Chrmwrr mnd r h y n o ~ " .BLd dill*. IUC 13Jm. C l r m I r c . I l * . at. I in,fi..Y. U la.rmrdrn.nr P.n.1n.. u ( r . . * : U".l..-.n*.
- I . & . llldd ~m Y.+ n . ~ . . w . kI. . A S A S * rrr. r.*r R I ~ ~ T I ~ . rtr ISI d u n k . 8.2. s,~..n. 61 u. Mrl'mny, R 11.: H.nl.). H. J. M mr II.* PI^. U S r,rr .*I, N. 140. I V ~
, 2 3 1 Vmlua El h 6tm.rbn..
u rmkulad L m d.1.
n . 1 . Rl)n arbuli.l.4 t4h"r". iZLl Lmru. S . ~rmmarun,. n,.4. web. l i Y Fd. " M r ~ h r r * lmlw m .w m I lbd,ma~~T.bk.d~ FLv!dK..u-l": hr P.r~.nwm F b : h i d . 1971 rr.1 Anrml, S. trm.lruna. n. de h l . c. H.. Ed.. ttlnurn.ln-l +h.*dyn.mm Tab*. of Ih. F1.Y % . ~ - h h y * n . . lm":
bl.rrr.nb Landam. 1974 L.Call.rhn.3. S.J. rhrl.Cham. M.ml. l*ll. t U. *I lr-r. 1311~ n l ~ n A . # ~rurk. W. M ,~ r n n ~ m nU g ., Edr -NI 1~urn.1 T l u r d nmmr f.b*rdrh. ) 7 d % i u l r n - ~ ~ , ~ I . W a P.M.: D I M . lt7k "H.l,u., L""rn.li.~*iTk"lr I S 1 *,,,"I.,$.. dr h w . K Y,.
kr..m+r &mur h a . n 44) a n m h n 10-M. r k d n c.Icu~.ad 11 lk Thrrd,n.mirr L r r a r t h Cenkr
-...
Lh b l n* IL h r Thrmud~srnn M irr.rb,n h u m ibmmwrlr A H b * . n h d IL ~ 1 . n lr, th. rmmlnln# ?vo.anh.

IP
c u n mrd
n.mC..
1.19. -rr. r*c!d
I.-
W m ~rthrn.bln
lm H.r.
s.
r.lw~wr.ptyrruvn~ Th.~.rublll,f~d,*r".
r ..CrbLII
1 1
f 1 -
un
wc
.eIw. r
..
n u - -..1w-
. . d i r
d . . . ~ tab*,
.IA. n u ,suu-r..
~u.1." z # p
I7
? . . . . n u h n : 0.M.
1 lk 5.mo,0 +4 a. *ul su nlv,.e w .r i .Yl~UuWr.vl T~..*L~~*.~..I.I.YULI."O)~ T I . .Co& d . " .I.. * . . I , r #7 . # .
l'b4.u i . r . V ( J . c l # u V V k u b d m..l 1 r r " . k " . , . " ,I . h &I(., r.. -.l.k.d t." uw & vwvw mJ.r k m t r a c n t .n w rein .~rr nu. -.n r r k u d Col&. nol-... ..nuom dCLI*. T h . IdLI 1 -. r * . U.lll 1.dq.DAO.I L u a re . m a r a n d n r d h u .-.nu1 . . . r . . unu .II.MYI L.b- lb'C.I* v.lu"#twmamG~M
8
I6 T h b w . r
I-
u h y f h )Y mUn4.d .UV mL 18% .C ** c r . . . u . *Ire , " I . . . . . u . . m u dl rt Ibl.8-b %?I mL.1 F r a r r d r*.n l h h . l r u CdiaOkSIPlr. wnrhnvnmrru c.n.%s,wha. I. . , I - h +; + IIW,) .COIGI>.
)I
)U
... ad,
r . , "
FHI 3 U..Z "c."%.d...-'....

.rCUL"md,UI
belr
.+ xr
"
wr
. .
lr
"Q
.f*.I,."4
."r.r.r,.r.d
*#.awe
-,
-<
. r uv o%a.lr,
. I nnk.h
T EPlDPlEXPISUR
DATA
SecrIm
critical ptrrnurr
Dale
FIB. 4
: 2/85
1 5
- 16
Ps.ud.
TOTAL
TEP/DP/EXP/SUR

DATh
Revision : 0
P b y NO:
SECTION
brtr
: 2/05
1 5
-1 3
Ctirical Irrnpmralur*S N o m d boitinp point. *C
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR

DATA SECTION
Revision : 0
Oat,
PIOI No :
: 2/05
IS
-1 8
as-u
o Y smna IP t -
.C.hlara m r M
cular mass, botllng d relative densltles
100
Mean awlaye boililly fminl. O
200
300
C
4 00
26 I
TOTAL
TEPIOPIEXPISUII
Revision :
0
2/85
page NO. :
15.15
M
DATA SECTION
Data :
DENSITY
VAPOUR DENSITY
Yapour densities or molar volumes can be caiculated from the equation :
Specific gravity of a gas
MWalr = 28.967
LIQUID DENSITY
The density of a multi component mixture can be calculated utng the summation af the component densities :
P'
Wl= mass component = density component
liquid densities for hydrocarbon mixtures can be estimated using. Figures 10, 1 1 in this section.
262
--
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR -PROCESS ENGlNeCRlNG DESIGN MANUAL
DATA
Revision : 0
P w Na :
15
SECllON
Date
; 2/85
-20
F16. 18
kppeomimate t c t t i v n density of pelrslrum frotiionr
I.mp.l.l"l*
. L
-.---
.~
----
26 3
TOTAL
TEPlDPlLXPlSUU
Reuision :
0
2/85
Page NO. :
DATA SECTION
Date :
1S.U
VISCOSITY
UNm :
Dynamic vlscoslty
I centipooc
0.01 dyne.rlcrn2 e
0.01 ern2/s
i
0.000672 1bfft.s
Kinematic viscosity : 1 centistake
D y n a r & i c v : y i t
Other quoted units for kinematic viscosity arc
Saybolt universal Saybolt fur01

VAPOUR VISCOSITY
Redwood
Engler
conversion charts are sited in literature
. Use .
figure 12 in this section or
Calcolatt using :
i) r m =
Zp- 1 :
fl
~~6
P= y; = component viscosity
nw: = component mol.wt
mlxturt viscosity
ii)
rn = A exp l0f)
3:
= component mo1.frac accuracy 2 5 %
Az
(q.4 * *.Ql w) -r!.r

(CW 4 14 n.ru,,-r) \a4
T in
0-
3 .
7-
9tc +
0.01
MU
L o L T L kCo
I A . ~ L
@F
C = ?.A -
0.1 b
PL !oo.o
pr:%
P'sRT
LIQUID VUCOSlTY
) 7 J .
a+'
(y
R = L65.P
. .
Use Figurt 13 in this stetion or :-
Calculate using :
1)
/ ' a
[ -
hf
X; =
component m o l . f r ~ c
The viscosity of crude oils with an API
> 30
(sg = 0.88) can be estimated using :

centipoise
logy- a (0.035HAPI) . C I a
where
I
3%
54
71 88
104
1 1 1 1
]
2.05
1.113 1.55 1.30 1.08
Corrcldtiolrs for tiquid vi~cosltypusscsa u general rclidbillty or
- 15
t
[ TOTAL 1
TEPIDPICXPISUR

DATA SECTION
Revision : D
Date
Papa No :
: 2/85
1 5
- 23
VISCOSITY OF NATURAL GASES
.?LC
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
DATA SECTION
I
Date
: 2/85
TOTAL
TEPIPPIEXP/SUR
PROCESS ENGINEEAINO DESIGN MANUAL

DATh S E C T I N
Rsrisbn ; 0
P.01 No :
Datr
: 2/65
1 5
35
rcmpcrature ' F
QSTR VISCOSfTV CHWlT
9 6 ' 6
( TOTAL 1
TEP/DP/EXP/SUR
I

DATA
SECTION
Revision :
Date
: 2/85
I I 1 15-26
FIG. 14
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
P R O C E U E N G I N E E R I N G D E S I G N MANUAL
DATA
Revision : 0
Plpr
NO :
SECTION
Date
: 2/85
I 5
- 29
Ptrml~rlblm mzprnrlbn of 4 0.7 rtlrtivr density
~Perml~~l i~panrlon blr O l I 0.8 rrlatlvb dmnrlly
Prrmlrrlblr mapanrlon of r 0.6 rmlrtlrt density
10
I I
T n n w r a i u r 'C
rn
2 D M 3W04000 6W3 I D 0 Flnbl vrmssurn. hPb (ab.1
MmO
FIG.
17
HYDRATE FORMATION
2TJ
TOTAL
TLPtDPlEXPlSUR
Revision :
Pap.
NO.
DATA SECTION
Date :
2/85
15.30
SPEClFlC HEATS
(HEAT CAPACITY)
UNITS :
BTU/lb O F kJ/kg *C
1 BTUllb . F
4.19 k3lkg -C
I BTU1lb.F
= 1callg.C
VAPOUR MiXTURES
.
.
Use figs 18, 19 in this section
Cp* Is a fuctlan of ternper*tlue and can be calculated ualng r

Cp*
s
A + BT + C T ~
where A, 0, C are constants dependant on system composition
and T h In * R [K) Values of A, 0, C are cited In Kern, or Perry.
Cp* can be corrected for preswre if Pr and Tr are known uslng Figure
K = ratio of specific heats
this should also be ~ M r K t e d for pressure If required.
LIQUID MIXTURES
, Use Figure 21 , Calculate using

Cpl Cpl
= =
in this section or :
- 1.34 G + T (0.00620 - 0.002349) 0.68 - 0.31 G + T (0.00082 - 0.0003 191

2.96
G
k3)kG * C (T in 'C)
BTUllb
O F
(Tin *F)
liquid specific gravity
CAMPBELL
(accuracy t 5 %)
1 rt3
TOTAL
T EPIPPIEXP/SUR
PROCESS ENGlNEERlND DESIGN MANUAL

DATA SECTION
Revision : o
Pagm No :
Dae
: 2/85
FIG. 18 SPECIFIC HEAT OF HYDROCARBON YAPOURS AT 1 ATM (NOTE UNITS ARE

BTU/LB/*F)
TOTAL
TEPlDPIEXPlSUR
Rnision : 0
PW ND:
phra SECTSON
Dale
: 2/05
15
-32
Ut4~~D 40 ll%bV.~
a01
02
01 a 4
0 6 01 ID
P # # * c *~r e > w * , 4
8
2 ?S
FIB.
19 HEAT CAPACITY CORRECTION FACTORS (NOTE UNITS ARE BTU/LB
M O L E / * F ) (8t attnospheric prtswre)
--
Revisiorr :
pagt N@r:
DATA SECTION
TEPIDPIEXPtSUR
Date :
2/85
I>.%
THERMAL CONDUCT1VITy
UNITS :
BTU/lb *F
VAPOUR MIXTURES
Use figs 22,23 in this section

Low pressure thermal conductivities of pure gases and vapours can be estimated
ushg
k=
r(=r
I-Af
accuracy 2 8 %
y Cp llp~as
B1Wh.ft.F
lblh-ft
BTUIJb 'F
. .
Usc fig 24 In this section or :

Liquid hydrocarbon mixtures can b t estimated uslng :
a = WE' [ I
=g
- on003 (r- 32)]

k
accuracy + 12 %
rg
- specific
- BTU/h.ftaF
gravity
7 -OF
mLl!3S
< > -93 32 < > 392

.78
See Perry of Kern for details of metals, earths and building materials.
277 ! --
mTnk
TEP/DPIEXP/SUR
F I O C E S ENGINEERING DESIGN MANUAL

DATA SECTIQN
vision : 0
Pagr No :
Orte
: 2/85
1 5 -35
lhcrrnol ronductiwity r o r i o lor goran
t.1m.d
r*..nr..?a
f HERMAL CONDUCTiVlTIES OF HYDROCARBON L I Q U ~ D S Ft6. 24
Revision :
Page NO. :
DATA SEtTtON
TEPIDPIEXPrSUR
LATENT HEAT O F VAPORISATION
Oatr :
2/85
15.36
UNITS s
BTUflb
kcallkg
1 BTUllb = 0.5556 kcallkg
. .
Use figures r 25, 26
Estimate using Trwtons rule :
A-2 l - ~ hcallgma~c
accuracy 2 20 %
Tb s boiling point *K
For relief valve calculations use 50 BtU/lb If actual Lt.ht i s not known.
, Detailed estimation methods in Perry :pp 238
2 74
TOTAL
TEPIOPIEXPISUR
PROCESS ENGINEERIN5 OESIGN MANUAL

DATA SECTION
Revison : 0
Page NO:
: 2/85
15
-33
E3
PRECISION : 10%
LATENT HEATS OF V A P O R I Z A T I O H O F VAAlOUS LlbUlDS
FIG.
a
2 &-0
>
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR

DATA SECTION
Revision : - 0 :,
Oatr
P w No :
: 2/85
1 5 -38
CPl
W2
QO4 Q05 03
0 . 2
0 . 4 C5
PRESSURE
- ATM
LATENT HEAT OF VAPOURlSAflON OF
HYDROCARBONS
FI~. 26
.2g
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
1 . 1 0
PROCESS ENGIIIEEIING DESIGN MWWLL
Rmwuan : 0
Date
Pago No :
DATA ACTTON
'
5 K)/WmF .
.no
: 2/85
(5
-39
TOTAL
TEP!DPIEXPISUR
Revision :
0 2/85
papa NO. :
DATA SECTION
Date :
U . 4 0
SURFACE TENSIONS
UMTS :
Dymfcrn
. I dyntlcrn = 10-3 ~ l m
N/m
. .
For surface tenslons of paraffins use fig. 28 To estimate surface tensions for hydrocarkn Iiquida/gas
a .
'[nu . "-PI
(2.A
use
4
w r c e r baker
accuracy :2
1U %
Parachor
18.07 + 2.996 M W for paraffins w i t h M W < 100 = 278 + 2-55 (MW 100) for paraffins wiik MV > 100
PI
liquid density iblft3
p v = . vapour density lb/ft3
For oilagar mixtures can also use

0 . .
-..a*?
0.
zc1
A?L)
Lrp
(- 6 . 0 . 0 ) 7 )
T
P
=
=
temperature in O F pressure in psia
source B e g s ' + Brill
r3
Revision : 0
P w No :
IS
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
DATA SECTION
m a
:Z/ES
-41
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEXPISUR

DATA SECfTQN
RarNon :. o Ontc
Paw No :
FI6. 55
solubllny of watar In hydroearbonr
: 2/85
1 5
- 44
Z? 7
--
.
~~
g
U
"
\n'
.
a
I
a v
..
.~ . . . .
911
. .~
Crl
I .
Il ~Utt'l
o
C .. .>
0
*
2 . .
WC.IOI
.
.
2-02 0 co
.%oc
3.0~~ C O L .
3.m id1IWI XOOLeL.'o 3.051 + . ' I LWI r c l j

u?~'L
LH r&r I
PPI bCEr' I
Pltrl
................................. & . Z %>'# ......................*.+-.-. 3.M

).0Ci4.0Z
"
. . f D d y . . .
#.W 4 :#,OH
''N
.*+V*U
qqq4
r 1.9
>WIUOI
WICIOI
-.
%OOI~SLS
>.I'1F
8
WI
d
.
OIL
.3.M 1 + ' I
1Ll.t
CLZ'O 13.01-*$1 Dl?'& LIIL'O
eUI'O
. . .&?LC
W.2 ~C~I'I
~ ~ ~ e 4 . 3.08 o I L'SP WFLOI **I? ~ir~ot+o ~ 9 r 1 . LIC'O >.P S 'I .)6tL'Q

WC':
r s W~E.IOI*QM
1.~511
WL'I rpc I
616 ~5
2
3
OS~C
0.r t P*ZL Cl? rbez

cr II or
EvKlLLC Lac L C ~ ~ I 11'osl H ~ I O W ~ ,,qD.H'3)O" ~
ru~r~
1111 101 LSPI
5sll.l
c111
LWO l*t)r.pa~~r ".. .........3.a. h 9 . q b li.n4J/rq IC'C .. ..m.-..o.,wuh......... 3.0~t3.w ...............................

ELC
8. r q I- Btrrr '"...'...'.h
....
""4.""
................. .....,..*Y
4 ! w A
P l~
m-'-'"m-"'-
%WPUW
puy~
WQL
I SrL HrlO,H'J~H
'Irpodw rv*v em05 -&!'.P mAwpu
2 z ;S
CI
1 . u I'd
m 3 .
Lral
CMC
3
0
E
'Ulrrr
LC1
1st
LOLI'I
.
H O ~ H ~
rW IOEG
ELldl
m l n a
.-~-wrs
.
CC I
zl.voL
.
l-40 *-I1wm
LC1 US?'& tll
'
KI.HtMn
1wtv
'3.04 a h u - a ................................. 3. ............................... 119e) *ry ' a 4 4 .................................... P W J 3. Oqzbud ...................... 3 . ' 1 1 9 . 1 9'101 **!@a ........................
EWIQ~
'mm8orrdur*l
WWma
'wed
@r
w d
WO wh-4~ W o -WIW
> . S t &
>-PC 3 . w U C r I
90
W m --All
.z
3 . CC
0
**I C.IO& W
s - E . 3 - 2
4
.
3.001 1 LI'O 3.a * F L L O as'? >.st- Q 8'01
.
CCSl'l
ILI 9111'1
Lumlvwm
"... ."" ".." ",. ........................-" ........................
..............lrDvr
qulq*
I rn-4
Cb
Y1 LU
-.
X S L P B'S
3 . s ~
8
W
rm
>.(rl
COI'I
aW ~ D
3 . c ~I W I O '
J.E I L W L
.
Q
K
L'TMI
W'l
c ~
J'S2
, C~P-
utLII-
.
1COl
a WI
a.7~1 rw
LUlmdl(PlraI
ml-
~.OL*CIOI CWIIad-
.I.3mQC1 UI'C ' IdC.2 3.0ClSP 1WQ 2150'1 3mOC.4bb ?.Ptl&IEOI MI . to1
su
Luo!wr
nuauw
3 . a IWC
.
'
LSV'L
>. ' 3 0 3 ................... 3.w 'w

Y I E'LOL d O I E W I C . t O l
.IV+ O d y q l* 'mrpu! v*pwr)*a
3 . ua
........ .................
w o
-I
l WL
SEE
.I3 U'd &W9 MC'O

OCf l'l *111 CiE LIS'Z bOCfOE)4&4Vt
-1 C ' I O I @VEm '.'(@90) %34e
PEL'O
3 . 0 8 19tE'C
SUll
..................................3 .................................. s~n w w ow113 w ww a1fll .....3-02 lwh..r~'llr ' & u ! 3.r~~ q!ds "".."".."""
out
""
b D .r , n
.4,!W*
I*
I -
*lmWdmrP
rayW e W
'"'
a,(3..~q)R~'Ir!aod*r
IW-SL
i . 4 ~
#to1
zue
ZH
WZ4I
~
'
a??z
CU011 WZ
Z??
OSC
CLLC
tv
4IZ
SMS
2 1 . CI'CCI ,,,,t(tncm)
121 1i'SOt
r'zz
(nm.odwoa.O)
. w
p s ~
r ,*.mq,.r(y.wg 3
roi
6PC
'
*
--4r,lrtUYl
b1'911
4++,r( , , , 6 ~)n
? I'SOI
,,qmrj0
. I . * V I I O
,",,,,.n(Xrn)
. . * -
..IYUIwII
.IPY.(UYIw
qmlul*yr k l l r n a r ~ l o 6 (m rmlr*dord 1 0 -
---
VOdl
).QLIS.Ol ...................... 1UIQ ........................ x ...................... 1qm) o & -nu........................... 3. .............

W.I9
'Mu.? 3.Ot
.ryml.r
IIUWIO
'e*rwdwrl 'mci#*q lonvr~
' I V ! ~"!ZBU~
3. CIOL1 ......................... ....norn,rp,**W
lq('9nlndl
lu(md
'W,,,4)CW
"
".."."........................
g.--4
DATA StmlON
PHYSlCAL PROPERTIES QF WATER
m.4
.ruan.J('W
4 wmr a d Skim.
Il-mkn..
r+ T l l C
tim
~evisioh : 0
. P q b No :
----
'
btntm a1 a b n r m & r l . ~ u r n Iunetimo Fw t k d1 h ~IM, U.''In~#rm.LiomJ Cljef.J . T & , " vd. 8. M;' b Tim 011 snd 2-34.
I..
'hpkd hr E ~ b , sc td,h n $1 ~m. hm W' lo 1Yn.L. 1 h. IW b.n. h V-mn. L . r , ~ c L & r . a d bbwd 5bmpkr*t*l m n n d rm id ira c a m . - WF. W. and ?.E-SSf tnr TI a m . 1C1. rru -n -I-. Irwl- d
P F . I M
IWC,
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF AIR
nt
K l '
n a XI
Im
I t .
Revision : 0
PROCESS CALCULATION SHEETS
TEPlOPfEXPfSUR
Date :
Page No. :
16.0
2/85
EQUIPMENT CALCULATION SHEETS
AIR COOLER
SHELL AND TUBE EXCHANGER
PUMP
CENTRIFUGAL OR AXIAL COMPRESSOR
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR
TRAYED COLUMN
VERTICAL LIQUID GAS SEPARATOR
HORIZONTAL TWO PHASE SEPARATOR '

HORIZONT A 1 3-PHASE SEPARATOR
PIPELINE TWO
PHASEAP CALCULATlON
PLPELlNE
AT CALCULATION
OPERATING CONDlTlONS AND NATURE OF FLUID I

Duty
.IQ= I
IT1 ITZ=
Fluid inlet temperatwe Fjuid outlet temperature Fluid inlet pressure Air arnbiant temperature Overall heat transfer coeff. l ~ e Table e 2 and/or a t t a e a
work sheet)
kcrl/h I aC 1
*C I FLUID AT^ = T l T 2 IF= bar abs 1 Itl= I 'C I INLET ATL TI t l = I'U = i kcal/h m2 *C I
I I
'C
*C
(Based on bare tube area) STEP 1.Optimum number of tube rows for U selected 2. R = At air/ t m 3. T1 TZ/TI tl 4.Y =At air/Tl t l . 5. Atair s Y x (TI tl) 6. Exit air temp t2 =&air + tl 7. Average differential temp. At, = dtalr
!N=
NOT@
I
I
(N~VC
N* 4)
lR=
1
IAtair
1 I
(curve
N* b)
I I t2 m I I 1 km* 1 T . 1 . I 8. Bare tube surface A r LA= 1 Ux tm I I 9. Bare tube areatrow Fa=AIN I Fa = 1 LO. Tube length IL- I 1 1 . Tubeslrow TR = FdLlt0.08 ! TR 1 12. Cooler width W=TRxO.O635 1 W 1 13. Total fan power =Fa*0.795 1 Fp I 19. Number of tam I NF I IS. Fan diameter I FD I 16. Powcrfian Fp/NF I PF I 17. Estimated weight 1-M I 4.88 (36.4X9.35 NIxWxL 1 1
IY= I
*c I I *C I
*C
'C
(curve Na 5)
I 1
-92
rn2
1 I I
I m2 I
m
1 3, 4 , 5 , 6 , 7.5 or 9 m are common I (I" OD tubing)
rn 1
kW I
t
m
max. fan dlam = 4.6 m
kW
1 1.
kg
I
I
(including rnotars)
Notes : Curves numbers refer to Process Dedgn Manual Chap. 4.
246
T*mO?QIC E X P I U I
EZU 4223
TOTAL
r nr
PROCESS ~ ~ L C U U ~ SHEET O N
ITEM:
AIR COOLER
- DATE
b. !
1406 he..
sv
101
~mt
urvl/
. 1,
LIQUID COOLING
LIQUID VISCOSLTY AT
+
T2
GLOBAL HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT :U = (Read curve n* 1)
2. GAS COOLlNG
MOLECULAR MASS :Mw'=
GLOBAL HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICLENT (Read curve n4 2)

3. TOTAL CONDENSATION
: U =
Tl-T2
*C
kcallh rn2 ' C
GLOBAL HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT :U = (Read curve n* 3)

Ir.
PARTIAL CONDENSATION
4.1.
WITHOUT LIQUID AT INLET
inlet gas f lowrate
WGl
s
C
outkt gas flowrate WG2
outlet liq flowrate
VL2
Tl
- T2
GAS MOLECULAR WEIGHT AT
y,
=
:
HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. Uc

(Read curve n* 3)
kcauk rn2 *C
kcal/h m2 'C
HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. Ug

(Read curve no 2)
GLO~AL HEAT TRANSFER COEFF.

kcallh rn2 *C
SELECTED GLOBhL HEAT TRANSFER COEFP. t
=
a4 7
Curves refer to PDM Chptr. 4.
TEI1WP:DV:E X W U *
TOTAL
cnu
m
1
PROCESS CALCULATION ,SHEET
I*
HEAT TRANSFER COEfflClENT OATS I ( 101ilnt
AIR COLERS
ITIW :
w..
1 0 1No
ntv
1 ;
WITH LlQUlD AT INLET'
inlet liquid flow rate
WLl
Wtt
+
kglh
kgfh
outlet liquid flow rate
LlQUlD MOLECULAR WEIGHT AT T1

LIQUID SPECIFIC HEAT AT
7
kcallkg f C
kcal/h
f2 =
QL
T1 + r2 CP1= --?-
) x CPI x [Tl
- T2)
'
inlet gas flow rate WG1
outlet gas flow rate WGZ

GAS MOLECULAR MIGHT A T GAS SPECIFIC HEAT AT
QG
kglh
R%h
T 2 CPg =
kcallkg ' C
= f W C l +2WC2) x CP& x (TI - TZ)
kcallh
CONDENSATION HEAT Pc=Q-QL-%

LIQUID VlSCOSlTY
kcal/h
AT 71 T2
cpg
LIQUlD HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. (Read curve n92)
Ur =
U8
kcalfh rn2 *C
. (Read curve n* 2)
COEFF. (Read curve n. 3)
GAS HEAT TRANSFER COEFF.
kcalfh m2 *C
CONDENSATION HEAT TRANSFER
Uc =
kcal/h rn2 *C
GLOBAL HEAT TRANSFER COEFF.
U=
$+F+$
U =
kcallh m2 'C
SELECTED GLOBAL HEAT fRANSFER COEFF. r -
U
pq Y
kcal/h m2 *C
& y
TE?~OCV~PIZ~?ISU(I
AIR CoOLeRS HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT
nzM:
~o
.
I
CHI
OATE
1 lO# T111f
100 ho
l t ~
! ITEM:
I
I I I I I I I I
1 I
Q
I
I
keal/h
VALUE
DUTY
I I I I I I I I I I
I
I HOT FLUID
Inlet remperature TI Outlet temperature T2
'C 1 ' C . 1 'C 'C
I 1
I
COLD FLUID 1n:et temperature tl I Outlet temperature t 2
II
-c
'C
'C
1 1 I 1 I
I
I T2-tl
I I LMTD from formula(l) I
.
I I I I I I I I I I
I
t2-tl
I I I I I 1
I
'C
+!
I
NOTES : I I I I I I Indicate temperature I I I
1 1 I I I I I I
I
I I
I I
I
I
TI tl
TI-T2
p=t2-tl
I I
I I I I I I I
I I
1
1
*C
I I
I I I
rl-tl
R=Tl-T2
I I
NUMSER OF SHELLS F = LMTD correction I factor (3)
1 1 1 1 I 1
.c
I I HEAT TRANSFER AREA I 1 A'.+.
1 Fig. 2 I ' L 1 I CORRECTED LMTD CORR. I I I I HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. U I kcallh 1 TABLE 3 P a ~ e 4-10 I m2'C
I 1
I 1 1
1
I I
2
I I I I I I I I
I
I I I I I I
3
I I I
I I
I
1
f I
I 1 I
1 U.LMTD ORR I I ESTIMATED TUBE LENGTH FTlrn) 1 ESTIMATED SHELL DlAM I inr(mm)'l I I I I I ESTIMATED WElGHTBundlc 1 - tonnes I
I I I I
II
I
Including fouIing
factor
I I
rn2
I I I I
1 I I I
I I I I
'
I I I I I I I
Shell
1 tonnc~ 1 1 tonne* 1 1 I
I 1 I
247
t 1 1
1 I I
StPIDD?'D~P~ X P ~ S U U
i ! i &
t
cnx

ITEM:
SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER

JOB nnr
N ,
av {
oat
ror NO
REV
lndicstc pressure, elevations and system sketch
FLUID PUMPED r Liquid :

Pumping temperature T r Vapor pressure at T I Density at P, T I Specific gravity at P, T r
PUMP TYPE r Speed t

*C
bara kglm3
Viscosity at P ,T Specif ic.gravity Normal flow Q at P,T :
. .
*
(reL
%
cP
~ b d ]
Design margin : Design llow at P,T (1) :

.
m3/h
m3/h
'
SUCTION PRESSURE
Min. Origin Pressures + Static head at LLL =

(m x sg x 0.0981) A P suction line
I I PUMP SUCTION PRESSURE 1 I NET POSlTlVE SUCTION HEAD 1
baral m bar t bar1
1 I
I I DISCHARGE PRESSURE I
Delivery pressure
I Static head f d P control valve(s) I A P txchan cds) I A P orific 51 1 AP 1 OP lint 105s
bara bar
. 1
1 I
1 I I 1
bar
bar br bar
bar
I I 1 1
I
II
Static head at LLL
m 1
m
I
l
I
1 Othu I '
bar I
TOT MSWARCE
PRESS bara
1
1
.
I I I
I
+ vapwr pressure correction . m 1

m
Line loss
1
I
DlFFERENTlAL PRESSURE
Suction pressure
TOTAL AVAILABLE NPSH
MAXIMUM.SUCTION PRESSURE
Vessel
PSV setting
bara I
I I I
I
1 Discharge pressure I I pump 'A P 'I
I I Brake Horse- ower = (l)x(2) kW I MAXIMUM DISCHARGE PRESSURE !I+ 7si. . I P1 1 bard I Estimated mator size kW 1 Max. suction pressure Normal pump AP x 120 % bar1 I I
P~WLR REQUIREMENTS
net bara
Statlc head at HLL
bar 1
1 I
I I bara I bara I I bar I m I

I
1 1 1
I I I
I
1 (2)
'
net bar.
I 4Fig3for 1 , )
I * .
Design operating load i411qmkWI
I 1 (31 I 1 1 141 I
r ---
I Estimated weight
300
..*---
*I
-
I 1 I I
!((I
TECWoPXWP'tI(P
I V
Em7 sun
I
CHI
OAT
TOTAL
-1

ITEM :
PUMP
1 0 .
He.
rant
I 0 0 lro
rtv
r
1
OpER4TING CONDITIONS
SUCTION PRESSURE PI = DISCHARGE PRESSURE P2 =
bar a bar a
PRESSURE RAT10 P2/Pl

MW
a
SUCTION TEMP*
TI =
i
'C
*K
SUCTION f LOW ACTUAI. VOL FLOW

STEP
1. GAS PROPERTIES
W + V =
kgir m lh
Tc
GAS DENSITY AT
SUCTION =
kg/rn3
NOTES
PC
=
= =
bar a
'K
2. POLYTROPlC EFFICIENCY
9~
8
~2
SEE FIG. 2
ESTIMATE T2
3. AVERAGE 8 = MCplMCp-1.99
4 . DISCHARGE TEMP ~2 = ~ l ( a )
3
SUCT
REPEAT STEP 3-4 IF ~2 IS DIFFERENT FROM ONE USED IN STEP 3
5. DETERMINE Z AYC
2 1
Z2
DlSCH AVG
6. CALCULATE GAS HORSEPOWER GHP=ZX R X W ~ ~ X ( T ~ - T ~ If ) jp
R = 8.314 kJlkgMOLE .*C
M W x 3600x(X- 1).
7. CALC SHAFT HORSEPOWER
PS = GHP x (1 +
' Im
0.96
FIlOO) x I /. , q
PS
kW
tHP<800 kW 8 0 0 < < 10 MW > I D MW
5.0
3.)
1.0
0.97
0.98
8 r ESTIMATE DRIVER POWER
ELECTRJC MOTOR PS x K PO PO GAS TURBINE PS x (1.14 + K)

9. ESTIMATED PACKAGE WEIGHT
- -k
kW kW
K = 1.15
K s 0.02 TO 0.04 WITH
GEARBOX
COMPRESSOR-DRIVER-LUBE
NOTES I
--
kg
(SEE FIG 4 )
- .
301
1IPIPW~lhlXI~IUR
-(.CUK
ED3
TOTAL
&2.Lb
j
DATE
PROCESS C&LCUCATION SHEf T
CENTRIFUGAL OR AXIAL COMPRESSOR
lllY :
wo. :
10s mu
f JODrrne
UIV
OPERATING CONDITIONS
SUCTION PRESSURE P1 = DlSCHARGE PRESSURE P2 = SUCTION TEMP.

SUCTION FLOW ACTUAL VOL FLOW
bar r
bar a
C
PRESSURE RATIO P21PI =
T I
W
V
=
,
MW
kgjh m /h
GAS DENSITY AT SUCTION =
kdm3
STEP
1. GAS PROPERTIES
2. AVERAGE 8 = MCplMCp 1.99
3. CALCULATE DISCHARGE TEMP
TC =
NOTES
PC =
bar r
*K
II =
l-2.
Tlx
(E)Y
SUCT
AVG
.
T2
Z l
7
=
m
'K *C
Repeat 2
from that used In STEP 2 ".
- 3 if T2 differs
5. DETERMINE t AVG
DlSCH
Z2
Z
6. DETERMINE OVERALL EFFICIEN&
' le
CHP =
'lg =
s n FQ 3
Z x R x W * 11 x ( T 2 - T I ) M W x 3600 x i 1 1 )
GHP=
kW
R = 8.314 kJ/kgmoldC
8. CALCULATE SHAFT HORSEPOWER
PS =
kV
PS+ GHPlf x v g
9. CALCULATE DRIVER POWER
Electrical Motor
f = 0.96 t o 0.97
Po = 1.15 x PS.
Po =
kW
30 2
TICmwmMXCnVn
EEu
cut
TOTAL
lmm
O~TI
PROCESS aLcumnoN SWEEI

ITEM :
RECLPROCATING COMPRESSOR
JOBnnr :
: .
IOWUO.
mv
IIV
TRAY CALCULAnON SHEET Columm item : Tray number :

to =
Name :
Number a! passes r
.*c
PQ =
bar .a
1. VAWUR.AND LIQUID T O TRAY
I HYDROCARBON :I I .LIQUID I I VAPOUR 1
I TOTAL
I -1 I
I ! I I
I
I
'I
I
I I I
1
1
I I I
I
' 1
7 -
I ---
Compressibility factor Z
Reduced temperature Tr
Kcduccd Pressure Pr
From charts Figure 1,2 or 3 page 15-15
&
?pour actual rate

Cv=k&= Dv
h.
I
~'
-!
1 Ion tlm,.
m3h
.$W
CUE
,
309.
PROCESS ULCULATION SHEET
ITEM:
Sheet 1 of 4
I 'IEP'DWrDlP'tlCSUR
my
TRAY COLUMNS
WO. :
OLTt
.
10s no
REV
2. LlQUlD FROM TRAY

to =
.C
Use figure 10 page 15-20
D15
'
kg/m3
DL a t to r
k&
kg/m3
Liquid flowrats =
3. DOWNCOMER DESIGN YELOClTY YD bg
TS : = DL-O":
m m T R A Y SPACING" kdm3
m3/h/rnZ From figure 2 Page 3.10 v D dsgo = from table 1 Page 3 . 9 System factor Kl rn31hlrn2 . VD dsg = VD dsgo x Kl =
4.
.
V A P ~ U CAPACITY R F A f f O R CAF
mrn CAF 0 = from (Fig.3) on page 3.10 from (Table 1) page 3.9 .System factor KZ = .. C A F = CAF , x K 2 , =
TS:
5.
VhPOUR E F F E m V E LOAD V Load
6. APPROXIMATE COLUMN DIAMETER DT =
rn f r m Vlg.4) page 3.1 1
D m ,
TtP'DDCPC.TXP~SUR
30Y
REM:
Sheet Z of 4
E m 3
TOTAL
TRAY COLUMNS
*o. ;
riv,:,
COLUMN HEIGHT ESTIMATION
I
"a
I
1
a. HI : See design details on vertical vapour-liquid separators. Minimum distance for H1 will be one tray spacing. Minimum distance between
inlet nozzle and top tray 300 mm.
HZ :trayspacing x (number of actual trays - 1)

No actual trays = theorctjcal traysltrray efficiency
for tray efficiency see section 22. page 3.3. Assume
= 50%
Actwl trays a
Note.: ifthe column diameter changes over the length, the transition piece will be h*
= @0l
- (2)
long and t i 2 r i l l increase by this amount

Selected H2
5
mm
TO~AL
T CP.~bP#Pl@*txt~SUt B
* -
..
.
PRQCE%$ CALCULAnON SHEET . , .. IttM.
Sheet 3 of 4
TI~AYCOLUMP~S
cur
'
DATE
...
no..
!I O B T I ~ L ~,
1 ror no
ttu
..
c.
..
H3 r
H3 s h l + h2
hl = tray spacingx 2 =
mm
h2 = h6 + h7 + h8 (see vertical separator sizing) h6 = hold up time

For
production flowing to I
anothci column
storage
.
t
r
..
. . . .
15 r n h
2 10 5
a furnace
another unSt . reboller/heat exchanger
h6 =
rnm
h7 =
rnm
h8 :
mm
+h2='
r n m
Hf = h l + h2 r
mm
.
TOTAL COLUMN HEIGHT
e
Selected H3 =
. rnrn
H I + H2 + H3 =
~.
mm
6.
4
.
~ E M :
PRDCESS CALCULATION SHEET ~ h & t 4 of
Bf.1
1EPrDDP:DIPJELHSUI
TOTAL
TRAY COLUMNS
PATI
ma:
lOrnN0..
81
C ~ Y
IoRTITLt :
REV
CALCULATlON SHEET FOR VERTICAL TWO PHASE SEPARATOR
EOUIPMENT N*
Operating data :
Pressure (operating]
bara
Temperature (operating) Gas MW Gas flow rate Gas density (f,P) Actual volume flow Qg
'C
Liquid description :
kg/h a kdm3 =
m3/s
Liquid flow rate Liquid density (T,P) Actual volume flow Particle size
kg/h kg/m3
=
=
m3Irnln r microns =
'
Mesh pad
Yes No
:
:
.
.
Estimate Vs using Fisure 1 and 100 micron curve If P < 50 bar and )J < 0.01 use Fig. 1 and f 50 microki f > 0.01 use calculation for Vs ~f ~ > ' 1 0 b a r o r
Vs a
'
1. Vapour-liquid settling velocity :from Fig l/calculated
m/r
c =
Delete as applicable
2. Derating % = 85
maximum velocity
vs =
m/s
Vm
m/s
m2
3. Actual volumetric gas flow
m3/1
= Calculated drum fi =
Drum flow area
mm
SELECTED DIAMETER =
4. Required liquid hold-up timer
mm
h 5 : HLA
h7 : LLL
5. Mesh pad:
- HLL
min
mifi
= =
m3
rn3
. m
mm
mm
LLA
Yes/no
thickness s .
rnm
,
30? .
Sheet 1 of 2
Y; & j e t [
I .-.CII.
E m 2
PROCESS aLCULATION SHEET
E ~ C A vAwuR-Wu1o L SEPARATOR
ItTM.
YO
6. Hci~h: calculation
1
mm
hl :
h3 :
TL
t 5 % of 0 or 400 mm [Use mad h2 : mesh pad

50 % o f @ or 600 mm
mm mm
U
L
I+
% I
N
h4
With mesh :hl + h2 + h3 No mesh 2 hl + h2 + h3 8 60 % d or 800 h9 : 400 mm + dl2 r d = inlet not2 P r 200 mm hS : From step 4 o
=
'
mm mm
mm
mm
mm
4:
h5
. I :
h6 r
h7t
h8 :
From step 4 or 350 mrn FromstepIorlSOmrn 150 mm for bottom LC

300 mm for side LC
mm
rnm
rnm
h6
A.
bl
.-
.WLL
=
F
ua
LtL
For "drymvessel
h6 + h7 + h8
TOTAL VESSEL HT TAN#AN
mm
I d
mm
7. Wall thickness
. .
DESIGN PRESSURE
CORROSION ALLOWANCE
P= c=
hrg
mm
t
Diameter D =
mm
Max stress : 5 = 1220 bar CS
LO00 bar CS
Joint efficiency (.a51
S=
PxD +C =ZXS XE-I~ZP
E=
tmin = Df800 + C
8. Veswl weinht (Flg. 6)
t=
mm
mrn
L=
m
m
Dr
shell \eight = Head weight = (t x 201
ks
h
30 S T
d x
TOTAL WEIGHT =
IEC'DDC'D(PIEXMUR
I
I
m.
1
1OTAL
PROCESS CALCUUnON SHEET ntw :
VER'llCAL YAPOUR-LlQUID SEPARATOR
----
"., .
-
Sheet 2 of 2
.
..
I4
. .-..
"
~ of
t
TANnAN fL' )
.
CALCULATION SHEET FOR HOMZONTAL 2 PHASE SEPARATOR
0=
ht
Head type cllipticallhcmispherlcal Indicate on sketch if 2emlstcr mesh required

+
:; .@
0
HLL
LLL
. h2;
EQUIPMENT N * : DESCRIPTION r
Operating data r Operating pressure bara
Opcrating temperature ' C =
Gas molecular weight
x
Gas mass flow rate k d h Gasdensity Gas vlseodity
T, P
kg/m3
m3/5
Q g actual val f b w
= =
CP
Liquid nature : Liquid flowrate Liquid density T,P Q1 actual vol flow partide size
kg/h
kg/m3
m3/min = microns =
mls
I. Vapour-liquid settling velocity : from Fig. I/calculated

C
Vs =
=
-
* Delete as appliabIe
2. Max. vabour'velofity
LID 3
3. Actual vapwr volumetrlc flow Qg =
Vm=VsxfxL
Vmr
mlr
m3/s
*" = %=
30 7
ITEM :
WO.
m2
&?P)
C ~ K
Em3
PROCESSCALCULATION SHEET
Sheet 1 o f3
CALCULATION FOR HORlZONTAt
IEPIOOP UIPIE~PLSUR
2 PHASE SEPARATOR
DATE
IOD TlTLl
BY
JO@ no
RlV
4 . Nozzle sizlng Ivelocity limits (rnfs) = Inlet r 7-13, Gas outlet :15-30, liquid outlet 1-3
i
;
lnlcr flow =
(+ 10 96)
m3/s
Nozzle ID =
Actual vel =
n
mlr
a
!J2 : Gas outlet = Li@d outlet =
m3/s Nozzle ID = m3fs Nozzle ID = w
Actual vcl
mls
mla
Actual vel =
5. Drum sizing
For trid I t ,,
= 4 min
voL
required r b x Ql =,
m3
I TRHL
Selected h/D Vapwr area Av % Total area (Fig. 3) Total area At Liquid arcs Al
I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I
m2
m2
m2
Calculated drum # Selected drum 0

LID (3 4) Flowpath length
mm
0
mm
I 1 1 1 1 I I i 1
I I I I I I I I
I I 1 I I
I
I
3
L L1
rnrn
mm
m r n m3
mm
Tan/Tan length
HLL hclght Volume at HLL

LLL height
Volume a t LLL Surge volume (HLL Calculated treS
- LLL)
m3 d
min
I I I 1 I I I I I I
1 1 1 . 1 1 1 I 1 I 1
I I I
1 I I
I
I I ,1
I I I I
I I I I I I I
1 , I I I I I 1 1 , I I
I I
1
1
'
I
t
I I
I
I I I I 1
NOTES r
1 I
SELECTED DRUM t DUMeTER
mm
I L
I I I
m m tanltm
d
I
I
b)
T m / t a n l e n g t h L 1 = L + If x l l + 14 g2 (ignore this correction if D < 1.2 m and use L for volume calcs. For trial 1- use &d ignore heads).
If VOL HLL is less than rquired surge i n c r e a ~D , L or h/D or reduce inspection).
trcs (by
3 l0
FvZa
TE~QOP*RV XP' ~ IUI
PROCE5S LnLCULLITlON SHEET
sheet 2 of 3
& q J J
CALCULATION FOR H O R I Z m M
nt~:
116.: IOI YO
2 PHASE SEPARATOR
D L ~ E
BY
cnr
101 TITLE.
REV
'1
Wall thickness
.
+
DESIGN PRESSURE CORROSION ALLOWANCE
P=
C=
barg Max stress

mm
CS = 1220 bar
5=
SS = 1000 bar
Joint efficiency E =
PxD
p -
+C
mm
8. Vessel Vfei~ht Fig. 6)

t=
L=
rnm m
rn
Shell weight = Head weight =
kg
kg
D=
It x $r 20)
TOTAL WEIGHT =
k*'
.3
E a 3
BY
CWK
TOTAL
A
L q T J '

CALCULATION FOR HORIZONTAL
T
"EM :
Sheet 1 of 3
TIPIDDPOIP IXPISUR
2 PHASE SEPARATOR
Ha'
101No
] 101TIT11
mtv
II ;
f ANITAN LENGTH L ' FLOW PATH LENOTH L
HLL
Or
TO
Amend rkateh if boot requited instead of bfflr .indicate on sketch
.Heads :2 :1 slliptical
/hemisphsricaf
if mesh r.quir+d
1 0.
Operating data i Operating pressure a = Opcratlng temperature 'C =
EaUlPEMENT No : DESCRIPTION :
CONDENSATE Flowratc
-flowrate
GAS MW
PC Ql I . "
WATER CUT
kglh F Density T,P kg/rn3 Vol flow T,P m3/rnin =

Viscosity
cp
kglh
Mass
kg/h
Dtnslty T,P Qg Vol flow
= kgfm3 =
m3/h
Particle size
PW Qw
microns=
P "'
*
Flowrate Density T,P VoI flow T,P Viscosity

Vs =
,
kg/m3 =
m3/rnin = ep =
I. Vapour-liquid settling vclwitr: from Fig. Ilcelculatcd

C
Delete as applicable 2. Maximum vapour
velocity
5
d s
YmrVsxOd5xL
LID = 3
3. Liquid-liquid settling
Oil in water
Ut = 0 . 5 1 ~ 8 [ ~ ~ - f ~ rndrnin ]
)c.
I J= ~0 . 1 1 0 1 [ . ]
U+il= Utwater =
mmlmin
mmlmin
Water in oil
re
rnrnlrnh
31s
PROCESS C&LCUCATION SHEET
T~F,DOF.~)I~~~P'SUR
TOTAL
Sheet 1 0 i 4
CALCULATION FOR HoRIZONT&

OAT
1 7 ~ :
N O . : to6 lto
67
I CHK 1
3 PHASE SEPARATOR
101 TITLE
ltlv
rr. Nozzle sizing r velocity limits (mi$) = Inlet ! 7-13, Gas outlet 11-30, Liquid outlet 1.3
m3/s :.
1. Inlet flow I (+ 10 %I 2. GM outlet I 3. HC outlet r 4. Water outlet r
5. V e s x l sizIng For t r i d 1 use
nozzle 1 0
actual vel m/s
tresoil
[HLL-LLL) = 4 min
OIL SECTION
I TRIAL
Selected h/D Calculated (Qg/Vm) Av as % AT (Fig. 3) Total area Liquid area
I
1
I * I
1 1 1 I I I
I
1
. I I I I I 1 1 I
Av
m2
m2 m2
I 1
I
At
A! D
I I
LID U 5)
Calculated @ Selected I
mm
mm
Flowpath length
TanlT an length
I I 1 I
1 I I I I
1 3
I I
L
L '
h1
mm
mm
HLL height Volume at HLL LLL height Volume at LLL Surge volume {HLL
h2
mm m3 mm
- Ltt]
m3
m3
Calculated t,,
min
1 I I I I
I I .I 1 I I I I -1
I I I
I I I I I I 1 I 1 I I I I 1
I
I 1 I I
I I I
I
I
I I I
1 I I I I
I I I I I I
I I
I
I I
1 I I
I I I I I t I I
Notes or comments r
I
L + Ij x
I
a) tan-tan length Lo=
I I
+ 02) mrn Ignore if
D < 1.2 rn
- $3
f OTAL F Jrn
ky>m
I
ewe
PROCESS ULCULATION SHEET
.i.w
T~PDDHQ~FTXPSUR
CALCULATION FOR HORIZONTAL 3 PHASE SEPARATOR 1 inn rlrm
'TtM:
Sheet 2 of 4 .-I
UIV
no :
IMw e
WATER SECTION
Trial 1
= 213 x L r
+
rnrn [rwndcd)
Total liquid vol f lowrate

Qw
QI
1 1 Rl AL 4 1 I m3lmin I I I I I
8
A1
Baffle distance Liquid area at HLL Horizontal vcl at HLL Ut water b t e p 3) Vertical fall from HLL =BxUt/Vi HLL vertical fall
rnm
m2
rnrnlmin mrnlmin
mrn
V1
mm
A1 VZ
Liquid area at LLL Horizontal v t l at LLL Ut water (step 3) Vertical fail from LLL = B x UtlV2
rnZ rnrnlmin mmlmin

mrn
Selected baffle height . h3 Selected HIL level . h4 (adjust h3 and B if necessary)

Check oil rise r
mrn
mm
Horizontal vel at LLL Ut oil (step 3) Vertical rise within dist B * 0 X UtfV2, = mex. outlet height
vz
rnmfrnin
mrnlmin
.
mm
hS selected LIL level h6 selected outlet height

'
mm
mm
m3
ql water vol at H E (upto baffle)

q2 water vol at
.
,
LlL (upto baffle)
m3
3
rn3
m3
q3 water voi at NIL (upto baffle)

94 water voI at outlet ( q surge =
VOI
I '
'i
I
(ql q21
swge time q surge/Qw
residence time q3qb/Qw
min min
calculated oU residence time (upto baffle) Vol (NLL NIL)/Ql min
I I J
I I I
i
I
I
1
1
i
I
i
I
I
i
I
1
I I
'
1 I
I I
I I
I
I I I I
1
E m 3 TOTAL
TE?.WC OR,I X M U I
m a
3 4 PROCESS CACCUUTlON SHEET
Sheet 3 of 4
CALCULAf ON FOR HORIZONTAL 3 PHASE SEPARATOR

I
nEm '
ne.:
+
..
I 4""
?ST, r
nru 1
6. Wall thickness
. .
DESIGN PRESSURE CORROSlON ALLOWANCE
P=
C=
k g
mr(r
Max stress
CS = 1220 bar 55 = 1000 bar
s=
Joint efficiency
t
E=
73izlm,
PxD
+C
mm,
8. Vessel weight (Fig. 61

t
mm
m
L*
I 3=
Shell weight = Head weight (t x D \ 20)
kg
k ! !
1OTAL MIGHT =
tfg
..
-31 5
<
i f
tf P DDPRIP'EXPISUI
UT
PROCESSaLcuanoH SHEET ' M CALCULATION FOR HOWOmhL "
Sheet 4 of 4
3 PHASE SEPARATOR
01Tf
101t a t .
wa:
10s Nn
cnr
MV
OPERATING DATh
GAS FLOWRATE DENSITY

Wg
kglh = kg/m3 = . . cp
LiQUiD
FLOWRATE
VISCOSITY
Dg
Yg
VISCOSITY
FLOWING TEMP
DENSITY
W1 0 1 Vl
k& cp
kg/m3 =
SURF TEN
= =
s
st dynestcrn
= =
*C
PIPELINE DIAMETER D cm LNTERNAL AREA A m2
PIPELI~SE
LENGTH L Vertical change Ah
m = m =
STEP
NOTES I -
I I
1. DETERMINE FLOW REGIME
Bx + 210.3
I I BY r
1
Wg
dmxvel
~1213
=
=
1
I
I
1
I
rcr
st I
I 'I 1
1
I
1 I I I II I
1
ma*
7.087 x W
I I I I I I I I I 1 1 I I I
I I I I
11
REGIME FROM BAKER CHART
I I I I Rex' ! I
I F
1-JL
40.7
2. CALCULATE Apgas
35.368 x W E Vg x D
I Re = I I
I I
t
I Friction factor ( ~ o o d y ) I I ~ P =G 6.254 x f x,wg2

I
ldPG
I
I
11
gxD
.-
scr
rf
10-9
bsrlkrn
1 I I
I I I I
3. CALCULATE ApLlQ
1 Re = 31.368 x W1 Vlx D I I
I A P L 36.254 x f x ~ 1 I D l x D> I
'
I I I Re= I l f = I I A P= ~ 1
I
bar/km
J I -1 I
I I I
1 I
CC
r - r n
CCtK
f TOTAL
zzv Ohti
31 6
pAOCESS a L C U t 4 T I O N SHEET
Sheet
' '
of
%LF~DPd'TilP.T XP.%UR i
?
TWO PHASE PlPELwE P CALCULAnON
nim.
Ma: 108 NO..
1 I
()osntir ~ * * f i r c ~
I
..
*EV
I ;
.
I
1
4 . AVERAGE VELOClTY
Y,.
3.537
. \
I 1
I I I
3)
1 I v,=
I I
mlr
I I
I I 1
1 I I - I 1 i I
1 1
5. CALCULATE X RATIO
= APL
* (w)
-K
I
I X =
I VS + average veloclty I I I I I 1 1 1
I I 1 I
I 1
1 6. CALCULATE LOADING FACTOR WS

WS= W I x 0.205
I I
1
I
WS=
1 I 1 I I
FLOW TYPE z
1 I 1. 1
I I I
I
,
I I I
1
7. CALCULATE PH FACTOR FOR HORlZONTAL FLOW
I I
mwnb.!
~wtm w -
I I-4 I
I
I
VS
E.u .
.I,IN
* I . mu7~ #
r.n-ou3
aY>.&*d
PH
LII*
I I t I
rn
b
d
l u d t U m U
L I
1
1 I 1
. m n u
!J,q&2
I mmIE0 1 d q - L
'
, ,
m a
--'TAVE
iZ&~
t
vs
I I I 1 I
- L"_
1 q # 3
_ -nt .
-
r h
=o;llrr
P~D'
- -X
c - -
FLOW TYPE + WAVE
I I I I I I I I
I
h-3
prlh . c . t ~
WGflC
FH
.c2
~ulaer
PZH3,
berlkm
1 I 1
'
I
I
8. CALCULATE
V E R -
i rn I
I X , .
PH FACTOR FOR VERTICAL 5EC710N

18.2
rlm
a 1n5
vm+Din
I I 1
I
)
Y -
1 Iw
1
aJYW@W
X .
PHv =
x,,~nDirpcrrQm~wt.wPn'
I I I I I 1 I 1
I I
9. CALCULATE TOTAL TWO PHASE F
I I I
I
P~H=.PCXPH~= ~2~ = PG x PH$ =
bar
HorIzmtaI
Vertical
:
:
PH =
pHV=
'
PC=
I
(
barlkm 1 barkm I
TOTAL
P w m
P=( P ~x HL + PZv x h)/lD00 =

21 7
1 I 1
J 7 J --r?ofAL
m
PROCESS C A L C U ~ A ~ O WEET N
Sheet 2 ~f 2
1tPfDOPIMPI~XP~SUI
TWO pime PLPELWES P CALCULATlON

DATE
JO~T~TLE
ITEM:
NO.:
.
atv
J
BY.
cur
108 no,
rP
Covering Medium r
~g Ttmpcrature .C = k Thcrm. cond. kcal/hm*C r
4
1,
DATA -
p'
*
7'!?L
LlQU?D FLOW
L Ih Y D
h
Total pipeline length rn = No of stgrncnts Length per segment m = Total tltvation change ; rn =
Volumetric flow m3/h Density (av) ke/rn3 M Mass flow kg/h Cp Specific heat kcal/kgmC
GAS FLOW
=
5
Pipetire diameter
Pipslim diameter Burial depth to centre m

Inlet pressure
~ x i pressure t
ins = m =
PJ
~2
bara = bara =
Volumetric flow
mj/d (std)
AP
T1
3
>
Total pipeline lnitjal Temperature
bar
'C
'=
kg/h = Cp Specific heat kcal/kgmC =
Molecular mass M Mass flowrate
FLUID YOUtE THOhiSON COEFFICIENT = [see fig. 1, page 11.81

STEP 1. Calculate heat transfer factor
s
aF/I,OOO psi ( x 0.00805) =

NOTES Covering
*C/bar
VALUE
I
I
I I 1
x t 2h/D s = 2k / h [ x + (x2- ~ ) f ]
I
2. Calculate heat flow ratio wr unit
1 1 % = I s = 1 1
kca1fhrn.C
I 1 SOU 1 Air 1 Water
k
1.09
kca1Thrn~ I
0.022 0.508 0.30 1.09
I
I 1
1
::
t
I *
1
I
lennth
a = dMcp (liquid or gas)
1.
I
I
m-1
'C
I
1 1 = 4263
L is segment length
I
k k ?
I I
3. Calculate Asymptotic tempsrature Ta Ta =Tg (JAP + A y/jCp)/aL
Ta =
I
12 : C
9. Calculrte downstream temp
T2 s(T1 ~a)e-aL * Ta
T2
1 Repeat stcps 3 + Q for each segment I See sheet 2 for stepwise spreadsheet I
1
I 1
2 18
I I
TIPmDP'DIP't XPfOUP
81
FEZ7
(
CHK
i ' m TOTAL
PROCESS CalCULATlON SHEET Sheet
'
REV
--
BURIED PIPELIhiE
d t CALCULATlON
W9.:
DATE
1 0 1TITLE
100 co
7.
lTERA71VE CALCULATIQN LOG FOR A BURIED PIPELINEAT.
1
I
SEGMENT Na
I
I
I I
I
I
LENGTH
I I I I 1 I I I . I 1
1 2
3
4
5
1 I I I I
I I
I I I I I
I I
b
7
g
I I I I
1 1
1 1
I I
I
10
I I
1 I I
I I
I I
.
I I I I t i
I
I 1 I 1 7 i 1 I ELEVATION 1 PI 1 TI 1 Ta T2 I PZ l 1 1 1 I I 1 I 1 I +m 1 b a r a l ' C 1 'C I *C I baral I 1 I I I I 1 I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I I I ! - II I I 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I 1 1 I I 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I L I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 I ! 1 I I 1 I t I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I 1 I
1 I
I I 1 1 I
I I I I
I 1 1 I I I
I I
1
I
I I
1 1
I I I I I
I I I I
1
I.
I
I I I
II
I I
I I I I I 1
I I
~~~
&-
3 19
Sheet 2 of 2
ltP~VDP.VLP'EXPrSUR #V
JBL
1CH~
BURIED PlPElINE
DATE
Af
nru:
CALCULATlON
10V NU
UtV
101TITLE :
TOTAL
TEPIDPIEN'ISUR
Rovisien :
? -
No :
Dno
. 2/85
. ,
32
iP&3T'k.
TEPIDPIEXPISUR
Revision:
0
2/85
P~~INO.:
PROCESS DATA SHEETS

Date:
17.0
. I
PROCESS DATA SWEETS :
AIR COOLER
EXCHANGER
PUMP
COMPRESSOR
TRAYED COLUMN
PACKED COLUMN
FURNACE
FILTER
VESSEL
SllMMAtUES OF EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS
COLUMNS
PUMPS
HEAT EXCHANGERS COMPRESSORS - TURBO-EXPANDERS AIR COOLERS

DRUMS
FURNACES
E?iL.
cCP
@ E n
PROCESS D A T A SHEET
PIE
AIR-COOLER
Unli
.
1
TLPlDDP!
VvLI 8et~lc.:
Jab : ~rrviee :
: llem :
ma
ha
11
1.111
drrtlop~ lu11ue :
mam
CHARACTERISTICS
n
21
14
4
CONSTRUCTION
Tbrl p i r r ~ v n
0,Blgn lmnprnlun
.
b.r? bar g C
TUB6 MATERIAL
5D.3 C F P
TGTAL
EpE73
Job :
Pagr :
...
EXCHANGER
TEPIDDPI.
8111 SUII. per urn#
I
1
1
ttP* Cnerh p r l unlt
krvicr :
Unit : lltm :
C.lllng Surlmce p r ek.11
PERFORMANCE
DATA
SI
CONSTRUCTION
y
35
T u b r b r e l r -Sl.taonrrl B~ftle cma.
:
TIPI
fl ~ l l n q - :
a
37
38
a#
10
Bwwlw lorq ' t u b ~UWMB Ganitts CO(Ln*cllol@ shall In : charmel In : Carrorlon a t + a r n r . ahall crdt ~ W U I - ~ ~ ~ S Wwlghl 40Ch *hall
llw .
Thlfklnmmm : Thlsknt~l :
tpbclng : Spaclnp : SvbcIm~: kr1.n : @run : mm
mn
nm
I h l c h ~ r t r:
5mrltr : Scrlm~ : SI* TbI~tnll8 : Oul :
IVA
I
I
I nn
tem~ clan* :
43
. -4
Full 01 ~ 1 1 1 1
kg
G A Y 3
CFP
TEP/DOP/
BfJZ rnAL
Job : Smrvitr :
Pmlr :
PUMP
I
FLUlD HANDLED
Unit : llrm :
L
2 1
4 I
Flu14 clrrvlrlrd
Puaplnt trmper*lut?
Vlrcorltp 11 P.T.
Vlpor pralrutr *I .T.
*C
rg
k r l
I I
I
I 10
49
Spuilie q r r r l l r 1 6 / 4 fi*tllic ymvily r l P.T.
.
J
J
OPERATIHQ CONDITIONS
C~prelly Oi~rhrrle pratrun L d i a n bn*nurr ~n ~ t i * * s n t ~n rm l sfuf* math brr s bar a bar r
..
4s
I I
1
PUMP
1
n
ir
25
.
T n .
nfllns
..
,
. >
DRIVER
kw
, ,.
I
k
27
Wwa
OprrrI%n( lord Canarcltd lewd
n,
kwh
I/ ma
kW
HiwD
C F P
TOTAL
D " 1 3
$0:
Pn9r
COMPRESSOR
Srrvrce
1EP.'DOP/
1
I llrm :
HANDLED
Unit :
7
f LutD
Capacily OqC. 1 AT*
tlrn3fh
m31 h bm
f
Capacill (sucllan P.7.)
. - ,
-3
84
Sve11on prcssur~
Discharge prrlsut* C ~ n l p r r ~ ~ if O rli n o
bin g
C
COMPRESSOR
1 TP*
Nurnbc~
P5
~ S I Q OCPP,CI~V
Ellicimcy L1.1. brake h ~ r s e p o w c r
NmW b
. ..-a -
.1
28
'
26 87
k
hW I/M
--
-.
~pcra
Uabri~ls
DRIVER
T ypr Rating
Opbraling load
Conneclrd load
LW kwh kW
tImn
Swrd
KRVICE
UTEIIIIL
CQKihSUoY AUWAWCE
rn
NOTI!# ;
..
RLVIIIOH
V m & L
8-?.95'
is^^ C F P
BOUIPUEWT CHARACTERlSTlCS SUMhthRY
~ ~ C I D D 'P ~
AIR
COOLERS
SHEET
on u*
DRAWING
nr
CK~PAC~ERIITICS 1TY M'

NUYWR
UYITS
SERVICE
I# 0 i A e T E M
LCYSJ~ SETWEENTL
COSITLOw
mm
null
W I Z O M T A L :M L ? V
MIST L L I W I U T O R
mmu.
.OOT
nu
Rrn
6CTWEEY L.t.
matm
wzluil~a
comlf mu
MUM
~LFPURE
hrg
~rmnrruit~
.C
fl
'C
.
~
HEmtmE
TEWPZ l M T V~ M
.UTCRAL
Wltn T H l C X R I m
C O I # D O T m CLLOrAuaE
t WTr N O W r
rmTIl:
w mnaL
IIEWSW
I
.
-
& Z r T
CFP
EOUIPMENT CH&AACTERIST~CJ SULIIIARV

DRUMS
TEPIODPI DATE
J0a nm
DRAWIWO W
. 22q
SnEtT
CMRhCtER3tTICS
f t t Y II*
UNITS
HWlLll
SCRVlCE
f LUiO
M L L HOE
CllCULATLD -
TUBL ClDC
kdlb
HEAT EXCWGED
LY1.0.
wr
c
ti
tYPt
W I L OF ~ SCELU
LYIQ C O ~ V ~ L C T ~
x w *
3 z
CC
:# i i
OWERILL M L l l ? W E 1 1 UTE
Csrrrr
d
bu
I
ESTIM&TED A OPERI~~WO
MIEWE
"
COUDlT!WS
DESION CWITIQNS
Tf%PUTURE
*C
) r
PRElWRE
TEYPMTVRS
TYPE
'C
YAtEAIAL
ALLOIUICE
DPEwLtlNC
ChRQBIQW
nu
h t
PRLOSURE
I I
I
LI
cl A
E I
c~olllons
TNPEUTVIIE
DESIGN
ComDlTlOns
PRESURE
1
I
T E M PR ~ A T ~ ~ *c
TVPE
ALLQ*AHCE
II
I
YATERHL
CORRP61011
mm
1
I
MOTES :
I
nEWS10M
7 E P l-ObPf - -RC v --. -*

+
f l k s z
rnAL
E3:m
-,
4 0 0 H'
.--*
-- - -EOU~PMENTC H A ~ A C T E U I S T I C S SUMMARY
*---_C
MEAT
~ ~
-
,OA r i
A
-
W* H
-- -3 3 a -
~lxcn~nti~s O : M E E T n* .-.
...
- -.
I C -
--
- -.
---
.-
c n ~ n ~ C t E R l ICS St
17EU ND
NWBCR
--1
UNITS
--
.- -
- . I .
- -- * . ----- --,
1
--A,-,
A -
pnVlCE
.
o
3 L
4
WJuR
YOLECVLAR 1ElCnl
M G ....
- - kfif k
fi VILUE CP/CV
CCr3nfSslBlLltl
FACTOR
: =
D
WECtFIC W V I T I
w
h f .
i
DLUGll
PnES'*
T E W EM T W E
*C
O P E M T ~ K FLO. ~ A T L
rslh
d / C
b r r
. V
$LO* U T E
P(I E W n E
DILOIAME
COYPIIENIW
arno
YL'l ERlAL
TYPE
C m P R C m
m R A t t Y G LOlD
TYPE
DRIVER
COUWECTEO LOAD
1
n
L
I
I
YOtES :
*
RLWCtON
,
EOUIPMEMf CHARACT R I f T r c r StJMMARv
fi3 2 2 7mAL L%3z'

C F P TE P/DDP/
JOB N*
COMPRESSORS
1 DR111RG M*
3 s
TURBO-EXPANDERS
h
CHARAC I E R I S T I C S
t f E U W'
NUYBER
UNIT5
SERVICE
-.
IN. DIAM. BDTTDYI MlDDLCl TOP
.
m
1 1 1 1
TOTAL LENGTH T l l T L
m-'
TVPE NUUSER BQTTQIIUlObLE/ TOP
E. .
.
m
T ~ A Y SPACING BQTIClYNLDDLEnOP
OPERAT~WG
PREWRE
TEMP. D O T T W / TOP
PhEWhE
-we
*C
eg~ay~ml
DLSlGM
&a
'
COWDITIWS
TELIPEIIATVRE
*C
*.
M A T E R I A L B H E L U TRAYS
SMELL CLLC. THfCIII*Y
~~LLCORAO~OHALLOIAYCE
w
mm
4
E S T l V r T t D lElGHT ( f Y p T V I
HOTES : IWrrch)
.
REYlIlOll
.
am C F
P
RIYAL-
fT&TD
--EOUIPUEHT CHARACTERISTICS SUMMAPY
tE P / ODP
DATE
JOB k'
tQLL'ltrUS
DIIAMWG n-
SHEETU~'
3 3 9
CHARAC.TERISTICS # T E Y )1'
<
UNITS
..
wuuaEK
1
!
lERVlCE
. .
I? .
FLUID ClRCVL*TED
-P
I
SPECIFIC OP.&VITY A T SO. F
kg/ n)
FLOW RATE
3#C
*C
...
t.
i3
r
8 '
JEUFZRATURL
PRESSURE
8PEC lFlC GRAVITY
.VIXCIIt*
WPSH AVAILABLE
h a
b#l d
cP.
8 .
m
nslhr
brr
OESIEW FLOW RATE -DISCWARDL PRES5uRE .DlFFLREMT1Ab PRESSURE YATERIAL

.TIP'
.PUMP
&r
EFFlClLUCl OPERATING LOAO

,
%
I8
.TVPE
&RIVER
.
kOlLl:
CWWEC'ICD LOAD
'h
llEVlSlON
EOUIPYENT CHARACT ERlSTlCS SUMMARY

I E P I D P I PCOCZ
PUMPS
101 W 9
ORAWIHO N*
S H E E f W*
~m
C f P
WTAL
'
1 plpc
PACKED COLUMN
TEP/ POP/
1
Jab
Scrvica* :
1 Unit : .
Item :
~-
*
3
4
COLUMN CHARACTERlStlCS
Erlnlng l a w n :y . ln~ldo dlldnl~r
Packkg IyW
~
or no
"
mm
Pneklng dlam*ul
m
T
I
Numbr ml h a s
PACKINQ CHARACTERtStlCS
D L 3 3
cFP
TE P /
m A L
DDP/
Ea3
P R O C E S S D A T A SHEET
1 Pro8 :
Job:
FURNACE 1 ~ n r :l
j
ltrm :
s*rvlc- :
1
j
I
3 1
Ahorb4 bml
id Kcallh
IIUZ
Mar. ~ I l ~ w w b tbm all
i# KC~IIII
s
L
I
a
10
n
I2 13 14 1I
l*
t?
*a
1I
20
n
m a l y , ~ m u u n
COHSTRUCTION
art g
k r
13
t4
&llorrbla p r * a a u n drcg
tubrmlarlml
25
%
mdlm~lmm alnr ~ D ~ V . C I I D I It o n u
Fual
Dm3 M 3
TOTAL
CCP
P R O C E S S DATA SHEET
P . @ .
'
.
Job :
Setvice
FILTER
T E P I DQP/
TYPO
I
1
LC
~ n f :i 1t.m :
Murnbmr
2
3 1
S 6
Nstur* of H u l d
Flttrmtion lrnlrntyrr
FILTEREO FLUID
S p r e l w a u i l y d 15/4 S p c l l k grrvily r T
7
1
Virroaity m ' IP
Fr+ealng poinl Mature 08 I n ~ p u r l l i ~ r
cp
10
11
Prtrrure
12 13 I - . 14
Flow
u p ~ ~ l r l l n l / i o n
bar* nr3/ h
P
Y r i . prrsrur? drop
bar
15
DESIGN
Drsign I*mpetatun b e l g n prtasvrm
CONDITIONS
16 17
18
I
. r
ec brp.
MATERIAL
40 41
42
REVISION
dale
,
4 44
by
Checked
l
3Yd

Total Design Manuall

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Total Design Manuall

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

PROCESS ENGINEERING DESIGN MANUAL

Most methods are illustrated by seleeted examples.

Chapter 15 gives a selection of basic data which

sufficient for most calculations.

Blank pa& :are scattered along the chapters f o r personal notes.

In addition, blank pages are placed a t the end of the manual.

They arc to be used !or comments

will be part of our feedback.

J.P. LUCIANI, M. LE METAIS, R. ODELLO, B. PERISSE, U. WEBER, Mmc K. COTTIN,

. . HorizontaI Vertical . . Tray Packed

. Shell + tube . Air cmlers

PIPES VALVES + FITTINGS

. A P through valves and fittings . Control valves - sizing and sdection

12. PACKAGE UNITS

L7. PROCESS DATA SHEETS

Operating pressure bar13 0 - 10 10 50 50

Desinn pressure bark MOP + 1 bar

MOP z Maximum Process Operating

vacuum during operation shall be designed for

the maxlmurn external

operating pressure plus a margin of 0.15 bar.

3-0 DESIGN TEMPERATURES

min. operating Temp - 5 "C

or minimum ambient temperature.

Consideratian for t l ~ rninlrnurn dcsign temperature must take

d s @ f s s a u r m 4f Lhe v t s s ~ lthat m a y (Set sectlon on flaring).

Details of the required material of c o n s t r ~ t i o n for various tcrnperatures are given in

t R e E a ENGINEERIND DPIGN MANUAL

2 PHASE SEPARATORS (uwaly

Compres~lr a d Fwl G u KO drums

RdldS y r m KO drum See =tian

R q h d upt~am o f acid gas ahsorbtrs, glycol conmetors and dcrslcant bed

Produetian W r a t o r s (Vertical or horizontal)

ewnpreswr is located immediately downstream of separator. Always

and prvcas slu&swhen d e s -

production separators are g ~ ~ l hlo r y i ~ @ l .If good liquid-vapour dc

YAPOUR LIQUID SEPARATORS

3. HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL DESIGN

LID ) 1. Far vertical drums the velocity cannot.

vertical drum dces not alter the vapaur f k w area.

, Vtrtlcal drums utilise a smalkr plot and

arc easier to instrument with alarms and

Fuel gas KO drums

Absorber fctd K O drums

FCwtlfq instellatlmm '?

P r d u c t h n sqwatars HP 3-pharc separation

Try to avold v e s ~ l s with wall thickness grea#r than 100 m m as th-

fabrication and can prwe expensive.

(Valid only for pure gravity settlers with no intcrnals to enhance q a r a t i o n )

LIQUID-YAPOUR SETTLING VELOCITY

pv- liquid or yap- density kglrn3 V$ - settling velocity m/s

- drag cocfficicnt P - vapour viscosity - centipoise

- particle diameter -microns

correlating parameter mls

For higher pressures (> 50 bar) or viscosities i n excess of 0.01 cp it i s necessary t o

Equation 3 1s then used to calculate Vs.

LIQUID-LIQUID SETTLING VELOCITY

Setting the particle size

125 microns and using more useful units gives : U t in mm/min

The above equatlon 1 s valid lor REYNOLDS number of 0.1

If calculated settling velocity is > 250 rnmlmin use 250 rnax

rn ignore head volumes)

(see p a ~ c 2.13 for sketch)